20240912IPC to Staff 116 - Attachment Exhibit B StationsConstructionSpecification.pdf

Idaho Power Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Preface Division 2—Concrete
95-125 Cast-in-Place Concrete
Cable Specifications 95-126 Precast Concrete
95-11 600 Volt, Type XHHW or SIS
Switchboard Wire Cable Specification Division 3—Metals
95-12 600 Volt, Type USE-2, RHW-2 Low 95-137 Structural Steel
Voltage Cable Specification
95-14 600 Volt, Multi-Conductor Division 4—Electrical
Interconnect Cable Specification
95-15 600 Volt, Multi-Conductor Shielded 95-170 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
Yard Cable Specification 95-171 Raceway and Cable Tray
95-16 600 Volt, Type THHN or THWN 95-172 Conductors and Cables
Control Building Branch Circuit Wire 95-173 Control Panels
95-18 300 Volt, Twisted Shield Pair or Triad 95-175 Installation of Owner-Furnished
Instrumentation Cable Products
95-19 300 Volt, Multiple-Twisted Shielded 95-176 Insulators
Pair with a Common, Overall Shield 95-177 Buswork
Instrumentation Cable 95-178 Switches and Fused Disconnects
95-20 15 kV and 35 kV Underground
95-179 Station Grounding
Construction Specifications 95-180 Lighting
95-181 Electrical Testing
95-182 Antenna, Waveguide,
Division 0—General Requirements and Pressurization System
95-110 General Requirements 95-183 Single-Mode Fiber Optic Cable
95-184 Furnish and Deliver Pre-Manufactured
Division 1—Site Work Communications Shelter
95-114 Procuring Geotechnical Subsurface
Investigation
95-115 Selective Demolition
95-116 Station Earthwork
95-120 Chain-Link Fences and Gates
95-122 Nonconductive
(Fiberglass) Fences
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) TOCA

Table of Contents Idaho Power
Internal Use Only
TOC-2 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power
Preface
This manual is published on the Spillway. The procedures on the Spillway are the only final,
authorized, and current versions.All printed hard copies of these documents are uncontrolled
copies. It is the users'responsibility to use the authorized version.
How to Use this Manual
When using the online manual, users can access each procedure by clicking the links in the
Table of Contents or by clicking the bookmarks in the navigation pane on the left of the screen.
Conventions
The following symbols and text identify special information:
© This symbol indicates a note. Notes are used to provide additional information throughout the manual.
OThis symbol indicates important information. This is used to draw attention to items that are
necessary for completion of a process.
Qj This symbol indicates a warning. Failure to observe this warning may result in injury or death.
QThis symbol indicates a caution. Failure to observe this caution may result in damage to equipment or
a long-term health risk.
Revision History
Review Date Section Revision
03/06/2020 95-116 1.1.3.b—Clarified compaction testing by adding testing for Precast spread
foundations to the table.
03/06/2020 95-116 2.1.b.5—Added clarification to definition of finish grade crushed rock.
This material shall be crushed and have a minimum of 3 fractured sides.
03/06/2020 95-116 3.3—Changed"Access Road"to"Roads."Added "The following specification
shall apply to access roads and to designated roads inside the station."
03/06/2020 95-116 3.9.a—Added"minimum"and"the finish layer shall extend 5 feet minimum
outside the station fence. Finish grade crushed rock shall not be placed over
designated roads unless otherwise noted."
03/06/2020 95-116 4.3.4.d—Added, "Hydro vacuum excavation is permissible at all depths."
03/06/2020 95-116 5.3.9.a—Defined insulating layer of crushed rock to be 4"-6"thick.Added, "the
finish layer shall extend 5 feet minimum outside the station fence. Finish grade
crushed rock shall not be placed over designated roads unless otherwise noted."
03/06/2020 95-171 Edited and updated conduit specifications.
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) i

Idaho Power
Review Date Section Revision
03/06/2020 95-171 Removed most manufacturer references.
03/06/2020 95-171 Added section 2.3 Surface/Cable Trench and section 2.4 Cable Riser.
03/06/2020 95-171 2.1.a—Corrected"hot galvanized"to"hot-dip galvanized."
03/06/2020 95-171 2.2.c.4—Changed"Crouse-Hinds;Type CPR fittings"to"compression type fittings
rated appropriately for the type of installation; i.e., water tight or concrete
tight, etc."
03/06/2020 95-171 2.2.e.1—added"/302°F."
03/06/2020 95-171 3.1.h—Added, "In no case shall conduits shall not have greater than 360 degrees
of bend."
03/06/2020 95-171 3.1.m—Added, "Install concrete tight fittings for conduit encased in concrete or
flowable fill."
03/06/2020 95-171 3.5.c.3—Replaced, "preferred"with"required."Added, "Make sure that all holes
are completely filled or sealed to prevent moisture."
03/06/2020 95-171 3.14.c—Added, "Use diamond tipped bit to field drill holes for grounding as
required."
03/06/2020 95-171 3.14.d—Added, "Over excavate and compact structural fill below and beside the
trench as directed in manufacturer's installation instructions."
03/06/2020 95-171 3.14.e—Added, "Where designated roadways cross trench, the top of the road
must be level with the top of the trench."
03/06/2020 95-172 Color Code updates on pages 12 and 14.
03/06/2020 95-177 Removed the requirement to use bimetallic plates between aluminum to copper
connections and made corrosion inhibitor with grit"not approved"for use
in Stations.
03/06/2020 95-178 Changed title of specification from"Switches and Fuses"to"Switches and Fused
Disconnects."
03/06/2020 95-178 Changed requirement for drawing format from AutoCAD 3-D Inventor to
AutoCAD.dwg.
03/06/2020 95-178 Removed ambient temperature of 45 degrees C from service requirements(2.2)
because our requirement of 40 degrees C is covered by ANSI C37.30.
03/06/2020 95-178 Added gear ratio specification to 2.4.b for Group operated switch
operate mechanisms.
03/06/2020 95-178 Added inspection requirement to 3.1.f.
03/06/2020 95-179 Replaced Cadweld with exothermic or similar.
03/06/2020 95-179 Added information regarding external ground wire(copperweld), dead end
foundation section and requirement for hand-digging in existing yards.
Clarified burial depth of ground conductor and vault grounding requirements.
Internal Use Only
ii Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power
Review Date Section Revision
03/06/2020 95-183 Edited references to specific suppliers and Contractor.Added references to
Overhead Manual and Underground Manual throughout. Developed section for
routing and installation of backbone fiber inside of the fence including directions
for concrete encasement. Changed fiber performance testing results to align with
Overhead Manual 04-06.Added specific manufacturer for cable sealing fittings,
Jack Moon.
03/01/2021 95-114 Added 95-114 Procuring Geotechnical Subsurface Investigation as a new section.
03/01/2021 95-172 Change to section 3.10.d: Current transformer secondary conductors shall not
be spliced.
03/01/2021 95-180 Split the specification into two distinct sections for Indoor and outdoor lighting.
In future, control will maintain the indoor portion and structural will maintain the
outdoor lighting portion.Added definition of"luminaire." Describes materials
supplied by IPC and materials supplied by contractor.Added specifications for
outdoor/yard luminaires, support structures, support foundations, conduit,
and grounding.Added specifications for installation of outdoor/yard luminaires,
support structures, support foundations, conduit, and grounding.
03/01/2021 95-183 Directed Inspection and Construction to contact the project engineer or designer
to verify deviations between construction documents and the guidelines in this
section prior to proceeding with backbone fiber installation. Made a requirement
in section 2.1 that All Dielectric Self-Supporting (ADSS)meets the requirements
of Overhead Manual section 04-06.Adopted naming conventions from Overhead
Sections Manual 04-02 and 04-06 for sections 2.5 and 2.6. Verified with
Communications group that Fiber Performance was still within industry specs.
03/14/2022 95-178 Added 2.3.i All switches shall be crated and packaged so as to protect the
insulators and the equipment from potential damage that could occur during
shipping.
03/14/2022 95-125 Change requirement for 4000 psi concrete to 4500 psi concrete. Updated testing
requirements and references.
03/14/2022 95-122 New specification for non-conductive(i.e.fiberglass)station barriers
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) iii

Idaho Power
Internal Use Only
iv Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power
CHAPTER
95-11 600 Volt, Type XHHW or SIS
Switchboard Wire Cable 95�11
Specification
Switchboard wire used on Idaho Power Company panels and switchboards shall conform to the
following specifications.
Wire Type
XHHW or SIS
Conductor
Tinned, annealed copper per ASTM B33
Stranding
41 strand, Class K per ASTM B 174
Insulation
Flame-retardant ethylene propylene rubber(FR-EPR), UL listed VW-1, 600-volt.
The insulation shall be free stripping either inherently by conductor manufacturing process or by
providing a paper separator tape.
Operating Temperature
Dry: 90 °C
Wet: 75 °C
Application
This wire is used for wiring control panels, switchboards, and control apparatus, in conduits, and
in wet or dry locations.
Identification
The cable shall be permanently and legibly marked with the manufacturer's name, the maximum
working voltage for which cable was tested, the type of cable, and the UL listing mark.
Packing and Shipping
The cable shall be placed on individual reels with diameters at least 12 times the outside diameter
of the cable shipped thereon.
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-11-1

95-11 600 Volt, Type XHHW or SIS Switchboard Wire Cable Specification Idaho Power
Non-returnable reels must be of substantial construction to withstand multiple handling in transit.
Each reel must be securely tagged showing the PO#, item number, length of cable, size and
number of conductors, and the insulation voltage rating.
The cable must be protected with a suitable lagging on each reel.
Internal Use Only
95-11-2 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power
CHAPTER
95-12 600 Volt, Type USE-2, RHW-2
Low Voltage Cable Specification 95m12
Low voltage (600 Volt),underground-service cable used in Idaho Power Company stations shall
conform to the following specifications.
Wire Type
USE-2 or RHW-2
Conductor
Annealed, coated, stranded copper per ASTM B3
Stranding
Class B per ASTM B8
Insulation
Cross-linked polyethylene, thermosetting XLPE or EPR/thermoset CPE, UL listed VW-1, 600-
volt and listed CT USE (size 1/0 and larger) for use in cable tray.
Operating Temperature
Wet or Dry: 90 °C
Application
The cable will be used for AC and DC local service main, feeder, and branch circuit applications.
It will also be used for connection to local service transformers where sunlight resistance is
required. It may also be used for direct burial installations or in surface trench and
conduit systems.
Identification
The cable shall be permanently and legibly marked with the manufacturer's name, the maximum
working voltage for which cable was tested, the type of cable, and the UL listing mark.
Packing and Shipping
The cable shall be placed on individual reels with diameters at least 12 times the outside diameter
of the cable shipped thereon.
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-12-1

95-12 600 Volt, Type USE-2, RHW-2 Low Voltage Cable Specification Idaho Power
Non-returnable reels must be of substantial construction to withstand multiple handling in transit.
Each reel must be securely tagged showing the PO#, item number, length of cable, size and
number of conductors, and the insulation voltage rating.
The cable must be protected with a suitable lagging on each reel.
Internal Use Only
95-12-2 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power
CHAPTER
95-14 600 Volt, Multi-Conductor
Interconnect Cable Specification 9r!�m14
The 600 Volt, multi-conductor interconnect cable used in Idaho Power Company stations must
comply with the following specifications.
Type
TC - meeting requirements of UL 1277
Conductors
Coated copper per ASTM B-33
Stranding
Class B stranding per ASTM B-8
Insulation
Flame-retardant ethylene-propylene rubber(FREP) or flame-retardant cross-linked polyethylene
(FRXLPE), UL rated VW-1, 600 volt: XHHW-2
Jacket
Vulcanized chlorosulfonated polyethylene (CSPE) or thermoset chlorinated polyethylene (CPE).
Thermoplastic CPE is not permitted. Free stripping.
Fillers
Fillers shall be flame-resistant and non-hygroscopic (non-wicking), if required
Core Binder
Core binder tape or extrusion shall be flame resistant
Color Coding
ICEA Method 1, Sequence E-1
Temperature Rating
Dry: 90 °C
Wet: 90 °C
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-14-1

95-14 600 Volt, Multi-Conductor Interconnect Cable Specification Idaho Power
Assembly
Multiple 600-volt conductors cabled in accordance with UL 1277 using fillers, as required,with a
cable binder tape overall. The cable assembly shall be free stripping. The assembly shall pass the
ICEA T-29-520, 210,000 Btu/hr and IEEE 1202 vertical tray flame test.
Cable Sizes
No. of Conductors Cable Sizes
2 2C#12, 2C#10
4 4C#12, 4C#10
7 7C#12
Application
Interconnection between apparatus control cabinets and between control panels.
Suitable for installation in open air(sunlight resistant), cable trays, conduit, cable trenches, or
direct earth burial.
Identification
Permanent, durable means of identification such as distinctive marker threads or printed legend
on the jacket.
Packing and Shipping
Cable placed on individual reels with diameters at least 12 times the outside diameter of the cable
shipped thereon.
Non-returnable reels of substantial construction to withstand multiple handling in transit.Cable
protected with a suitable lagging on each reel.
Each reel securely tagged showing PO#, item number, length of cable, size and number of
conductors, and insulation voltage rating.
Internal Use Only
95-14-2 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power
CHAPTER
95-15 600 Volt, Multi-Conductor
Shielded Yard Cable Specification 9r!�m15
The 600 Volt, multi-conductor shielded yard cable used in Idaho Power Company stations must
comply with the following specifications.
Type
TC - meeting requirements of UL 1277
Conductors
Coated copper per ASTM B-33
Stranding
Class B stranding per ASTM B-8
Insulation
Flame-retardant ethylene-propylene rubber(FREP) or flame-retardant cross-linked polyethylene
(FRXLPE), UL rated VW-1, 600 volt: XHHW-2
Cable Shield
5 mil copper tape, helically applied(spiral)with 25% overlap
Jacket
Vulcanized chlorosulfonated polyethylene (CSPE) or thermoset chlorinated polyethylene (CPE)
Thermoplastic CPE is not permitted
Free stripping
Fillers
Fillers shall be flame-resistant and non-hygroscopic (non-wicking), if required
Core Binder
Core binder tape or extrusion shall be flame resistant
Color Coding
ICEA Method 1, Sequence E-1
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-15-1

95-15 600 Volt, Multi-Conductor Shielded Yard Cable Specification Idaho Power
Temperature Rating
Dry: 90 °C
Wet: 90°C
Assembly
Multiple 600-volt conductors cabled in accordance with UL 1277 using fillers, as required,with 5
mil-helically applied copper tape shield with 25% overlap. The cable assembly shall be free
stripping.
The cable must pass the ICEA T-29-520 210,000 Btu/Hr and IEEE 1202 Vertical Tray Flame Test.
Cable Sizes
No. of Conductors Cable Sizes
2 2C#10, 2C#8, 2C#6
4 4C#10, 4C#8, 4C#6
7 7C#12
12 12C#10
Application
Connection between substation apparatus and control building equipment and SCADA
interconnection circuits
Suitable for installation in open air(sunlight resistant), cable trays, conduit, cable trenches, or
direct earth burial
Identification
Permanent, durable means of identification such as distinctive marker threads or printed legend
on the jacket.
Packing And Shipping
Cable placed on individual reels with diameters at least 12 times the outside diameter of the cable
shipped thereon.
Non-returnable reels of substantial construction to withstand multiple handling in transit.
Cable protected with a suitable lagging on each reel.
Each reel securely tagged showing PO#, item number, length of cable, size and number of
conductors, and insulation voltage rating.
Internal Use Only
95-15-2 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power
CHAPTER
95-16 600 Volt, Type THHN or THWN
Control Building Branch Circuit Wire 9r!�m16
Control building branch circuit wire used on Idaho Power Company panels and switchboards
shall conform to the following specifications.
Wire Type
THHN or THWN
Conductor
Soft or annealed copper per ASTM B-3.
Stranding
Solid conductor for#10 AWG and smaller.
Stranded conductor for gages larger than#10 AWG.
Insulation
Type THHN or THWN
UL listed VW-1, 600 Volt
Operating Temperature
Dry: 90 °C
Wet: 75 °C
Application
Control building,branch circuit wiring - lighting and receptacle wiring. THHN can only be used
in dry locations (typically indoors). THWN must be used outdoors or in any wet location. THHN/
THWN must be installed in conduit and is not tray rated. Use SIS/XHHW for panels/
switchboard wiring.
Standards
Conform to applicable requirements of NEMA WC 3,WC 5, and WC 7.
Cable Size
Minimum Size -No. 14 AWG
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-16-1

95-16 600 Volt, Type THHN or THWN Control Building Branch Circuit Wire Idaho Power
Identification
Permanently and legibly marked with manufacturer's name,maximum working voltage for which
cable was tested, type of cable, and UL listing mark.
Packing and Shipping
Cable placed on individual reels with diameters at least 12 times the outside diameter of the cable
shipped thereon. Non-returnable reels of substantial construction to withstand multiple handling
in transit. Cable protected with a suitable lagging on each reel. Each reel securely tagged showing
PO#, item number, length of cable, size and number of conductors, and insulation voltage rating.
Internal Use Only
95-16-2 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power
CHAPTER
95-18 300 Volt, Twisted Shield Pair or
Triad Instrumentation Cable 9r!�m18
The 300 Volt, twisted, shielded pair or triad instrumentation cable used in Idaho Power Company
stations must comply with the following specifications.
Type
PLTC -meeting requirements of UL 13
Conductors
7-strand bare soft annealed copper
Stranding
Class B stranded per ASTM B8
Insulation
Flame-retardant PVC (15 mils)
Cable Shield
1.35 mil aluminum-polyester foil providing 100 percent coverage and 7-strand tinned copper
drain wire.
Drain wire two sizes smaller than the conductor.
Jacket
Black, flame retardant, sunlight-and oil-resistant PVC with a longitudinally laid ripcord under the
jacket to facilitate jacket removal.
Conductor Color Code
Pigmented black and white in pairs.
Pigmented black, red and white in triads.
Temperature Rating
105 °C
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-18-1

95-18 300 Volt, Twisted Shield Pair or Triad Instrumentation Cable Idaho Power
Assembly
Single pair or triad of 300-volt conductors with overall aluminum-polyester foil shield and tinned
copper drain wire.
Insulated conductors twisted into a pair or triad.
Cable Sizes
Pairs: 1 PR#18
Triads: 1 TR#18, 1 TR#16
Application
SCADA instrumentation cable.
Cable suitable for installation in open air, in cable trays (passes vertical tray flame test), or
conduit.
Identification
Permanently and legibly marked with manufacturer's name,maximum working voltage for which
cable was tested, type of cable, and UL listing mark.
Packing and Shipping
Cable placed on individual reels with diameters at least 12 times the outside diameter of the cable
shipped thereon.
Non-returnable reels of substantial construction to withstand multiple handling in transit.
Cable protected with a suitable lagging on each reel.
Each reel securely tagged showing PO#, item number, length of cable, size and number of
conductors, and insulation voltage rating.
Internal Use Only
95-18-2 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power
CHAPTER
95-19 300 Volt, Multiple-Twisted
Shielded Pair with a Common, 9r!�M19
Overall Shield Instrumentation Cable
All 300 Volt,multiple-twisted, shielded-pair, instrumentation cable with a common overall shield
used in Idaho Power Company stations must comply with the following specifications.
Type
PLTC -meeting requirements of UL 13
Conductors
7-strand bare soft annealed copper
Stranding
Class B stranded per ASTM B8
Insulation
Flame-retardant PVC (15 mils)
Cable Shield
Group Shield: 1.35 mil aluminum-polyester foil providing 100 percent coverage and 7-strand
tinned copper drain wire.
Drain wire sized two sizes smaller than the conductor.All group shields completely isolated from
each other.
Cable Shield: 2.35 mil aluminum-polyester foil providing 100 percent coverage and 7-strand
tinned copper drain wire.
Drain wire - same size as the conductor.
Jacket
Black, flame retardant, sunlight-and oil-resistant PVC with a longitudinally laid ripcord under the
jacket to facilitate jacket removal.
Conductor Color Code
Pigmented black and white in pairs-white conductor numerically printed for group identification.
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-19-1

95-19 300 Volt, Multiple-Twisted Shielded Pair with a Common, Overall Shield Instrumentation Cable
Temperature Rating
105 °C
Assembly
Multiple shielded pairs of 300-volt conductors with overall aluminum-polyester foil shield and
tinned copper drain wire.
Insulated conductors twisted into pairs.
Cable Sizes
2PR#18, 4PR#18
Application
SCADA instrumentation cable.
Cable suitable for installation in open air, in cable trays (passes vertical tray flame test), or conduit
Identification
Jacket permanently and legibly marked with manufacturer's name,maximum working voltage for
which cable was tested, type of cable, and UL listing mark
Packing and Shipping
Cable placed on individual reels with diameters at least 12 times the outside diameter of the cable
shipped thereon.
Non-returnable reels of substantial construction to withstand multiple handling in transit.
Cable protected with a suitable lagging on each reel. Each reel securely tagged showing PO#,
item number, length of cable, size and number of conductors, and insulation voltage rating.
Internal Use Only
95-19-2 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power
CHAPTER
95-20 15 kV and 35 kV Underground 9r!omm2O
All 15 kV and 35 kV cables used in Idaho Power Substations for underground applications shall
comply with the requirements referenced in Idaho Power Company Methods and Materials—
Materials manual section 19-053.
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-20-1

95-20 15 W and 35 W Underground Idaho Power
Internal Use Only
95-20-2 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power
CHAPTER
95-110 General Requirements 95HO
1. General
1.1. Scope of Work
See the Contract Special Conditions for the general description of the Scope of Work. See the
drawings and specifications for specific details relating to the scope of work.
1.2. Specifically Excluded Work
See the Contract Special Conditions for the general description of the Specifically Excluded
Work. See the drawings and specifications for specific details relating to the specifically excluded
scope of work.
1.3. Collateral Work
Any collateral work indicated in the special conditions, the drawings, or called out in the
specifications must be coordinated with the appropriate parties during the accomplishment of this
work scope.
1.4. Summary
a. Specifications and drawings included in these Contract Documents establish the
performance, quality requirements, location, and general arrangement of materials and
equipment,and establish the minimum standards for quality of workmanship and appearance.
Unless stated otherwise, all substation construction work shall meet or exceed the
requirements of these specifications.
b. Specification sections have not been divided into groups for the work of subcontractors or the
various trades.Any questions concerning the applicability or interpretation of the documents
should be directed to the Owner.
c. Incidental work that is necessary or required to make each installation satisfactory and
operable for its intended purpose, even though it is not specifically included in the Contract
Documents, shall be performed as if it were described in the Specifications or shown on
the drawings.
d. Work may involve construction in the presence of electrically energized facilities.
The Contractor shall be required to provide adequate protection and ensure that persons
performing work on this project follow proper precautions.
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-110-1

95-110 General Requirements Idaho Power
e. The Owner may provide drawings marked in four different colors indicating the work to be
performed by the Contractor. The color convention is as follows:
1. Red: Red is used on drawings by the Owner to indicate to the Contractor changes or
additions to be made as part of the project. The Owner will incorporate these changes
and additions in the as-built drawings following the completion of construction.
2. Green: Green is used to indicate changes or additions made during the project after the
design has been issued. The Owner will incorporate these changes and additions in the
as-built drawings following the completion of the project construction.
3. Blue: The Owner or the Contractor will use Blue to indicate field-discovered print
corrections only. These are existing conditions that differ from those shown on the
drawings. The Owner will make these changes and additions in the as-built drawings
following the completion of the project construction.
4. Orange: Orange is used primarily by the Owner to give instructions to the Contractor.
The Owner will ignore these instructions when as-built drawing corrections are created.
1.5. Responsibilities
a. The Contractor shall be responsible for the following:
1. Provision of a complete system(s) in accordance with the intent of these
Contract Documents.
2. Coordinating construction activities with other contractors, if the Owner has awarded
separate contracts for the project.
3. Coordinating with the Owner to determine material delivery schedules and the Owner's
material acceptance testing schedule for all Owner-furnished equipment.
4. Furnishing and installing all incidental items not actually shown or specified,but which
are required by good practice to provide complete and functional systems.
5. Unless it is otherwise indicated as the responsibility of another identified entity,
providing inspections, tests, and other quality-control services specified elsewhere in
the Contract Documents and required by authorities having jurisdiction. The costs for
these services are to be included in the Contract Sum.
6. Employing and paying a qualified independent testing agency to perform quality
inspection services when individual sections specifically indicate that certain
inspections, tests, and other quality-control services are the Contractor's responsibility.
The independent testing agency shall be approved by the Owner prior to performing
their work. Costs for these services are to be included in the Contract Sum.
7. When individual sections specifically indicate that certain inspections, tests, and other
quality-control services are the Owner's responsibility, the Owner will perform the
Internal Use Only
95-110-2 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power 95-110 General Requirements
services or will employ and pay a qualified independent agency to perform
those services.
8. Providing additional testing where results of inspections, tests, or other quality control
services prove unsatisfactory and indicate noncompliance with Contract Document
requirements, regardless of whether the original testing was the
Contractor's responsibility.
9. Covering the cost of retesting when required tests performed on original construction
indicate noncompliance with Contract Document requirements.
b. The Contractor shall cooperate with the Owner or the Owner's agents who are performing
required inspections, tests, startup, and commissioning, and provide reasonable auxiliary
services as requested. The Contractor shall notify the Owner sufficiently in advance of
operations to permit the assignment of personnel.Required auxiliary services include,but are
not limited to, the following:
1. Providing access to the Work.
2. Assisting the Owner during functional testing, startup, and commissioning.
3. Furnishing the labor and facilities necessary to provide corrective measures during
commissioning or to facilitate inspections and testing.
4. Taking adequate quantities of representative samples of materials required for testing or
assisting the agency in taking appropriate samples.
1.6. Construction Staking and Surveying
a. Unless stated otherwise, construction staking and surveying will be performed by others
under separate contract. The Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner and the staking and
surveying contractor, as required, for construction staking and surveying information.
b. If construction staking and surveying is provided by the Owner:
1. It shall be limited to the reference points indicated on the drawings and in the
Specifications. The Contractor shall establish all other reference points.
2. The Contractor shall preserve survey stakes established by the Owner unless the Owner
authorizes their removal.Any stakes destroyed or removed by the Contractor's agents,
employees, or subcontractors without approval of the Owner will be replaced by the
Owner at the Contractor's expense. The cost to the Contractor for replacing stakes
destroyed or removed as aforementioned shall include actual labor cost incurred plus a
reasonable charge for use of supplies and equipment and shall be deducted from
payments due the Contractor. Survey stakes destroyed or removed through no fault of
the Contractor shall be replaced by the Owner at the Owner's expense. The Owner shall
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-110-3

95-110 General Requirements Idaho Power
correct any errors or replace missing stakes as soon as possible after being notified by
the Contractor.
3. If it appears to the Contractor that any structure as staked is in error,the Contractor shall
notify the Owner immediately and no further work shall be performed on the structure
or structures in question until such difference or error is resolved. If the Contractor
proceeds without the Owner's direction, all such work shall be at the Contractor's
own risk.
4. The Owner shall furnish survey stakes to establish perpendicular north-south and east—
west baselines and at least one benchmark(elevation).All other layout staking and
elevations shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
c. If construction staking and surveying is provided by the Contractor:
l. The Owner will provide reference marks on the Drawings.
2. The location and elevation of benchmarks will be shown on the Drawings.
3. Dimensions for lines and elevations for grades of structures, appurtenances,
and utilities, together with other pertinent information required for laying out the work,
are indicated on the Drawings. If conditions vary from those indicated, the Contractor
must notify the Owner immediately to ascertain the required adjustments.
4. The Owner may perform checks to verify the accuracy of the Contractor's layout work
and to assure that completed work complies with the Contract Documents.
5. Any existing survey points or other control markers destroyed without proper
authorization will be replaced by the owner of the survey points or control markers at
the Contractor's expense.
6. Contractor's Responsibility
a. To provide the surveying, from the reference points shown on the Drawings,
required to layout the facilities.
b. To locate and protect reference points prior to starting site preparation.
C. To check and establish the exact location of existing facilities prior to the
construction of new facilities and any connections thereto.
d. To request clarification before proceeding with the work in the event of
discrepancies in the data or staking provided by the Owner.
e. To preserve and leave control staking undisturbed until the Owner has completed
the checks it deems necessary.
Internal Use Only
95-110-4 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power 95-110 General Requirements
f. To maintain a complete and accurate record-document, logging the progress of
all survey work.
g. To provide competent employees, tools, stakes, and other equipment and
materials as the Owner may require for checking the layout, survey, and
measurement work performed by others.
h. To cooperate with the Owner so that checking and measuring may be
accomplished with the least interference to the Contractor's operation.
1.7. Abbreviations, Codes, and Standards
a. The Contract Documents contain references to various standard specifications, codes,
practices, and requirements for materials, workmanship, installation, inspections, and tests.
These standards are published and issued, by the organizations, societies, and associations,
by abbreviation, name and number.
b. Work specified by reference to a published standard or specification of a government agency,
technical association, trade association,professional society or institute, testing agency,
or other organization shall meet the specified requirements or surpass the minimum standards
of quality for materials and workmanship established by the designated standard
or specification.
c. Where so specified within the Contract Documents, products or workmanship shall meet or
exceed any referenced standard to establish a higher or more stringent standard of quality.
d. Where two or more standards are specified to establish quality,the product and workmanship
shall meet or exceed the requirements of the most stringent standard.
e. Whenever an abbreviation is specified, it shall be understood to represent the full name of the
respective organization and/or referenced specification, code,practice, rule, etc. as listed
below:
1. AA The Aluminum Association
2. AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials
3. ACI American Concrete Institute
4. AISC American Institute of Steel Construction
5. ANSI American National Standard Institute
6. ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers
7. ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
8. ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-110-5

95-110 General Requirements Idaho Power
9. AWS American Welding Society
10. BLM Bureau of Land Management
11. CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
12. EEI-AEIC Edison Electric Institute Publications
13. EPA Environmental Protection Agency
14. FAA Federal Aviation Administration
15. FERC Federal Energy Regulatory Commission
16. FS Federal Specification
17. ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association
18. IEEE Institute of Electronic and Electrical Engineers
19. IMC International Mechanical Code
20. NBS National Bureau of Standards
21. NEC National Electric Code
22. NECA National Electrical Contractors Association
23. NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
24. NESC National Electrical Safety Code
25. NETA National Electrical Testing Association
26. NFPA National Fire Protection Association
27. OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Association
28. PCA Portland Cement Association
29. REA Rural Electrification Administration
30. SAE Society of Automotive Engineers
31. Idaho Power's SEM Station Engineering Manual
32. SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council
33. IBC International Building Code
Internal Use Only
95-110-6 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power 95-110 General Requirements
34. UL Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
35. USFS United States Forest Service
36. WCRSI Western Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
f. Any material, method, or procedure specified by reference to a specific standard or
specification shall comply with the requirements in the latest revision thereof and any
amendments or supplements thereto that are in effect on the date of these
Contract Documents.
g. Referenced codes, specifications, or standards, except as modified in these Specifications,
shall have full force and effect as though printed in these Specifications. Such specifications
and standards are not furnished to bidders, since the manufacturers and trades involved are
assumed to be familiar with their requirements. Contractors should obtain copies of these
standards directly from the publisher or publishing organization.
2. Products (Not Used)
3. Execution
3.1. Coordination and Site Conditions
a. Refer to the General Conditions for provisions regarding site conditions.
b. Existing Electrical Service and Other Utilities:
1. The Contractor shall make all arrangements necessary for the protection of existing
structures,utilities, or services where the Contractor's operations could cause damage or
inconvenience to the same. The Contractor shall replace existing items removed or
damaged during construction to their original condition and to the satisfaction of the
Owner,unless otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents.
2. The Contractor shall be solely and directly responsible to the Owner and the Owner's
customers for damage, injury, expense, loss, inconvenience, delay, suits, actions,
or claims of any character brought because of unscheduled outages or damage to other
utilities which result from construction operations under this Contract.
3. Neither the Owner nor its officers or agents shall be responsible to the contractor for
damages as a result of the Contractor's failure to exercise care or protect utilities
encountered in the work.
4. In the event of interruption to power or other utility services as a result of accidental
damage due to construction operations, the Contractor shall promptly notify the proper
authority, cooperate with that authority in restoration work as promptly as possible,
and pay for the repairs. The Contractor shall prevent any interruption of utility service
unless an interruption is granted by the utility owner.
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-110-7

95-110 General Requirements Idaho Power
c. Field Relocation:
1. During construction, it is expected that minor relocations of existing or proposed
facilities may be necessary. The Contractor shall make such relocations only by
direction of the Owner. If existing structures are encountered that prevent construction
as shown, the Contractor shall notify the Owner before continuing with the work so the
Owner may make the necessary field revisions.
d. Markers and Monuments:
1. The Contractor shall preserve and protect survey monuments and markers throughout
construction. If damage occurs or removal becomes necessary, the Contractor shall
immediately notify the Owner and restore the monument or marker to its
original condition.
e. Salvage of Materials:
1. Unless otherwise indicated, all material required to be removed and salvaged shall
remain the property of the Owner and shall be promptly removed from the site and
delivered to Idaho Power's Salvage Center located at 11900 Franklin Road,
Boise, Idaho.
f. Connecting to Existing Facilities:
1. Unless otherwise shown or specified,the Contractor shall determine appropriate
methods for connecting new work to existing facilities and obtain the Owner's review
and acceptance of such methods. Where necessary for connecting new work, the
Contractor shall determine the location, elevation, nature, materials, dimensions,
and configuration of all existing facilities.
g. Modification to Existing Facilities:
1. Where existing facilities are to be modified during the course of the work,
the Contractor shall obtain the Owner's review and approval for submittals for work
requiring temporary shutdown,demolition,modification,connections between new and
existing work, and any other work not described in the original package. The submittals
shall provide detailed information on the work to be accomplished and how long the
service will be disrupted if a temporary shutdown is required.
h. Operation and Shutdown of Existing Facilities:
1. Temporary outages will be permitted during cutover work at such times and places as
can be prearranged with the Owner. The Contractor shall carefully coordinate and
schedule all outages with the Owner at least 2 weeks in advance,unless otherwise stated
by the Owner.
Internal Use Only
95-110-8 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power 95-110 General Requirements
3.2. Cutting and Patching
a. Structural and Operational Limitations: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner
that would change their load carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio. Do not cut and patch
operating elements or related components in a manner that would result in reducing their
capacity to perform as intended or would result in increased maintenance or decreased
operational life or safety.
b. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction elements exposed on the exterior or
in occupied spaces in a manner that would reduce aesthetic qualities or would result in visual
evidence of cutting and patching.
c. The Contractor shall remove and replace new construction not meeting these limitations
and requirements.
3.3. Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls
a. In general, during the construction period, the Contractor shall have full use of the premises
for construction operations,including the use of the site. The Contractor's use of the premises
is limited only by the Owner's right to perform work or to retain other contractors on portions
of the project.
b. The Contractor shall provide, operate, and maintain appropriate power, water, sewage,
telephone, and other temporary utilities as required by the General Conditions.
c. The Contractor shall construct temporary storage yards for the storage of Owner furnished
products or materials as required. Materials shall be stored on pallets or racks,off the ground,
and in a manner to allow ready access for inspection and inventory.
d. The Contractor shall erect a temporary security fence with gates and locks where required.
The Contractor shall also provide barricades as necessary to prevent unauthorized entry to
construction areas, both inside and outside of the fenced areas. The Contractor shall also
provide barricades to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from potential
damage. Barricades must be located in a manner to enable access by facility operators and
property owners.
e. Examination of Existing Facilities:
1. After the Contract is awarded and before the commencement of work, the Contractor
shall make a thorough examination of all existing buildings, structures, and other
improvements in the vicinity of the work, as applicable, which might be damaged
during construction operations.
2. The Contractor shall prepare records in triplicate of all observations made by the
Contractor. The authorized representative of the Owner and the Contractor shall sign
each copy of every document.
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-110-9

95-110 General Requirements Idaho Power
f. Safety Requirements:
1
1. The Contractor shall take every precaution necessary for safety and be solely and
completely responsible for conditions on the jobsite, including the safety of all persons
and property during the contract period. This requirement shall apply continuously and
not be limited to normal working hours.
2. Safety provisions shall conform to the Federal and State Departments of Labor
Occupational Safety and Health Act(OSHA), and other applicable federal, state,
county, and local laws, ordinances, codes, and requirements set forth herein.
Where these are in conflict, the more stringent requirement shall apply.
3. The Contractor shall develop and maintain, for the duration of the Contract, a safety
program as set forth in the General Conditions.
g. Traffic Safety and Access:
1. The Contractor shall comply with all rules and regulations of the city, state, and county
authorities regarding closing or restricting the use of public streets or highways.
No public or private road shall be closed, except by written permission of the proper
authority.The Contractor shall assure the least possible obstruction to traffic and normal
commercial pursuits.
2. Where traffic will pass over backfilled trenches before they are paved, the Contractor
shall maintain the top of the trench to allow normal vehicular traffic to pass over.
The Contractor shall provide temporary access to driveways where required.
Cleanup operations shall follow immediately behind the backfilling operation.
3. When flagmen and guards are required by regulation or when deemed necessary for
safety, the Contractor shall furnish them with approved highly visual apparel and other
regulation traffic control devices.
h. Fire Prevention: The Contractor shall perform all work in a fire-safe manner, furnish and
maintain on-site adequate firefighting equipment capable of extinguishing incipient fires,
and comply with applicable federal, local, and state fire prevention regulations.
i. Protection of Work and Property:
1. The Contractor shall employ such means and methods as necessary to adequately
protect public and private property as well as the property of the Owner against damage.
In the event of damage to such property, the Contractor shall immediately restore the
property to a condition equal to its original condition and to the satisfaction of the
Owner, and bear all costs thereof.
2. Protection of Existing Trees and Vegetation: The Contractor shall protect existing trees
and other indicated vegetation allowing them to remain in place without damage.
This will include protection against unnecessary cutting, breaking or skinning of roots,
Internal Use Only
95-110-10 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power 95-110 General Requirements
skinning or bruising of bark, and the smothering of trees by stockpiling construction
materials or excavated materials within the drip line, excess foot or vehicular traffic,
or the parking of vehicles within the drip line. The Contractor shall provide temporary
guards to protect trees and vegetation to be left standing.
3. Salvageable Improvements: The Contractor shall carefully remove items indicated to be
salvaged and store them on Idaho Power's premises where indicated or directed.
4. The Contractor shall not disturb portions of the site beyond the areas in which the work
is indicated.
5. The Contractor shall keep driveways and entrances serving the premises clear and
available to the Owner and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for
parking or the storage of materials. The Contractor shall schedule deliveries to
minimize space and time requirements for the storage of materials and equipment
on-site.
j. Finished Construction:
I. The Contractor shall assume responsibility for protecting finished construction and
shall repair and restore any and all damaged work to its original or a better condition.
2. When temporary facilities and utilities are no longer required, the Contractor should
notify the Owner of their intent and schedule their removal. The Contractor shall
remove temporary facilities and utilities from the site and leave the site in such a
condition as specified on the drawings or as directed by the Owner.
k. Environmental Controls:
1. Excess excavated material not required or suitable for backfill, and other waste
material, shall be disposed of in licensed landfills or at other approved sites.
2. The Contractor shall maintain areas covered by the Contract and all affected public
properties free from the accumulation of waste, debris, and rubbish caused by
construction operations.At the conclusion of each day's operation the Contractor shall
thoroughly clean all spilled soil, gravel, or other foreign material, left during
construction operations, from all streets and roads.
3. The Contractor shall provide acceptable containers for the collection and disposal of
waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Cleaning and disposal operations shall comply
with local ordinances and pollution control laws. Do not burn or bury rubbish or waste
materials on the project site. Do not dispose of volatile wastes such as mineral spirits,
oil, or chemicals in storm or sanitary drains. Disposal of wastes into streams or
waterways is prohibited.
4. The Contractor shall minimize air pollution likely to occur from construction operations
by wetting down bare soils during windy periods,requiring proper combustion emission
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-110-11

95-110 General Requirements Idaho Power
control devices on construction vehicles and equipment, and by shutting down any
motorized equipment not in use.
3.4. Owner-Furnished Products
a. The Contractor shall provide fill and backfill materials, rebar, cast-in-place concrete,
elements of the control building, chain link fences and gates, landscape, and sprinkler
systems,unless stated otherwise. The Owner will furnish all other materials and equipment
for the project, unless otherwise stated.
b. All Owner-furnished products will be listed on the Bill of Material or on the drawings.
The Owner will also furnish products not listed on the Bill of Material that may have been
inadvertently left off. If the Owner requests products to be furnished by the Contractor after
award of the Contract,the Contractor will be reimbursed consistent with the provisions of the
General Conditions.
c. Subsequent to the Owner receiving equipment from the equipment manufacturers,the Owner
may perform in-house material acceptance testing prior to transferring materials to the
Contractor. Before making final arrangements for or committing resources to the relocation,
handling,protection, or installation of Owner furnished equipment, the Contractor shall
verify the testing and delivery schedules by contacting the Owner. The Contractor shall
include delivery and testing in the construction sequencing and scheduling.
d. The Owner will provide the necessary shop drawings, product data, installation manuals,
and operation and maintenance manuals for the Contractor's use.
e. The Owner-furnished products shall be transferred to the Contractor at Idaho Power
Company Boise Operations Center located at 10790 Franklin Road, Boise, Idaho,
unless noted otherwise. Prior to the transfer of Owner-furnished products to the Contractor,
the Contractor shall inspect the condition of each product and record in writing all products
transferred to the Contractor's care for signature by the Owner. Damage to or loss of
equipment and materials shall be immediately reported to the Owner.
f. If the Contractor determines that the Owner furnished items are damaged, defective,
or missing prior to their transfer to the contractor's care, the Owner will arrange for repair or
re-placement of such items, as required.
g. The Contractor shall familiarize himself with the Owner-furnished products to determine any
special equipment requirements or needs and include them in the bid. The Contractor shall
supply all labor, tools, construction equipment, and agents used for transferring, unloading,
transporting, inspecting, storing, handling, and installing Owner-furnished products.
h. The Contractor shall review shop drawings,product data, samples, and other product
instructions. Installation work shall conform to manufacturers'recommended procedures,
instructions, and shop drawings. The Contractor shall note and communicate with the Owner
any discrepancies or problems anticipated in the use of the product.
Internal Use Only
95-110-12 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power 95-110 General Requirements
i. The Contractor is responsible for protecting all Owner-furnished items from damage,
including damage from exposure to the elements. The Contractor shall include in the
insurance for the work sufficient coverage to protect the Owner against all losses to Owner
furnished items while they are in the care of the Contractor and until final acceptance of the
work by the Owner. The Contractor shall repair or replace items damaged as a result of
his operations.
j. The Contractor shall use special care in removing,handling, storing, and reinstalling material
and equipment specifically identified to be reused in the work and to assure its proper
functioning in the completed work.
k. The Owner will furnish, if necessary, manufacturers'representatives for assistance during the
installation of specific Owner-furnished equipment.
1. The Contractor shall return all shop drawings, product data, installation manuals, operation
and maintenance manuals, and unused Owner-furnished material to the Owner at Idaho
Power Company Boise Operations Center located at 10790 Franklin Road, Boise, Idaho.
3.5. Submittals
a. The Contractor shall direct inquiries to the Owner regarding the procedure,purpose, or extent
of any submittal.
b. The Owner may authorize changes to the procedures and requirements for submittals, at any
time, when required to accomplish the specific purpose of each submittal.
c. The Contractor shall schedule and make all submissions in accordance with these
specifications and in a timely manner so as to cause no delay in the work or in the work of
other contractors.
d. The Contractor shall furnish the following submittals:
1. Permits.
2. Insurance certificates.
3. Product and other material data.
4. List of subcontractors.
5. Schedule of Values allocated to various portions of the work.
6. Construction Schedule.
7. Construction phasing and schedule submittal for temporary shutdowns.
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-110-13

95-110 General Requirements Idaho Power
8. Applications for Payment
9. Information as required in the individual specification sections (such as welder
certification, etc.).
3.6. Submittal Procedures
a. Coordination: The Contractor shall coordinate the preparation and processing of submittals
with the performance of construction activities and transmit each submittal sufficiently in
advance of the performance of related construction activities in order to avoid delays.
b. The Contractor shall coordinate each submittal with purchasing, testing, delivery, or other
submittals and related activities that require sequential processing.
c. The Contractor shall coordinate the transmittal of different types of submittals for related
elements of the Work so processing will not be delayed by the need to concurrently review
submittals for coordination. The Owner reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal
requiring coordination with other submittals until all related submittals are received.
d. Processing: To avoid installation delays as a result of the time required to process submittals,
the Contractor shall allow 2 weeks for initial submittal review, allow additional time if the
Owner must delay processing to permit coordination with subsequent submittals, and allow
2 weeks for reprocessing each submittal. No extension of Contract Time will be authorized
be-cause of failure to transmit submittals to the Owner sufficiently in advance of the Work to
permit processing.
3.7. Contractor's Construction Schedule
a. Bar-Chart Schedule: The Contractor shall prepare a fully developed, horizontal bar-chart-
type, contractor's construction schedule to be submitted one week prior to the date
established for the "Commencement of Work." The Contractor shall:
1. Provide a separate time bar for each significant construction activity with a continuous
vertical line to identify the first working day of each week. The contractor shall use the
same breakdown of units for the Work as indicated in the Schedule of Values.
2. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from all parties
involved and coordinate each element on the schedule with other construction activities
including minor elements involved in the sequence of the Work. The Contractor shall
show each activity in proper sequence, indicating graphically the sequences necessary
for completion of related portions of the Work.
3. Coordinate the Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list of subcontracts,
progress reports,payment requests, and other schedules.
4. Indicate completion in advance of the date established for Substantial Completion and
indicate Substantial Completion on the schedule to allow time for the Owner's
procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion.
Internal Use Only
95-110-14 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power 95-110 General Requirements
5. Show how requirements for phased completion to permit Work by separate Contractors
and partial occupancy by the Owner affect the sequence of Work.
6. Make adjustments to the initial submittal required by the Owner and make,print,
and distribute copies to the Owner as well as a posting at the job site. If further revisions
are made,the Contractor shall resubmit the submittal to the Owner and post the changes
in the same locations as the initial submittal at the job site.
7. Revise the schedule after each meeting, event, or activity where revisions have been
recognized or made.
3.8. Daily Construction Reports
a. The Contractor shall prepare a daily construction report,recording the following information
concerning events at the site, and submit copies to the Owner at weekly intervals:
1. A list of subcontractors at the site
2. An approximate count of the personnel at the site
3. The high and low temperatures as well as general weather conditions
4. Any accidents and unusual events
5. Meetings and significant decisions
6. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses
7. Emergency procedures performed
8. Orders and requests of governing authorities
9. Change Orders received or implemented
10. Services connected or disconnected
11. Equipment or system tests and startups
12. Partial Completions and occupancies
13. Substantial Completions authorized
3.9. Work Quality and Quality Inspections
a. All work shall be performed by skilled workers, experienced in the work involved.All work
on this project shall be performed in accordance with the IBC, IMC,NESC,NEC,
Project Drawings, and these Specifications.
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-110-15

95-110 General Requirements Idaho Power
b. All work shall be erected and installed plumb, level, square, and true, or true to the indicated
angle, unless otherwise specified.All finished work shall be free of defects and damage.
Quality workmanship is of primary importance on this project.
c. The Owner reserves the right to reject any materials and work quality which are not
considered to be up to the highest standards of the various trades involved. Such inferior
material or work quality shall be repaired or replaced at no additional cost to the Owner.
d. Quality inspection services include inspections, tests, and related actions, including reports
performed by the Contractor, by independent agencies, and by governing authorities.
These services do not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for compliance with
Contract Document requirements.
e. Specific quality inspection requirements for individual construction activities are specified in
the sections that specify those activities. The Owner reserves the right to perform quality
inspections that are not listed in the Contract Documents.
f. Specified inspections, tests, and related actions do not limit the Contractor's quality
inspection procedures that facilitate compliance with Contract Document requirements.
3.10. Facility Startup
a. Contractor Facility Startup Responsibilities:
1. Provide access to the Work.
2. Perform functional tests in the presence of the Owner to demonstrate that the installed
equipment or system meets manufacturers' installation and adjustment requirements.
3. Be present during the Owner's performance testing, startup, and commissioning
activities to provide corrective measures.
b. Owner Facility Startup Responsibilities:
1. Witness each functional test.
2. Coordinate outages or other operations, if necessary, to facilitate the Owner's or
Contractor's tests.
3. Program relays and SCADA equipment.
4. Provide testing equipment for system performance testing.
5. Provide performance testing to demonstrate and confirm that the equipment and/or the
system meet the anticipated performance requirements.
6. Perform project commissioning.
Internal Use Only
95-110-16 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power 95-110 General Requirements
3.11. Contract Closeout
a. After providing written notice to the Owner or as otherwise instructed by the Owner and
upon the completion of construction, the Contractor shall energize the project or a
portion thereof.
b. Final Cleanup of Facilities:
1. Prior to final inspection by the Owner and after all construction work is essentially
complete, the Contractor shall thoroughly clean up all facilities.
2. Items to be cleaned include,but are not limited to, all work staging areas, material
storage areas, structures, access areas, control buildings, and all other sites and facilities
within and incidental to the construction.
c. Requirements Preparatory to Final Inspection:
1. The Contractor shall notify the Owner and request an inspection for the purpose of
determining the state of completion of the project. The Contractor shall notify the
Owner at least seven (7) working days in advance of the time this inspection is to be
performed.Using the information gathered from this inspection,the Owner will prepare
a punch list of work to be performed, corrected, or completed before the project will be
accepted.All work on the punch list shall be completed prior to the final inspection.
2. All temporary facilities shall be removed from the site except those required for the
performance of work expected to appear on the punch list.
3. The job site and all applicable appurtenances and improvements shall be cleaned up.
4. All operating instructions for installed equipment shall be properly mounted and posted
as specified or required.
5. All guarantees and warranties, along with required maintenance instructions and
manuals, shall be submitted to the Owner.
d. Final Inspection
1. After all requirements preparatory to the final inspection have been completed as
specified above, the Contractor shall notify the Owner and request a final inspection.
Notice shall be given at least three (3)working days in advance of the time the final
inspection is to be performed.
2. The Contractor shall accompany the Owner on the final inspection tour, along with any
principal subcontractors that the Owner may request to be present.
3. If the work has been completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and no
further corrective measures are required, the Owner may conditionally accept the
project based upon the Contractor's assurance that the corrective measures will be
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-110-17

95-110 General Requirements Idaho Power
completed within the shortest time period. The Owner will not accept the project if an
electrical shut-down is required to complete the project.
4. If the work has not been substantially completed in accordance with the Contract
Documents and numerous or substantial corrective measures are still required,
the Owner will not accept the project as complete. Instead, a new punch list will be
prepared,based on the information gathered from the final inspection, and the
Contractor shall be required to complete this work and then call for another final
inspection following the procedure outlined above.
3.12. Record Drawings
a. General:
1. The Owner will provide the Contractor with two sets of drawings to be used to develop
the record drawings. One set of drawings will be stamped"Construction Drawing" and
the other set of drawings will be stamped"Station Copy."Upon completion of the work,
the Contractor shall provide the Owner with marked up copies of both sets of drawings.
These drawings shall accurately show all changes made during construction. The
Station Copy" shall be left in the station for reference. The "Construction Copy" shall
be submitted so that the record drawings can be updated to reflect the as-
built information.
b. Preservation:
1. Documents shall be maintained in a clean, dry, legible condition and in good order.
2. Documents shall be available at all times for observation by the Owner.
c. Making Entries on Drawings:
1. Use an erasable, colored pencil (not ink or indelible pencil), clearly describing changes
by graphic line and note as required.
2. Any correction made by the Contractor will be made in green pencil to indicate the
change was made in the field rather than by the Owner.
3. Any additions or changes involving symbols shall resemble Idaho Power Company
design symbols. The design symbols are shown in the Station Engineering Manual.
The Owner can provide copies of the appropriate sections.
4. Any notes that will assist the Owner to produce accurate as-built drawings shall be
added in orange or lead(black)pencil.
Internal Use Only
95-110-18 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power 95-110 General Requirements
d. Legibly mark on record drawings any actual changes made during construction, including,
but not limited to:
1. The depths of the various elements of all foundations in relation to finished grade data if
the depths are not shown or where the depths differs from those shown.
2. The horizontal and vertical locations of existing and new facilities and appurtenances,
and underground structures, equipment, or work. Reference measurements should
include at least two measurements to permanent surface improvements to accurately fix
the location of the equipment in question.
3. Changes made by addendum and field orders, work change directives, change orders,
written amendments and the Owner's written interpretations and clarifications.
e. When the project is accepted as complete resulting from the Final Inspection the marked-up
record drawings become due to be submitted to the Owner. The Contractor's final payment
and retainage (if withheld)will not be released until the Owner receives and approves the
marked up record drawings.
f. Quality Assurance:
1. The Contractor shall provide a qualified and experienced person whose duty and
responsibility shall be to maintain record drawings.
2. The Contractor shall maintain record drawings on a daily basis for review by the
Owner's representative.
3. Accuracy of Records:
a. The Contractor shall coordinate changes within record drawings,making legible
and accurate entries on each sheet of the drawings and other documents where
such entry is required to show a change.
b. The purpose of the project record drawings is to document factual information
regarding aspects of the work,both concealed and visible, and to enable future
modifications of the work to proceed without lengthy and expensive site
measurement, investigation, and examination.
4. The Contractor shall make entries within 24 hours after receipt of information that a
change in the work has occurred. Do not cover or conceal work until all required
information is recorded.
5. Failure to properly maintain, update, and submit record documents may result in a
reduction of the Contractor's payment application, either partial or final.
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-110-19

95-110 General Requirements Idaho Power
Internal Use Only
95-110-20 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power
CHAPTER
95-114 Procuring Geotechnical
Subsurface Investigation Tq:�wH4
1. General
1.1. Summary
a. This section covers the requirements for geotechnical subsurface investigations for new or
existing stations projects.
b. The Geotechnical Engineering Consultant(Consultant) shall furnish all necessary equipment,
materials, and labor to complete the borings at the locations shown on the drawings, maps,
or sketches provided by the engineer.
c. The Consultant shall comply with all federal, state, and local rules and regulations with
regard to permits, bonds, drilling,plugging, and all other applicable aspects of well drilling.
d. The Consultant shall review the proposed scope of work indicated as a minimum level of
services desired relative to the anticipated subsurface conditions present. If localized
subsurface conditions are expected to vary significantly, the Consultant shall advise the
engineer of additional recommended services prior to commencing work.
e. The Consultant shall evaluate the subsurface soil and rock as well as the below ground water
level information at the site to assist in configuring the depth and size of the
proposed structures.
f. The Consultant shall conduct a subsurface investigation and laboratory testing program and
prepare final boring logs and laboratory results. These services are described in more detail
later in this specification,but include the following tasks:
• Perform an exploration program and provide qualified field personnel to log the borings.
• Perform laboratory tests on samples obtained from the borings to evaluate pertinent
engineering properties of materials encountered.
• Provide a final report containing a description of the field and laboratory testing
programs,boring location plan, boring logs, and laboratory test results.
1.2. Submittals
a. The Consultant shall provide a layout of the station (or proposed station) showing proposed
drilling or probing locations.
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-114-1

95-114 Procuring Geotechnical Subsurface Investigation Idaho Power
b. The Consultant shall provide a description of the equipment and methods to be used in the
geotechnical investigation and soils analyses.
1.3. Execution
a. The Consultant shall notify utilities marking service to ensure buried utilities outside the
station are marked appropriately prior to drilling and testing. The Consultant shall coordinate
with the engineer to determine the locations of buried cables, conduits, grounding, and other
utilities inside the station. When available, the engineer shall provide a Fence Plan,
Grounding Plan, Cable and Conduit Plan, and other applicable information to assist in
locating underground utilities and equipment inside the station.
b. Borings shall be performed by the Consultant at the locations and to the depths specified in
the Scope of Work unless rock coring is requested.
1. If auger refusal occurs at a depth less than that specified in the Scope of Work,
the Consultant shall move the drilling equipment to a new location 10 feet (maximum)
from the original location and bore to the depth specified in the Scope of Work.
If refusal occurs on the second boring in less than 15 feet below grade, the boring shall
be considered complete.
2. In soil that is predominantly cohesionless, the Consultant shall perform the standard
penetration test in accordance with American Society for Testing and Materials
(ASTM) Specification D1586. Consultant shall use a 2" O.D. x 1-3/8" I.D. split tube
sampler and a 140-lb weight free falling 30 inches. Record the number of blows per
12 inches of penetration at each change in stratification or character of the soil but at
intervals not exceeding 3 feet for the first 15 feet below grade and at 5-foot intervals
thereafter.Alternate equipment and methods may be acceptable when agreed upon by
the engineer.
3. In soil that is predominantly cohesive, the Consultant shall use the thin-walled tube
method for sampling in accordance with ASTM Specification D1587. The Consultant
shall take samples in each change of stratification but at intervals not exceeding 5 feet.
If direct shear or triaxial tests are not required, these samples may be omitted with the
approval of the engineer.
4. Boring in hard strata or rock shall be performed by diamond coring in accordance with
ASTM D2113.
5. Should rock be encountered during field sampling contact the engineer. If required by
the engineer, continuous cores shall be obtained, labeled, and stored in appropriate
core boxes.
6. The Consultant shall be aware that borings are being obtained for foundation design
information. If it becomes apparent during the boring operation that the material
throughout the depth of the borings is unusually soft or the standard penetration values
are very low, and it appears that piling might be necessary, the Consultant shall inform
Internal Use Only
95-114-2 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power 95-114 Procuring Geotechnical Subsurface Investigation
the engineer. The Consultant shall not leave the site until he/she is further notified of
what action is desired. Such notification is not anticipated to take more than
one-half day.
7. Borings shall be advanced with drilling methods that minimize the potential for
disturbance, sloughing, or mixing of materials within soil samples. When water is
encountered within a hole in cohesionless or sand material,bentonite or polymer slurry
shall be used to control bottom heave and maintain positive head. The Consultant shall
provide casing, if required. Water levels encountered, as well as the method used to
advance the boring, shall be indicated by the Consultant on the respective boring logs.
8. The Consultant shall obtain calibrated hand penetrometer readings on all cohesive
samples in the field. The Consultant shall seal samples to prevent disturbance and
moisture changes and transport to the laboratory for testing.
9. Laboratory tests shall be performed by the Consultant to classify soils and obtain
geotechnical physical characteristics. The Consultant shall perform laboratory testing
consistent in quality with current, applicable ASTM standards.
2. Final Report
a. One copy of the final report in PDF format shall be emailed to the engineer prior to the date
agreed on in the Scope of Work(SOWS and not later than two weeks after the drilling
operations have been completed.
b. The Consultant's report shall include the following:
• Project identification,boring number, location, and driller.
• Drilled pier installation recommendations.
• Depth to groundwater at completion of boring.
• Vertical plot sections, referred-to datum, showing type and descriptive classification of
material encountered and the upper boundary elevation of each successive soil strata.
Descriptive classification shall include group symbol of the Unified Soil
Classification System.
• Number of blows per 12-inch penetration from standard penetration test.
• Dry density of soil and moisture content.
• Allowable bearing pressure for mat foundations and slabs on grade.
• Unconfined compressive strength tests on cohesive soils procured and selected from the
samples for testing.
• Date of beginning and end of boring.
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-114-3

95-114 Procuring Geotechnical Subsurface Investigation Idaho Power
• If it is necessary to stop boring or move a hole due to obstruction,breaking of casing, etc.,
it shall be noted and properly described.
• Moment Foundation Analysis and Design (MFAD) drilled pier design parameters.
• If rock is encountered, include the following information:
• Percent recovery
• Rock Quality Designation (RQD)
• Relative hardness
• Fractures per foot
• Color and texture
• Weathering
Internal Use Only
95-114-4 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power
CHAPTER
95-115 Selective Demolition TDMR!;
1. General
1.1. Summary
a. This section provides for the demolition and removal of selected substation facilities and
their subsequent disposal or patching, repair, and replacement.
1.2. Submittals
a. Unless otherwise indicated, submit each item in this article for information only.
b. Submit proposed dust-control measures.
c. Submit a schedule of selective demolition activities indicating the following:
1. Coordination for shutoff, switching and continuation of utility services
2. A detailed sequence, including starting and ending dates for each activity, of selective
demolition and removal work to ensure uninterrupted progress of the Owner's on-site
operations
d. Collect photographs or videotapes, in sufficient detail to prove conclusive, of any existing
conditions and site improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by selective
demolition operations.
1.3. Definitions
a. Remove: Remove and legally dispose of all items marked"Remove" except when the items
have been identified to be salvaged or to remain the Owner's property.
b. Remove, Refurbish, and Install: Remove the items indicated to be "Removed, Refurbished,
and Installed." Clean, service, and otherwise prepare them for reuse, storing and protecting
them against damage. Finally, install them in the locations indicated.
c. Existing to Remain: Protect all equipment and structures indicated to remain against damage
and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by the Owner, items may be moved
to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and then cleaned and
installed in their original location.
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-115-1

95-115 Selective Demolition Idaho Power
1.4. Material Ownership
a. All items and materials that have been removed shall remain the Owner's property unless
indicated otherwise.
2. Products
2.1. Repair Materials
a. Use repair materials identical to existing materials:
1. Where identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used for exposed surfaces,use
materials that virtually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.
2. Use materials where the performance equals or surpasses that of existing materials.
3. Execution
3.1. Examination
a. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed, refurbished, and installed or
removed and salvaged.
b. When unanticipated electrical or structural elements that conflict with the intended function
or design are encountered, investigate and determine the nature and extent of the conflict.
Then,promptly submit a written report to the Owner.
3.2. Selective Demolition
a. Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by the new
construction and as indicated on the Owner's drawings or instructions. Use appropriate
methods to complete the work while meeting the following limitations:
1. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to the dimensions required. Use
cutting methods least likely to cause damage to any remaining or adjoining
construction. To minimize disturbances to adjacent surfaces or equipment,use hand or
small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping.
Temporarily cover openings that remain following the demolition.
2. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. On-site storage or sale of re-
moved items is prohibited.
3. Return all elements of the construction and station surfaces that remain to conditions
similar to those that existed before the start of selective demolition operations.
b. Demolish concrete and masonry in small sections. Cut concrete and masonry at junctures
with construction that will remain using power-driven masonry saws or hand tools. Do not
use power-driven impact tools.
Internal Use Only
95-115-2 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power 95-115 Selective Demolition
3.3. Patching And Repairs
a. Promptly patch and repair holes and damaged surfaces in adjacent construction that were
caused by the selective demolition operations. This includes cleaning and patching existing
surfaces. Patches are to be made with material that matches the existing surfaces.
3.4. Salvaged Material
a. All material identified to be salvaged shall be delivered by the Contractor for storage or
disposal as directed by the Owner.
3.5. Disposal Of Demolished Materials
a. Unless otherwise indicated, all demolished material that is to be removed and discarded or
salvaged shall be promptly removed from the site. Do not allow demolished materials to
accumulate on site.
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-115-3

95-115 Selective Demolition Idaho Power
Internal Use Only
95-115-4 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power
CHAPTER
95-116 Station Earthwork 95IR6
1. General
1.1. Summary
a. The work required under this section consists of all excavating, trenching, filling, grading,
surfacing,and other related items necessary to complete the substation earthwork as indicated
on the Station Drawings and/or as specified herein and generally listed as follows:
1. Preparation and clearing of the site
2. Grading of the site and the access road
3. Construction and/or installation of culverts and other drainage structures and drain-age/
irrigation ditches
4. Surfacing of the access road and the station area
5. Maintenance of all benchmarks, monuments, or other reference points, replacing them
as directed if disturbed or destroyed
b. Unless otherwise indicated, all required materials shall be furnished and installed by the
Contractor.All costs related to acquiring and transporting materials are to be paid by the
Contractor.
c. Before proceeding with work on any portion of the station, the Contractor shall request and
obtain from the Owner written notification that the property involved is available for clearing
or construction purposes. Should the Contractor proceed without such notification, the
Contractor shall be liable for any claims for damage to property that may arise. Proceeding in
such manner shall be entirely at the Contractor's risk and expense.
1.2. Submittals
a. Submit proposed construction plan and schedule.
b. Submit procedures for environmental protection and monitoring including:
1. Mitigation for emergency spill containment and removal
c. Submit locations of temporary stockpiles.
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-116-1

95-116 Station Earthwork Idaho Power
d. Submit proposed measures of excavation and backfilling through water.
e. Submit all compaction test data.
1.3. Quality Assurance
a. Compaction Testing Service: The Contractor shall be responsible for engaging and
scheduling the services of a qualified testing agency approved by the Owner to perform
compaction tests. Compaction test reports shall be provided to the Engineer of Record.
The Contractor, at the Contractor's expense, shall rework materials that do not comply with
these Specifications.
Compaction tests shall be performed at minimum as indicated below:
Description Minimum Requirements
Site Work/Preparation One test for each 30,000 One test for every two feet of fill
square feet or less
Transformer foundations Two tests for each 6"of fill at Alternate corners for each 6" lift
opposite corners.
Circuit Breaker foundations One test for each foundation One test for every 12" of fill
Control building foundations Two tests for each 6"of fill
Metal-clad switch gear foundations Two tests for each 6" of fill
All precast spread foundations One test for each foundation One test for every 12" of fill
Gate Aprons One test at each gate apron
b. The method used for compaction testing shall be In-Place Density and moisture content of
Soil and Soil aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)per AASHTO T 310 Method B.
Any questions regarding compaction testing shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer
of Record.
c. All quality control testing shall be the responsibility of the Contractor through a qualified
testing laboratory approved by the Owner. The cost of testing shall be borne by the
Contractor. The Contractor shall require the laboratory to send one copy of the compressive
test reports to the Engineer of Record and others as required by the Owner.
Internal Use Only
95-116-2 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power 95-116 Station Earthwork
1.4. Definitions
a. Access Roads: Roads outside the fenced enclosure of a station that extend to a designated
public roadway.
b. Station Area: The area within the fenced enclosure,plus the area immediately adjacent to
and surrounding the fenced enclosure as specified or indicated on the drawings.
c. Prepared Ground Surface: The ground surface after clearing, grubbing, stripping,
excavation and scarification and/or compaction.
d. Completed Course: A course or layer of earthwork that is ready for the next layer or next
phase of the work.
e. Well-Graded: A mixture of particle sizes that has no specific concentration or lack thereof of
one or more sizes.
Well-graded does not define any numerical value that must be placed on the coefficient of
uniformity, coefficient of curvature, or other specific grain size distribution parameters. Well-
graded is used to define a material type that, when compacted,produces a strong and
relatively incompressible soil mass free from detrimental voids.
f. Influence Area:An area within planes sloped downward and outward at an angle of 60
degrees from the horizontal form, as follows:
1. 1 foot outside the outermost edge at the base of foundations or slabs; or
2. 1 foot outside the outermost edge at the surface, roadways or shoulder; or
3. 0.5 foot outside the exterior edge at the spring line of pipes and culverts
g. Unclassified Excavation: Materials encountered which have not been identified or
described herein.
h. Borrow: Material excavated on the site or taken from designated borrow areas on or near the
site.
i. Selected Backfill Material: Materials available on-site that the Owner determines to be
suitable for a specified backfill.
j. Imported Material: Materials obtained from sources off the site.
k. Structural Fill: Fill materials as required under structures,paving, etc. May include pit run
or 3/4"minus road mix as defined in 2.1 b.
1. Embankment: Fill materials required to raise the existing grade in areas other than under
structures.
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-116-3

95-116 Station Earthwork Idaho Power
2. Products
2.1. Materials
a. General:
1. All backfill and fill material shall be free of roots or other organic matter,refuse, ashes,
cinders, frozen earth, or other unsuitable material. Material containing more than 10%
of gravel, stones, or shale particles is unacceptable. In addition, backfill material
containing stones greater than 4" in the longest dimension, particularly in areas where
foundations or piers are to be installed, is unacceptable.
2. Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor shall be responsible for finding a source for
all earth fill materials. The Contractor is responsible for the removal of excess fill
material following excavation and backfilling.
b. Soil Materials:
1. Topsoil: Topsoil shall be friable clay,loam, surface soil found in a depth of not less than
4". Satisfactory topsoil shall be reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, stones, and other
objects over 2" in diameter, and without weeds,roots, and other objection-able material.
2. Pit Run: In general, material described as "Pit Run" shall conform to ASTM D 2487
soil classification groups GW, GP, SW, or SP. In addition,pit run shall be free of rock or
gravel larger than 4" in any dimension, with less than 10%passing the 200 sieve, and
shall be free of excess moisture, debris,waste, frozen materials, vegetation and other
deleterious matter.
3. Granular Sub-base: Aggregate for Granular Sub-base shall conform to the following,
performed using AASHTO T 27, excluding washing
Sieve Size Percent Passing by Weight
4" 100
3" 90-100
No. 4 30-75
No. 200 0-15
The sand equivalent shall not be less than 30 if 5 percent or more of the material passes
the No. 200 (0.075 mm) sieve. Sand equivalent will not be required if less than 5
percent passes the No. 200 (0.075 mm) sieve as measured by AASHTO T
176 Modified.
4. 3/4" Minus Road-mix: Crushed gravel conforming to ASTM D 2487 soil classification
groups GW-GM with 100%passing a 3/4"sieve and not more than 8%passing a No. 200
sieve.
Internal Use Only
95-116-4 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power 95-116 Station Earthwork
5. Finish Grade Crushed Rock: Crushed quarry rock. 80% of this material shall have 3
or more sides fractured and conform to the following gradation:
Sieve Size Percent Passing by Weight
1 "11 00
3/4 "80-90
'/z "35-45
3/8 "15-20
No. 4 0-5
No. 8 0-5
6. Unsatisfactory Soil Materials: Materials within ASTM D 2487 soil classification
groups MH, CH, OL, OH, and PT.
7. Bedding Material: Clean sand with 100%passing a 1" sieve and not more than 8%
passing a No. 200 sieve.
8. Drainage Fill: A washed, evenly graded mixture of crushed stone, or crushed or
uncrushed gravel,ASTM D 448-coarse aggregate grading size 57,with 100%passing a
1'/2" sieve and not more than 5%passing a No. 8 sieve.
9. Filtering Material: An evenly graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel or crushed
stone and natural sand, with 100%passing a 1'/2" sieve and 0 to 5%passing a No. 50
sieve.
c. Soil Sterilant: Not specified.
d. Drainage Structures
1. Galvanized steel culverts and concrete drainage structures shall be installed as shown
on the drawings.All galvanized steel culvert pipes shall meet the requirements of
AASHTO M-36 and have, at each end, a prefabricated, flared end section of the same
gauge and quality. Concrete shall conform to specifications listed in specification
95-125, Cast-In-Place Concrete.
3. Execution
3.1. Site Preparation
a. General:
1. The site shall be cleared of rocks,boulders, trees, stumps,brush, shrubs, grass,
and other vegetation, improvements, or obstructions, as required, to permit installation
of new construction. Remove similar items elsewhere on site or premises as specifically
indicated by the Owner.
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-116-5

95-116 Station Earthwork Idaho Power
2. Cut minor roots and branches of trees indicated to remain in a clean and careful manner
where such roots and branches obstruct the installation of new construction.
3. The Contractor shall be responsible for the disposal of all debris resulting from site
preparation operations, including trees,brush, roots, and sod stripping.
b. Snow Removal:
1. Snow removal shall be the Contractor's responsibility. The Contractor shall perform
snow removal promptly and efficiently using suitable equipment when necessary for
safety or as may be directed by the Owner.
c. Clearing and Grubbing:
1. Strip the topsoil to a depth of 4" or to such greater depth as may be necessary to remove
the roots of grass and other vegetation. Sod and turf stripped from the site, if suitable,
may be used on the slopes and shoulders of embankments as part of the reseeding work
when approved by the Owner.
2. If topsoil is to be reused, stockpile the topsoil in storage piles in areas indicated or as
directed by the Owner. Construct storage piles in a manner to provide free drainage of
surface water. Cover the storage piles, if required, to prevent wind erosion.
3. All tree stumps within the fenced enclosure,including roots that are over 2" in diameter,
shall be completely removed. In areas outside the fenced area, stumps and roots over 2"
in diameter shall be removed to a depth of not less than 12".
4. Stones and boulders 6" or greater in the longest dimension shall be removed to a depth
of 6" below finished subgrade.
d. Grading of Substation Site
1. Excavate to a depth as shown on the drawings or as may be necessary to remove all soft
and unstable material and other material within the site that will not compact readily or
serve the intended purpose.
2. Blasting will be permitted only when prior approval is obtained from the Owner. Such
approval shall not relieve the Contractor of any liability resulting from injury, loss of
life, or damage to property.
3.2. Subgrade
a. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material or
pit run,unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated. Place fill material in horizontal
layers,not exceeding 6" loose depth, and thoroughly compact each layer to a density equal to
adjacent original ground.
Internal Use Only
95-116-6 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power 95-116 Station Earthwork
b. All soft and unstable material and other portions of the subgrade that cannot be compacted
satisfactorily shall be removed to lines and grades as directed by the Owner.All holes created
by removal of soft or unstable material shall be backfilled as specified.
c. Prior to structural fill placement, the exposed native soils should be uniformly scarified to a
minimum depth of 8", moisture conditioned as necessary, and compacted to a minimum of
92% of the maximum dry density in accordance with ASTM D 1557.
d. Fill with pit run to construct subgrades that will produce the finish grade elevations
(+/-0.10 ft.) shown on the drawings with special attention to proper drainage.
e. Fill shall be compacted in 6" lifts or less to obtain at least 95% of maximum dry density as
determined by ASTM D 1557, Modified Proctor Compaction Test.
f. After proper compaction, the graded area shall be shaped and fine-graded as shown on the
drawings. The accumulation of loose material incidental to fine grading shall be incorporated
into the subgrade by means of a pneumatic tire roller or other suitable, available means
of compaction.
g. Subgrade materials rendered unsuitable by excessive watering shall be removed and replaced
with approved material.
3.3. Roads
The following specification shall apply to access roads and to designated roads inside the station.
a. Subgrade:
1. Prepare and condition the roadbed after the earthwork has been essentially completed
and after all adjacent drains and structures have been completed and backfilled.
Strip the roadbed to a depth of 12" or to such greater depth as may be necessary to
remove all soft and unstable material and other portions of the roadbed that will not
compact readily or serve the intended purpose.All boulders or ledge rock appearing in
the excavation shall be broken off to a depth not less than 12" below the finish grade.
2. The resulting areas and all other low sections, holes or depressions shall be brought to
grade with a 12" layer of granular sub-base and the entire roadbed shaped to line, grade
and cross section. The layer shall be compacted in 6" lifts or less to obtain at least 95%
of maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D1557, Modified Proctor
Compaction Test.
3. After the roadbed has been substantially completed, the entire surface of the roadbed
shall receive a finish shaping where necessary to obtain a smooth surface and a uniform
cross section.At intersections with other roads a spacious, smooth-riding road-way
shall be constructed and dressed as directed.
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-116-7

95-116 Station Earthwork Idaho Power
win 4. After compaction and prior to placing the surface material on the roadbed, the roadbed
shall be shaped and crowned for its full width to the approximate grade and section
shown on the drawings with a crown of at least 1/4"per foot. The roadbed shall be
smooth and uniform and shall be maintained in this condition until the surfacing
material is placed.
b. Road Surfacing:
I. Road-surfacing material shall be a 4" thick layer of 1/4"minus road-mix (after
compaction), or as indicated on the drawings.
2. The surfacing material shall be placed on the roadbed in sufficient quantities and
uniformly spread to such thickness and width that when the work is completed the
requirements of the typical cross section for the finished road will have been fulfilled
and not vary more than'/2"from a template cut to the cross section of the road,nor more
than '/2" from a 10 foot straightedge applied parallel to the centerline of the road.
Variation in excess of the above shall be corrected by loosening, adding or removing
material, reshaping and compacting by sprinkling and rolling.
3.4. Excavation for Footings and Other Concrete Work
a. Excavation shall be performed by any recognized method of good practice to complete the
job in the most expeditious manner. The Contractor shall take precautions to ensure no
damage is done to existing facilities or equipment or to other work.
b. All excavation is considered unclassified regardless of the nature of the material.
Excavation shall include all materials found within the designated limits for excavation.
c. Excavate to a width to adequately permit the efficient erection and removal of forms.
d. In existing substations or where existing ground grids,underground cables, and conduits are
present, excavation shall be by hand from a depth of 6" above to a depth of 6" below the
ground grid, cable and conduit elevations. The Contractor may perform machine excavations
at all other depths where space and access permit. Hydro vacuum excavation is permissible at
all depths.
e. Trim the excavation to neat lines where details call for concrete to be deposited against
earth forms.
f. Restore the bottom of the excavation to proper elevation with concrete in areas
over excavated.
g. Excavate by hand in areas where space and access will not permit the use of machines.
h. Notify the Owner immediately if suitable load bearing material is not encountered at the
depth indicated on the drawings. Proceed as instructed by the Owner.
Internal Use Only
95-116-8 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power 95-116 Station Earthwork
i. Load bearing surfaces shall be moistened with water and mechanically tamped firm and
uniform to a density of 95% as determined by ASTM D 1557. Compaction material shall be
placed in layers not exceeding 6" in depth after compaction.
j. Grading around excavations shall be controlled to prevent surface water from flowing into
excavated areas. Draining or pumping, as necessary, shall be required to continually maintain
excavated areas free of water or mud from any source. This material shall be discharged to
approved drains or channels.
k. Waste materials shall be disposed of as specified.
3.5. Trenching
a. Trenching and bedding for conduit and ground grid materials shall be as shown on
the drawings.
b. In existing substations or where existing ground grids,underground cables, and conduits are
present, trenching shall be by hand from a depth of 6" above to a depth of 6" below the
ground grid,cable, and conduit elevations.The Contractor may perform machine excavations
at all other depths where space and access permit.
c. Circuit routing shall be as shown on the drawings unless conditions encountered are such that
changes are necessary to accomplish the work. In such case, the Owner shall be notified
promptly and the Contractor shall determine the nature and extent of the difficulty.
The Owner shall determine whether rerouting or other changes are necessary.
d. The trench widths specified are minimums and should be increased, as necessary, to obtain
the required depths in loose soils. The maximum width at the top of the trench will not be
limited, except where excess width of excavation would cause damage to adjacent structures
or property.
e. Where trenches are intended for more than one conductor or conduit, particular care must be
taken to provide for extra depth and width to allow for soil falling into the trench. Refer to
specification 95-171 3.12 for conduit requirements.
f. All trenches shall follow straight lines where possible.
g. The trenches shall be dug so that the bottom has a smooth grade. Large rocks, stones and
gravel in excess of I" shall be removed from the bottom of the trench.
h. Construction shall be arranged so that trenches will be left open for the shortest practical time
in order to avoid creating a hazard and to minimize the likelihood of trench collapse due to
other construction activity, rain, accumulation of water in the trench, etc. Safety and traffic
barriers shall be installed in accordance with local requirements.
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-116-9

95-116 Station Earthwork Idaho Power
3.6. Backfill of Excavations
a. Backfill material shall be structural fill or selected bank fill material as indicated on the
drawings.After the footings, concrete work, and cable conduits are in place, the Contractor
shall place backfill as specified herein.
b. Debris, sod,roots, snow, ice, or frozen earth shall not be placed as backfill. Backfill shall not
be placed on a frozen surface.
c. Remove all unsuitable material and replace it with approved fill material,performing all
wetting, drying, and shaping required to prepare a suitable subgrade. Compact the subgrade
to obtain the specified density.
d. Undisturbed subgrade in cuts shall be compacted unless the Owner determines that
compaction is not necessary.
e. Backfill against concrete work only after the concrete has attained 70% of its design strength.
f. Concrete Encased Duct Banks: When the backfill above the concrete must be compacted,
the concrete shall cure for 3 days before backfilling. When compaction of the backfill is not
required, backfill may be placed 24 hours after pouring the concrete.
g. Perform backfilling simultaneously on all sides of walled structures and only after
construction of the structure is complete.
h. Jetting and/or flooding are not permitted. The moisture content of backfill soils shall be
within 2% of the optimum moisture content for compaction. Compact backfill material using
vibratory compactors and power tampers. Backfill material shall be compacted in 6" lifts or
less to obtain at least 95% of maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D1557.
Any material incapable of compaction to 95% of maximum dry density shall be removed and
replaced with acceptable material.
i. Avoid the use of heavy equipment adjacent to structures or concrete work.
j. Any on-site borrow areas shall be graded to drain and shall present a neat appearance,
as directed by the Owner.
k. The Contractor shall pay for all compaction testing. One compaction test shall normally be
taken per 30,000 square feet, or less, and for every two feet of fill.
3.7. Drainage Structures
a. All pipes shall be evenly bedded throughout its entire length, not partially resting on rock or
earth embankment. The flow-line gradient and elevation shall be in line with that of the
natural drainage course insofar as possible.
b. Backfill shall be thoroughly compacted in layers not exceeding 6".
Internal Use Only
95-116-10 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power 95-116 Station Earthwork
c. Backfill shall be compacted under the pipe haunches to a width of one pipe diameter on each
side of the pipe and from the very bottom up to the top of the pipe, to the satisfaction of
the Owner.
3.8. Soil Sterilant
a. Not specified.
3.9. Substation Surfacing
a. After the site grading and substation construction is complete,place a 4" to 6" layer of finish
grade crushed rock over the subgrade to form an insulating layer as part of the substation
grounding system. The finish grade layer shall not be compacted. See 2.1.b.5 for the material
specification. The finish layer shall extend 5-feet minimum outside the station fence.
Finish grade crushed rock shall not be placed over designated roads unless otherwise noted.
b. At the completion of the project the substation yard shall be clean and free of debris.
All areas of the yard that were affected by the construction of the project shall be completely
restored to a level condition with a 4" of finish grade rock(see 2.1.b.5).All fill materials
(pit run, granular sub-base, road-mix,bedding material, drainage fill, filtering material and
finish rock) shall be supplied by the Contractor.
3.10. Settlement
a. Any settlement noted in backfill, fill, or in structures built over the backfill or fill within the
1-year warranty period in accordance with the General Conditions will be considered to be
caused by improper compaction methods and shall be corrected at no cost to the Owner. The
contractor, at no cost to the Owner, shall restore structures that are damaged due to settlement
to their original condition.
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-116-11

95-116 Station Earthwork Idaho Power
Internal Use Only
95-116-12 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power
CHAPTER
95-120 Chain-Link Fences and Gates TDMM
1. General
1.1. Summary
a. This section covers the complete furnishing and installation of the steel chain link fence.
b. The Contractor shall furnish all material and labor required to make the fence complete.
c. The station perimeter fence and gates shall stand 8 feet above finished grade when erected.
The fence includes 7 feet of fence fabric and 1 foot of barbed wire (three strands) on arms
slanting outward 45 degrees.
d. All fence and gates installed within the substation perimeter fence shall stand 7 feet above
grade when erected. The fence shall be constructed with 7-foot tall fence fabric. Barbed wire
shall not be included in the construction of interior fences, unless noted otherwise.
1.2. Submittals
a. Shop drawings: Submit shop drawings showing layout of fence including gates, dimensions
from existing structures, isolation panels, snow or personnel gates and gate stops. Layout
shall show sliding gate operator location with concrete mounting pad and electrical runs.
b. Supplier specifications: Submit supplier's specifications for chain link fabric and gates
including support posts and hardware. This material shall be obtained from a single source
per Part 1.3.b of this specification.
c. Sliding gate: Submit supplier's specifications for sliding gate including safety and security
schematics and installation instructions. Submit supplier's specifications for sliding gate
operator in compliance with all provisions of Part 2.9.d of this specification.
d. Certification and warranty: Submit certification that the sliding gate operator has been tested
for full power and pressure of all hydraulic components, full stress tests of all mechanical
components and electrical tests of all overload devices. Submit manufacturer and installer
warranties for all components of the fence and gates.
1.3. Quality Assurance
a. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has at least three years'
experience and has completed at least five chain link fence projects with same material and of
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-120-1

95-120 Chain-Link Fences and Gates Idaho Power
similar scope to that indicated for this project with a successful construction record of
in-service performance.
b. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain chain link fences and gates, including accessories, fit-
tings, and fastenings from a single source.
1.4. Project Conditions
a. Field Measurements: Verify layout information for fences and gates shown on the drawings
in relation to the property survey and existing structures. Verify dimensions by field
measurements.
2. Products
2.1. Fabric
a. Selvage: Twisted at top selvage and twisted at the bottom for 2-inch and 2-1/8inch mesh sizes
and heights above 60 inches.
b. Steel Chain-Link Fence Fabric: Fabricated in one-piece widths for fencing 12 feet and less in
height to comply with Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute(CLFMI)"Product Manual"
and with requirements indicated below:
1. Mesh and Wire Size: 2-inch mesh, 0.148-inch diameter(9 gauge with 1,290 lb. break
strength or 10 gauge where 90% screening is required), 84-inches high.
2. Diamond Count (number of openings per fabric height): 24.5.
3. Coating:ASTM A 817 and ASTM A 392, 2 ounces of hot-dip zinc galvanizing per
square foot shall be applied to all fabric. Excessively frozen links will not be accepted.
2.2. Framing
a. Line posts and man gateposts shall be constructed of 2-3/8 inch O.D., galvanized, standard
weight(schedule 40 or similar if approved by engineer) steel pipe.
b. Corner posts are to be constructed of 2-7/8 inch O.D., galvanized, standard weight pipe
(schedule 40).
c. Braces of 1-5/8 inch O.D., galvanized, standard weight(schedule 40)pipe shall be located at
corner, gate, and terminal posts. They shall extend to the first line post, midway between the
top rail and ground,with suitable connections and fittings.A 3/8 inch diameter rod
(minimum) shall be used for truss bracing and shall be secured near the bottom of the corner,
gate, or end post and the post brace at the midway point on the adjacent line post.
d. Top rails are to be 1-5/8 inch O.D., galvanized, standard weight (schedule 40)pipe.
Manufacturer's longest lengths(17 to 21 feet)with swedged-end or expansion-type coupling,
approximately 6 inches long for joining. Provide rail ends or other means for attaching top
rail securely to each gate corner,pull, and end post.
Internal Use Only
95-120-2 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power 95-120 Chain-Link Fences and Gates
e. Swing Gate Posts: Furnish posts to support single gate leaf, or one leaf of a double-gate
installation, according to ASTM F 900, sized as follows for steel and aluminum pipe posts:
f. Slide Gate Posts: 4.000-inch OD pipe weighing at least 8.65 lb. per foot.
g. Steel posts for fabric height over 6 feet and gate leaf width:
1. Up to and including 6 Feet: 2.875-inch OD pipe weighing at least 4.641b. per foot.
2. Over 6 to 12 Feet: 4.000-inch OD pipe weighing at least 8.65 lb. per foot.
3. Over 12 to 18 Feet: 6.625-inch OD pipe weighing at least 18.02 lb. per foot.
4. Over 18 to 24 Feet: 8.625 OD pipe weighing at least 27.12 lb. per foot.
2.3. Fittings and Accessories
a. Material: Comply with ASTM F 626. Mill-finished aluminum or galvanized iron or steel to
suit manufacturer's standards.
1. Steel and Iron: Unless specified otherwise,hot-dip galvanize pressed steel or cast-iron
fence fittings and accessories with at least 1.2 oz. zinc per sq. ft. as determined by
ASTM A 90.
2. Aluminum: Die cast conforming to ASTM B 85, aluminum-alloy 360 or sand cast con-
forming to ASTM B 26, aluminum-alloy 365, ZG61A, or Tenzalloy.
b. Post and Line Caps: Provide weather tight closure cap for each post. Provide line post caps
with loop to receive tension wire or top rail.
c. Tension or Stretcher Bars: Hot-dip galvanized steel with a minimum length 2 inches less than
the full height of fabric, a minimum cross section of 1/4 inch by 3/4 inch, and a minimum of
1.2 oz. of zinc coating per sq. ft. Provide one bar for each gate and end post, and two for each
corner and pull post, except where fabric is integrally woven into the post.
d. Top Rail, Tension, and Brace Bands: Hot-dip galvanized steel with a minimum of 1.2 oz. of
zinc coating per sq. ft.
1. Top Rail Bands: 1 1/4-inch-wide minimum, 12 gauge minimum.
2. Tension Bands: 1-inch-wide minimum, 12-gauge minimum.
3. Brace Bands: 1-inch-wide minimum, 14-gauge minimum.
e. Tension Wire: 0.177-inch-diameter metallic-coated steel marcelled tension wire conforming
to ASTM A 824 with finish to match fabric.
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-120-3

95-120 Chain-Link Fences and Gates Idaho Power
f. Tie Wires: 0.106-inch-diameter(I 2-gauge) galvanized steel with a minimum of 0.80 oz. per
sq. ft. of zinc coating according to ASTM A 641, Class 3 or 0.148-inch-diameter(9-gauge)
aluminum wire alloy 1350-H19 or equal, to match fabric wire.
2.4. Privacy Slats
a. Material:
1. Polyethylene tubular slats, 0.023-inch thick minimum, manufactured for chain link
fencing from virgin polyethylene containing an ultraviolet inhibitor, sized to fit mesh
specified in direction indicated. Provide 75 to 85 percent privacy factor.
2. California redwood, 5/16 inch thick, sized to fit mesh specified in direction indicated.
3. Fiber-glass-reinforced plastic, UV-light stabilized, 0.06 inch thick, sized to fit mesh
specified in direction indicated.
4. Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) light-stabilized, 0.023 inch thick minimum, sized to fit mesh
specified.
5. Aluminum, 0.010-inch thick minimum, sized to fit mesh specified in direction
indicated.
2.5. Barbed Wire
a. Barbed Wire Supporting Arms: Manufacturer's standard barbed wire supporting arms
conforming to ASTM F 626, metal and finish to match fence framework, with provision for
anchorage to posts and attaching three rows of barbed wire to each arm. Supporting arms
may be either attached to posts or integral with post top weather cap and must be capable of
withstanding 250-lb downward pull at outermost end. Provide single 45-degree arm for three
strands of barbed wire, one for each post.
b. Steel Barbed Wire: Two-strand, 0.099-inch-diameter(12-1/2-gauge) steel wire with 0.080-
inch-diameter(14-gauge), four-point barbs spaced not more than 5 inches o.c.; metallic-
coated finish to match fabric. Galvanized Finish: Comply with ASTM A 121, chain link
fence grade with Class 3 coating with not less than 0.8 oz. of zinc per sq. ft. as determined by
ASTM A 90.
2.6. T Posts
a. T posts used to support barbed wire shall conform to ASTM A702, shall have a minimum
length of 6-0" unless otherwise specified.
2.7. Barbed Tape
a. Barbed Tape: Continuous helical coils of barbed tape as defined by ASTM F 1379.
1. Tape:ANSI 430 stainless steel hardened to Rockwell (30N) 40-45, 0.025 inch thick by
1 inch wide prior to fabrication with four needle-sharp barbs not less than 1.25 inch
Internal Use Only
95-120-4 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power 95-120 Chain-Link Fences and Gates
long in clusters on 4-inch centers and permanently cold-clenched to a minimum of 230
degrees around a core wire.
2. Core Wire: 0.098-inch-diameter high-tensile zinc-coated steel conforming to ASTM A
764 or stainless steel conforming to ASTM A 478.
3. Clips: 0.065-inch-thick by 0.375-inch-wide stainless clips capable of withstanding a
minimum 150-lb pull load to limit extension of coil, resulting in a concertina effect
when deployed.
4. Size and Type: Provide coil diameter, type, and configuration as indicated; if not
indicated, provide 24-inch-diameter single-concertina type coil.
2.8. Concrete
a. Concrete for posts and curbing under fence fabric: Provide concrete consisting of Portland
cement per ASTM C 150, aggregates per ASTM C 33, and potable water. Mix materials to
obtain concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 2500 psi. Use at least four
sacks of cement per cubic yard, 1-inch maximum size aggregate. Under no circumstances
will any concrete be placed without the approval of a representative of Idaho Power
Company.
b. Concrete for gate aprons: Concrete shall meet 4,000 psi 28-day strength in compliance with
specification 95-125. Concrete used in gate aprons shall be tested per specification 95-125
Part 3.14. Compaction below gate aprons shall comply with specification 95-116 1.3.a.
2.9. Gates
a. Fabricate perimeter frames of gates from same material and finish as fence framework
complying with ASTM F 900.Assemble gate frames with fittings. Provide horizontal and
vertical members to ensure proper gate operation and attachment of fabric, hardware, and
accessories. Space frame members maximum of 8 feet apart unless otherwise indicated.
1. Frames: Fabricate frames with 1.90-inch minimum OD, galvanized, standard weight
(schedule 40)pipe.All open ends, top and bottom, including drop rod shall be capped.
2. Fabric: Same as for fence unless otherwise indicated. Secure fabric at vertical edges
with tension bars and bands and to top and bottom of frame with tie wires.
3. Bracing: Install diagonal cross bracing consisting of 5/16-inch-diameter adjustable-
length truss rods on gates to ensure frame rigidity without sag or twist.
4. Barbed Wire: Extend end members of gate frames 12 inches above top member and
prepare to receive three strands of wire. Provide necessary clips for securing wire to
extensions. Install hardware to tension the barbed wire.
b. Snow Gates: Provide snow gate integral with one of the main entrance swing gates. The
bottom of the snow gate shall be 5" or 18" above the bottom of the main entrance swing gate
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-120-5

95-120 Chain-Link Fences and Gates Idaho Power
as specified in the drawings. The 18-inch section below the snow gate shall be filled in with
fabric. Latch post shall be a double post.
c. Gate Hardware: Provide galvanized hardware and accessories for each gate according to
the following:
1. Hinges: Size and material to suit gate size, non-lift-off type, and offset to permit 180-
degree gate opening. Provide 1-1/2 pair of hinges for each leaf over 6-foot
nominal height.
2. Latch: Forked type or plunger-bar type to permit operation from either side of gate,with
padlock eye as an integral part of latch. Include a locking device and padlock eyes as an
integral part of the latch, permitting both gate leaves to be locked with a single padlock
3. Keeper: Provide a keeper for vehicle gates that automatically engages gate leaf and
holds it in the open position until manually released.
4. Gate Stops: Provide gate stops for double gates consisting of two#5 (minimum)rebars,
set in the concrete gate apron and designed to engage a center drop rod or plunger bar.
5. Chain:A length of 5/16" or 3/8" chain sufficient to secure the gates shall be supplied.
The chain should be cut so it is just long enough to secure the gate with no
additional links
d. Sliding Gates (Automatic motor operated): Construction shall comply with requirements of
Part 2.9 with additional requirements listed as follows:
1. Sliding gates shall be cantilevered without wheels supported by the concrete gate apron
or ground.
2. Gaps in closed sliding gates shall be kept to less than 4" in order to avoid unauthorized
access into electrical stations.
3. Sliding gates shall be grounded with Hubbell Power Systems Static Discharge Reel
(Hubbell catalog number HBL-50SD) or approved equal.
4. Sliding gates shall be operated by a key control on outside of gate as shown on drawings
and by a sensor installed on inside of gate. Sliding gate closure shall be on a timer.
5. Sliding gate shall be equipped with multiple photoelectric eyes capable of reversing the
gate in either direction upon sensing an obstruction. Photoelectric eyes shall be in-
stalled on the inside and the outside of the gate. Means shall be provided to maintain
open position for extended periods of time.
6. Operating wheels must be equipped with safety covers.
Internal Use Only
95-120-6 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power 95-120 Chain-Link Fences and Gates
7. Gate shall be operated by means of a rigid metal rail passing between a pair of solid
metal wheels with polyurethane treads. Chain operated gates shall not be used.
8. For safety reasons, pedestrian traffic shall not pass through sliding gates.A separate
pedestrian gate shall be provided and signage on the sliding gate shall clearly state that
pedestrian traffic is not allowed. Signs shall be steel with baked enamel white back-
ground with red letters a minimum of 2" high.
9. Sliding gates shall meet requirements of UL 325 class IV.
e. Sliding gate operators
1. Manufacture shall be by a company specializing in the manufacture of hydraulic gate
operators of the type specified with a minimum of ten years experience.
2. Installation shall have a minimum of three years experience installing similar
equipment.
3. Operators shall be built to UL325 standards and be listed by a testing laboratory.
Electrical work shall comply with local codes and National Electrical Code. Field work
shall be performed in a neat and professional manner, completed to journeyman
standards.
4. Upon delivery, store products upright in the original shipping containers, covered,
ventilated and protected from all weather conditions.
5. Operator motors shall be hydraulic, geroller type, and system shall not include belts,
gears, pulleys, roller chains or sprockets to transfer power from operator to gate panel.
Operators shall generate a minimum horizontal pull of 300 pounds without the drive
wheels slipping and without the distortion of the supporting arms. Operators shall be
capable of handling gates weighing up to 4,000 pounds. Gate panel velocity shall not be
less than 1.0 feet per second and shall be stopped gradually to prevent shock loads to the
gate and the operator assembly. The "soft stop" feature shall be controlled by two
adjustable hydraulic brake valves (one for each direction).
6. Standard mechanical components shall include as a minimum:
a. Supporting arms: Cast aluminum channel.Arms shall incorporate a fully
brushed, 1-1/2"bronze bearing surface, acting on pivot pins. (Item b below)
b. Arm pivot pins: 3/4" diameter, stainless steel, with integral tabs for ease of
removal.
C. Tension spring: 2-1/2"heavy duty, 800 pound capacity.
d. Tension adjustment: Finger tightened nut, not requiring the use of tools.
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-120-7

95-120 Chain-Link Fences and Gates Idaho Power
e. Drive release: Must instantly release tension on both drive wheels, and
disengage them from contact with drive rail in a single motion, for manual
operation.
f. Limit switches: fully adjustable, toggle types, with plug connection to control
panel.
g. Electrical enclosure: Oversized, metal, with hinged lid gasketed for protection
from intrusion of foreign objects, and providing ample space for the addition of
accessories.
h. Chassis: 1/4" steel base plate and 10 Ga. Sides and back welded and ground
smooth.
i. Cover: 10 Ga. sheet metal.All joints welded, filled and ground smooth. Finished
corners shall be square and true with no visible joints. Cover shall be prepared to
accept a standard Idaho Power Company issued lock.
j. Finish: Fully zinc plated then finished with a coat of high gloss powder paint
with-standing 1000 hour salt spray test.
k. Drive wheels: 6" diameter metal hub with polyurethane treads.
1. Drive rail: Shall be extruded 6061 T6 aluminum, not less than 1/8"thick. Drive
rail shall incorporate alignment pins for ease of replacement or splicing. Pins
shall enable a perfect butt splice.
In. Hydraulic hose: Shall be '/4" synthetic, rated to 2750 psi.
n. Hydraulic valves: Shall be individually replaceable cartridge type, in an
integrated hydraulic manifold.
o. Hose fittings:At manifold shall be quick-disconnect type, others shall be swivel
type.
P. Hydraulic fluid: High performance type with a viscosity index greater than 375.
q. A zero to 200 psi pressure gauge,mounted on the manifold for diagnostics, shall
be a standard component.
r. The hydraulic fluid reservoir shall be formed from a single piece of metal, non-
welded, and shall be powder painted on the inside and outside, to prevent
contamination.
Internal Use Only
95-120-8 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power 95-120 Chain-Link Fences and Gates
7. Minimum Standard electrical components:
1
a. Motor: Shall be a 1 hp minimum, with a service factor of 1.15 or greater 208/
240 VAC single phase.
b. All components shall have overload protection.
C. Controls: Smart touch controller board containing:
• Inherent entrapment sensor;
• Built in"warn before operate" system;
• Built in timer to close;
• Liquid crystal display for reporting of functions;
• 19 programmable output relay options;
• Anti-tailgate mode; built-in power surge/lightning strike protection;
• Capable,with optional software, of event logging EEPROM for trouble
shooting diagnostics; RS232 port for connection of laptop or other computer
peripheral and RS485 connection of Master/Slave systems.
d. Provide a relay to indicate gate position.
e. Transformer: 75 VA, non jumpered taps, for all common voltages.
f. Provide an output and delay timer to allow external locks to disengage before
movement of gate panel.
g. Provide an output for interlocking of two gate operators.
h. Provide an output for secure/unsecured indication lights.
i. Provide a terminal strip for connection of external interlocks.
j. Control circuit: 24VDC.
k. Required external sensors: See 2.9.d.5 Specify photo eyes or gate edges or a
combination thereof to be installed such that the gate is capable of reversing in
either direction upon sensing an obstruction.
1. Other control devices: key-switch for access and vehicle sensor for exit.
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-120-9

95-120 Chain-Link Fences and Gates Idaho Power
8. Factory testing
a. Fully assemble and test, at factory, each gate operator to assure smooth
operation, sequencing and electrical connection integrity.Apply physical loads
to the operator to simulate field conditions. Tests shall simulate physical and
electrical loads to the fully rated capacity of the operator components.
b. Check all mechanical connections for tightness and alignment. Check all welds
for completeness and continuity. Check welded corners and edges to assure that
chafing cannot occur during shipping or operation.
C. Inspect painted finish for completeness and gloss. Touch up imperfections prior
to shipment.
d. Check all hydraulic hoses and electrical wires to assure that chafing cannot occur
during shipping or operation.
9. Execution
a. Locate concrete mounting pad in accordance with approved shop drawings.
b. Make sure that gate is operating smoothly under manual conditions before
installation of gate operators. Do not proceed until gate panel is aligned and
operates without binding.
C. Install gate operator in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions,
current at the time of installation. Coordinate locations of operators with contract
drawings, other trades and shop drawings.
d. Installer shall insure that the electric service to the operator is at least 20 amps.
Operator wattage is 1500.
e. Test gate operator through ten full cycles and adjust for operation without
binding, scraping or uneven motion. Test limit switches for proper"at rest" gate
position.
f. All anchor bolts shall be fully concealed in the finished installation.
g. Train owner's personnel in the general maintenance of the gate operator and
accessories and provide one copy of"operations and maintenance"manual for
the owner's use. Manuals shall identify parts of the equipment for future
procurement.
2.10. Fence Signs
a. Fence signs shall be provided by owner. Signs shall be mounted per project drawings and as
stated in Part 3.5 of this specification.
Internal Use Only
95-120-10 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power 95-120 Chain-Link Fences and Gates
3. Execution
3.1. Fence Installation
a. General: Install fence to comply with ASTM F 567. Do not begin installation and erection
before final grading is completed,unless otherwise permitted.Apply fabric to outside of
framework. Install fencing on boundary lines inside of property line established by survey as
required by Division 1.
b. Excavation: Drill or hand-excavate (using post-hole digger)holes to a depth of 36 inches for
all posts of diameters of 4 inches or less and 52 inches for posts greater than 4 inches in
diameter. The minimum hole excavation diameter shall be as recommended by the fence
manufacturer, but not less than four times the largest cross section of post. Where solid rock
is encountered, the postholes may be drilled with a jackhammer to a minimum diameter of
'/2 inch larger than the post size; grout between the rock and the post. Where the ground
cannot be satisfactorily excavated to provide a uniform earth form, sono tube forms shall be
used to maintain the shape of the foundation.
c. Curbing: To be installed per project drawings. Concrete shall comply with Part 2.8 of this
specification.
d. Gate Apron: Gate aprons shall be installed per project drawings. Gate aprons are required to
be installed below all new Idaho Power station gates and should be installed under existing
gates when projects allow. Concrete shall comply with Part 2.8 of this specification.
e. Setting Posts: Center and align posts in holes 3 inches minimum above bottom of excavation.
Space a minimum of 7 feet o.c. and a maximum of 10 feet o.c.,unless otherwise indicated.
If slats are required, the post spacing shall be determined by the Engineer.
1. Protect portion of posts above ground from concrete splatter. Place concrete around
posts and vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Check each post for vertical and top
alignment, and hold in position during placement and finishing operations. The top 6
inches of each post foundation shall be formed with sono tube. Unless otherwise
indicated, extend concrete footings 3 inches above subgrade(flush with final grade)and
trowel to a crown to shed water.
2. Forms may be removed 24 hours after the concrete has been poured.As soon as each
form is removed, the hole shall be backfllled with moist suitable material and
thoroughly tamped.
f. Concrete: Concrete above ground must be kept moist for proper curing.No concrete shall be
poured if the ambient temperature will be less than 35 °F unless provisions are provided to
insulate the post and the concrete from freezing for a minimum of 72 hours. The reaction of
cement and water ceases, for all practical purposes, at a temperature of about 35 °F and the
danger of losing the concrete due to freezing is greatly increased.
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-120-11

95-120 Chain-Link Fences and Gates Idaho Power
g. Top Rails: Run rail continuously through line post caps,bending to radius for curved runs and
at other posts terminating into rail end attached to posts or post caps fabricated to receive rail.
Provide expansion couplings as recommended by fencing manufacturer.
h. Center Rails: Install center rails in one piece between posts and flush with post on fabric side,
using rail ends and special offset fittings where necessary.
i. Brace Assemblies: Install braces at end and gateposts and at both sides of corner and pull
posts. Locate horizontal braces at midheight of fabric on fences with top rail. Install so posts
are plumb when diagonal rod is under proper tension.
j. Bottom Tension Wire: Install tension wire within 6 inches of bottom of fabric before
stretching fabric and tie to each post with not less than same gauge and type of wire.Pull wire
taut to eliminate sags. Fasten fabric to tension wire with 0.120-inch-diameter(I I-gauge)hog
rings of same material and finish as fabric wire, spaced a maximum of 24 inches o.c.
k. Fabric: Place bottom selvage at finish grade unless otherwise indicated and shall be set no
higher than %2" above curbing or finish grade. Pull fabric taut and tie to posts, rails, and
tension wires. Install fabric on security side of fence, and anchor to framework so that fabric
remains under tension after pulling force is released.
1. Tension or Stretcher Bars: Thread through fabric and secure to end, corner, pull, and
gateposts with tension bands spaced not over 15 inches o.c.
in. Tie Wires: Use wire of proper length to secure fabric firmly to posts and rails. Bend ends of
wire to minimize hazard to persons or clothing.
1. Maximum Spacing: Tie fabric to line posts 12 inches o.c. and to rails and braces 24
inches o.c.
n. Fasteners: Install nuts for tension bands and carriage bolts on the side of the fence opposite
the fabric side.
o. Barbed Wire: Pull wire taut and install securely to extension arms and secure to end post or
terminal arms according to manufacturer's instructions.
p. Barbed Tape: Install barbed tape in configurations indicated according to manufacturer's
recommendations and fasten securely to prevent movement or displacement.
q. All Gate Latches and Snow Gate Hinges: Peen ends of bolts or score threads to prevent
removal of nuts for added security.
3.2. Gate Installation
a. Install gates plumb, level, and secure for full opening without interference. Install ground-set
items in concrete for anchorage.Adjust hardware for smooth operation and lubricate where
necessary. Install gates according to manufacturer's instructions,plumb, level, and secure.
Internal Use Only
95-120-12 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power 95-120 Chain-Link Fences and Gates
b. Gate should be secured with padlock and chain. Provide hand access to padlock from both
sides of gate. Padlock will be provided by Idaho Power.
3.3. Adjusting
a. After repeated operation of completed installation equivalent to 3 days'use by normal traffic,
readjust gates for optimum operating condition and safety. Lubricate operating equipment
and clean exposed surfaces.
3.4. Grounding
a. Ground fence in accordance to specification 95-179, 3.14.
3.5. Fence Signs
a. Warning Hazardous Voltage signs shall be mounted on the public side of all station fences.
Attach sign to the fence at a height measured from top of sign to finished grade of 5 feet. Use
standard 12.5 gauge 'hog rings' (galvanized or stainless steel) to install signs. Signs shall be
installed level and straight.
1. Place one sign at each entrance.
2. Place one sign on every straight section of fence 100 ft in length or less.
3. Straight fence sections longer than 100 feet require more signs. Space signs equally at
no more than 50-foot intervals.
b. Station Identification signs shall be mounted at each entrance to station at a height measured
from top of sign to finished grade of 5 feet. Use standard 12.5 gauge 'hog rings' (galvanized
or stainless steel) to install signs. Signs shall be installed level and straight.
3.6. Isolation Panels
a. Fences not directly associated with station fences shall be electrically isolated from the
station fence with isolation panels as indicated on the drawings.
3.7. Barbed Wire Fences
a. General: Barbed wire fence installation to comply with standard practice and as specified on
drawings.
b. Setting T Posts: T posts shall be placed no more than 12'-0" on center with a minimum of 2'-
0" embedment,unless otherwise indicated.
c. Brace Assemblies: Install braces at end and gateposts and at both sides of corner and pull
posts.
d. Barbed Wire: Pull wire taut and install securely to T Posts and secure to end post or terminal.
e. Gates: Use a typical tube gate with the proper dimensions as specified on the drawings.
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-120-13

95-120 Chain-Link Fences and Gates Idaho Power
3.8. Clean Up
a. The area shall be left clean and orderly. Unless otherwise directed by an Idaho Power
Company representative, dirt from the foundation excavations shall be evenly spread around
the surrounding area. The area shall be left free of excess, dribbles of concrete,pieces of wire
or other scrap material.
Internal Use Only
95-120-14 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power
CHAPTER
95-122 Nonconductive
(Fiberglass) Fences TDMM
1. General
1.1. Summary
a. This section covers the complete furnishing and installation of a nonconductive substation
fence system.
b. The Contractor shall furnish all material and labor required to make the fence complete.
c. The nonconductive fence shall stand 8 feet above finished grade when erected. The complete
fence includes 8 feet of fence on 12 to 14 inches of concrete curbing.Alternatively, 12 inches
of fencing may be buried beneath the fencing to provide additional security against dig-ins
and secondary oil containment.
d. The nonconductive fence shall consist of stacked tongue-and-groove structural planks.
The planks shall be comprised of a glass reinforced,thermoset composite structural box shell
that may be filled with recycled rubber to dampen sound. Individual planks shall be of
sufficient weight to be installed without the use of lifting equipment.
1.2. Submittals
a. Shop drawings: Submit shop drawings in AutoCad format showing layout of fence including
gates, dimensions from existing structures, isolation panels, snow or personnel gates,
and gate stops. Layout shall show sliding gate operator location with concrete mounting pad
and electrical runs.
b. Supplier specifications: Submit supplier's specifications for structural components of the
nonconductive fence system(planks and support posts) and hardware.All material for the
fence system shall be obtained from a single source per Part 1.3.b of this specification.
c. Sliding gate: Submit supplier's specifications for sliding gate including safety and security
schematics and installation instructions. Submit supplier's specifications for sliding gate
operator in compliance with all provisions of Part 2.9.d of specification 95-120 Chain-Link
Fences and Gates.
d. Certification and warranty: Submit manufacturer and installer warranties for all components
of the fence and gates. Submit certification that the sliding gate operator has been tested for
full power and pressure of all hydraulic components, full stress tests of all mechanical
components, and electrical tests of all overload devices.
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-122-1

95-122 Nonconductive (Fiberglass) Fences Idaho Power
1.3. Quality Assurance
a. Installer qualifications: Engage an experienced installer with at least three years' experience
and has completed at least five fence projects installing nonconductive fence or sound
barriers of similar scope to this project with a successful record on in-service performance.
b. Single-Source responsibility: Obtain all components of the nonconductive fence system
(planks and support posts) and hardware from the same manufacturer/supplier.
1.4. Project Conditions
a. Field Measurements: Verify layout information for fences and gates shown on the drawings
in relation to the property survey and existing structures. Verify dimensions by field
measurements and document any variations from project documents clearly.
2. Products
2.1. General
a. The components of the nonconductive fence system shall be provided by Shakespeare
Composite Structures or by an equivalent supplier approved by the project engineer.
b. The structural components of the fence system(planks and support posts) shall be supplied
by the same manufacturer.
c. The structural components of the fence system(planks and support posts) shall be
constructed of a durable, UV resistant, continuous glass fiber reinforced, flame retardant,
thermosetting composite material which is also resistant to degradation from ozone,
hydrocarbons, and freeze/thaw cycling.
d. The sound barrier shall exhibit good workmanship and shall be free of burns, discoloration,
cracks, or other objectionable marks that would adversely affect the barrier's performance
or serviceability.
e. The color of the components of the fence shall be specified by Idaho Power in accordance
with Federal Standard 595B. The components shall be coated with a UV resistant polymer.
f. When assembled and loaded in a configuration similar to a vertical wall installation,
the fence shall not exhibit any cracking deformation or separation when cycled from a
temperature of-40 degrees Fahrenheit ff)to +140°F and back again.
2.2. Planks
a. The maximum width of the planks shall be 24 feet. The width of each panel shall be shown
on the project drawings.
b. The height of the planks shall be 12 inches.
c. The thickness of the planks shall be 3.125 inches.
Internal Use Only
95-122-2 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power 95-122 Nonconductive (Fiberglass) Fences
d. The structural plank component of the nonconductive wall shall have minimum mechanical
properties as follows:
Property ASTM Test Method Minimum Value
Flexural Modulus D-790 1,600,000 psi
Flexural Strength D-790 57,000 psi
Tensile Strength D-638 60,000 psi
Tensile Modulus D-638 3,500,00 psi
Elongation % D-638 1.9
Compressive Strength D-695 65,000 psi
Barcol Hardness D-22583 50
Specific Gravity D-792 1.8
e. The composite plank shall have a maximum flame spread index of 15 and a maximum smoke
developed index of 600 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
2.3. Support Post/Beam
a. The nominal width of the fence support post/beam shall be 10 inches.
b. The nominal depth of the fence support post/beam shall be 10 inches.
c. The nominal wall thickness of the fence support post/beam shall be 0.350 inches.
d. The nominal wall thickness of the fence support post/beam shall be 0.400 inches.
e. The height of the fence supports shall be specified by Idaho Power on the project drawings.
f. The weight of the fence support post/beam shall be 10.2 pounds per foot.
g. The structural support beam/post of the nonconductive wall shall have minimum mechanical
properties as follows:
Property ASTM Test Method Minimum Value
Tensile Strength D-638 35,000 psi
Compressive Strength D-695 35,000 psi
Flexural Strength D-790 35,000 psi
Tensile Modulus D-638 4,000,000 psi
h. The composite support beam/post shall have a maximum flame spread index of 25 when
tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-122-3

95-122 Nonconductive (Fiberglass) Fences Idaho Power
i. The composite support beam/post shall meet the dimensions in Figure 1.
Figure 1 .
S,IU .35
.35
.40 -
5.10
35
10.00
NNW O>a6W6lf1�CMi wu.E WR
N„„ 1Z15117 Valmont Composites
nne
°P"ICFO`"" Utility Beam
ow,�.oaisaiwaer.a �•••. SIZE DWG. NO. RE
...c.+e.. ee.. .c..0 n...Y..a SCALE'ICI WEIC-H"- SHEEP I t=,i I
5 e 3 1
Internal Use Only
95-122-4 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power
CHAPTER
95-125 Cast-in-Place Concrete TD=0
1. GENERAL
1.1. Summary
a. The Contractor shall construct concrete foundations to support stations structures and other
concrete structures in accordance with all applicable project drawings and specifications.
b. The Owner will provide all galvanized anchor bolts, nuts, and washers. The Contractor shall
provide all other materials and equipment specified herein.
1.2. Submittals
a. The Contractor shall submit written reports to the Owner of each proposed mix for each class
of concrete at least 7 days prior to the start of Work. The Contractor shall not begin concrete
production until the engineer has approved the proposed mix designs.
b. Contractor shall submit batch tickets showing mix design proportioning and batch time
to engineer.
c. The Contractor shall submit product data for all proprietary materials and items, including
reinforcement and forming accessories, admixtures,patching compounds, water-stops,joint
systems, curing compounds, dry-shake finish materials, and others as requested by
the engineer.
d. The Contractor shall submit laboratory test reports for concrete materials and mix design
tests to the Engineer of Record.
1.3. Quality Assurance
a. Codes and Standards: The Contractor shall comply with the provisions of the following
codes, specifications, and standards, except where more stringent requirements are shown or
specified:
1. American Concrete Institute (ACI) 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete for
Buildings"
2. ACI 318, "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete"
3. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) "Manual of Standard Practice"
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-125-1

95-125 Cast-in-Place Concrete Idaho Power
b. Concrete Testing Service: The Contractor shall be responsible for engaging and scheduling
the services of a testing agency to perform material evaluation tests. Concrete test reports
shall be provided to the Engineer of Record. The Contractor, at the Contractor's expense,
shall rework materials that do not comply with these Specifications. Concrete testing is
further described in Part 14 of this specification.
2. Products
2.1. Forms for Exposed Finish Concrete
a. Use plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood forming panels, or other acceptable panel-type
materials to provide continuous, straight, smooth, exposed surfaces.
2.2. Form Release Agent
a. Provide a commercial formulation form release agent with a maximum of 350 g/L of volatile
organic compounds (VOCs)that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete
surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.
2.3. Form Ties
a. Use factory-fabricated, adjustable-length, removable or snap-off metal form ties designed to
prevent form deflection and to prevent spalling of the concrete upon removal. Provide units
that will leave no metal closer than 1-1/2 inches to the plane of the exposed concrete surface.
Provide ties that, when removed, will leave holes not larger than 1 inch in diameter in the
concrete surface.
2.4. Reinforcing Bars
a. Deformed Steel Reinforcing Bars (rebar) shall conform to ASTM A 615, Grade 60.
b. Steel Wire shall conform to ASTM A 82,plain, cold-drawn steel.
c. Welded Wire Fabric shall conform to ASTM A 185, welded steel wire fabric.
d. Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Fabric shall conform to ASTM A 497.
e. Fiberglass (FRP) Reinforcing Bars shall conform to ASTM D7205.
f. Supports for Reinforcement: Use bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing,
supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Use wire bar-type
supports complying with CRSI specifications.
1. For slabs-on-grade support,use supports with sand plates or horizontal runners when
base material will not support chair legs.
2. For exposed-to-view concrete surfaces where the legs of the supports are in contact with
forms, provide supports with legs that are protected by plastic (CRSI, Class 1) or
stainless steel (CRSI, Class 2).
Internal Use Only
95-125-2 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power 95-125 Cast-in-Place Concrete
2.5. Concrete Materials
a. Portland Cement: Use ASTM C 150,Type II. Use one brand of cement throughout the project
unless otherwise acceptable to the Owner.
b. Fly Ash: Use ASTM C 618, Type F.
c. Normal-Weight Aggregates: Use ASTM C 33 and as specified. For exposed concrete,
provide aggregates from a single source. For exposed exterior surfaces, do not use fine or
coarse aggregates containing substances that cause spalling.
d. Water: Use potable water containing less than 500 ppm of chlorides.
e. Fiber Reinforcement: Use polypropylene fibers engineered and designed for secondary
reinforcement of concrete slabs, complying with ASTM C 1116, Type III and not less than
3/4-inch long.
f. Admixtures:
1. Provide concrete admixtures that contain not more than 0.1 percent chloride ions.All
admixtures used in the concrete mix shall be from the same manufacturer.
2. Air-Entraining Admixture: Use ASTM C 260, certified by the manufacturer to be
compatible with any other required admixtures.
3. Water-Reducing Admixture: Use ASTM C 494, Type A.
4. High-Range Water-Reducing Admixture: Use ASTM C 494, Type F or Type G.
5. Water Reducing,Accelerating Admixture: Use ASTM C 494, Type E.
6. Water Reducing, Retarding Admixture: Use ASTM C 494, Type D.
g. Liquid Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: Use Liquid-type, membrane forming, curing
compound complying with ASTM C 309, Type I, Class A. Moisture loss shall not be more
than 1.8oz/sq. ft when applied at 200 sq. ft./gal.
h. Water-Based Acrylic Membrane Curing Compound: Use ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B.
i. Evaporation Control: Use monomolecular film-forming compound, applied to exposed
concrete slab surfaces, for temporary protection from rapid moisture loss.
j. Bonding Agent: Use polyvinyl acetate or acrylic base.
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-125-3

95-125 Cast-in-Place Concrete Idaho Power
2.6. Proportioning and Designing Mixes
a. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete by either laboratory trial batch or
field experience methods as specified in ACI 301. For the trial batch method, use an
independent testing agency acceptable to the Owner for preparing and reporting proposed
mix designs.
b. Structural concrete:
1. Provide 4,500 psi, 28-day compressive strength, mix designs for all station structural
concrete.
2. Proportions:
a. Use a water to cement ratio of 0.45 maximum by weight for all 4,500-psi
concrete.
b. Add air-entraining admixture at the manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in
concrete at the point of placement having total air content of 6.0 percent with a
tolerance of plus or minus 1.0 percent.
C. The minimum cement content shall be 540 pounds(6 bags)per cubic yard of 3/4-
inch nominal maximum size aggregate. Increase the cement content or the
combined cement plus fly ash content as required to meet the strength
requirements (20% max. by weight).
d. Slump range:
• For spread foundations, slabs on grade and grade beams use 3" to 4 '/2".
• For drilled piers or shafts (dry holes)use 6" to 8".
• For drilled piers or shafts (wet holes)use 7" to 9".
© The target maximum slump may be increased to the values indicated when chemical admixtures are
used, provided that the admixture-treated concrete has the same or lower W/C ratio and does not
exhibit segregation potential or excessive bleeding.
e. Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested by the
Contractor when the characteristics of the materials, the job conditions, the
weather,the test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments,as accepted
by the Owner. Laboratory test data for the revised mix design and strength
results must be submitted to and accepted by the Owner before using the mix in
the work.
f. Fiber Reinforcement:Add at the manufacturer's recommended rate but not less
than 1.5 lb./cu. yd.
Internal Use Only
95-125-4 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power 95-125 Cast-in-Place Concrete
c. Flowable fill/Slurry:
1
1. Use this mix to encase conduit carrying high voltage cable inside substation yards.
2. Provide 150 - 300 psi, 28-day compressive strength mix designs for flowable fill.
3. Proportions:
a. The minimum cement content shall be 50 pounds (1 bag)per cubic yard of fill.
b. The minimum fly ash content shall be 250 pounds per cubic yard of fill.
C. Use a water to cementitious material ratio of 1.17 maximum by weight.
• Cementitious material is Portland cement plus fly ash.
d. Coarse aggregate shall be 3/8"minus. Use maximum of 2250 pounds per cubic
yard of flowable fill.
e. Fine aggregate: use maximum of 1100 pounds per cubic yard of flowable fill.
f. Specified slump for flowable fill shall be 6"-8".
g. Flowable fill shall be designed to flow around bundled conduits in irregular
trenches. The flowable fill shall be"excavatable"- it shall be easily broken apart
to allow for future access to the conduits. It shall be designed to harden in no
more than 4 hours after placement.
h. Mix design adjustments may be requested by the Contractor when the
characteristics of the materials,the job conditions,the weather,the test results, or
other circumstances warrant adjustments, as accepted by the Owner. Laboratory
test data for the revised mix design and strength results must be submitted to and
accepted by the Owner before using the mix in the work.
i. Testing is not required for flowable fill
j. This specification shall not be used for structural backfill unless approved by
stations engineer.
d. Structural backfill:
1. Use 1,000 psi minimum concrete mix as specified by stations engineer.
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-125-5

95-125 Cast-in-Place Concrete Idaho Power
3. Execution
3.1. Drilled Piers
a. Dry Drilling is the preferred method of excavation. Unless rock or obstructions are en-
countered,the excavation shall be completed in a continuous operation and the concrete shall
be placed without undue delay. Holes shall be drilled with such types of drilling equipment
that will produce the excavation shown on the drawings. Drill rigs that do not run true shall
not be allowed.Alternate methods of excavation, including blasting, or suction method, shall
be submitted to owner's engineer for approval prior to construction.
b. Drilled piers shall be drilled to the diameters and depth shown on the drawings.
The excavation shall be protected with a"surface casing"to prevent the collars of the piers
from caving before the concrete has been placed. Excavation shall be open no more than
24 hours.Any excavation left open overnight should be cased through soil layers to protect
against cave-ins. Contact engineer for approval if excavation is to be open longer than
specified.
c. The depths noted on the drawings are to be considered minimum. If unsuitable materials
affecting the required bearing value are encountered, the excavation shall be continued to
whatever depth necessary to obtain suitable material, as determined by the Owner.
d. The variation in elevation of the bottoms of the drilled piers shall be from minus one(-1)inch
to plus three (+ 3) inches except where soil conditions require the depth of the piers to be
carried deeper.
e. Temporary casings shall be required at locations where the soil will not stand without support
or where, because of ground water conditions, sloughing of the sides of the excavations may
seriously delay or endanger the satisfactory completion of the excavation and the placement
of concrete.
f. The Contractor shall have available, for immediate use on the job, an ample supply of casings
of each size that may be required for use in the pier excavations and shall provide additional
amounts, if required, to ensure the orderly progress of the job.
g. The metal casing may be in short pieces but with jointing devices having sufficient strength
that assembled sections of the casing may be pulled as an assembly as the concrete is placed
(or immediately thereafter). The casing shall also be of such strength and rigidity as to
maintain the required excavation lines against the pressure of sloughing material from the
sides of piers.
h. All temporary casing shall be removed from the piers as the concrete is placed or
immediately thereafter and in such a manner as to prevent sloughing material from dropping
to the bottom of the excavations or falling on top of freshly placed concrete.A sufficient head
of concrete shall be maintained to prevent intrusion of soil into or on top of the fresh
concrete. The Contractor shall notify the Owner immediately if intrusion appears to occur.
Internal Use Only
95-125-6 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power 95-125 Cast-in-Place Concrete
i. During casing extraction, upward movement of the rebar shall not exceed two (2) inches.
Downward movement shall not exceed one (1) inch. The Owner shall be notified
immediately of any excessive movement.
j. The outside diameter of the casing shall not be less than the specified diameter of the drilled
shaft. The length of the casing shall be sufficient to allow the construction of a good-quality
shaft. The Contractor shall clean the bottom of the excavation so that no more than twenty-
five percent(25%)of the bearing area is covered with a maximum of two (2)inches of loose,
disturbed material.
k. When shown on the drawings,bedding material shall be three-quarter(3/4) inch minus
roadmix, compacted in place to 95%maximum density as per the Modified Proctor test.
Refer to specification 95-112, Station Earthwork.
1. Immediately prior to the placement of concrete, the pier excavations shall be cleaned of
water, debris or other materials harmful to concrete, including ice, clods and piles of loose
earth. Water in the bottoms of pier excavations must be removed or absorbed.
m. Any method that deviates from specification must be submitted to the engineer for approval
prior to construction.Any deviation from referenced Geotechnical investigation shall be
brought to engineer's attention immediately.
3.2. Forms
a. General: Design, erect, support, brace, and maintain formwork to support vertical, lateral,
static, and dynamic loads that might be applied until the concrete structure can support such
loads. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of correct size, shape,
alignment, elevation, and position. Maintain formwork construction tolerances and surface
irregularities, complying with the following ACI 347 limits:
1. The bottom of the forms shall extend a minimum of six inches below final grade.
2. The maximum deviation of a single foundation from the location shown on the
drawings shall not exceed 1/2- inch.
3. The maximum deviation of distance from center-to-center of the piers for two-legged
structures shall not exceed 1/2- inch.
b. Construct forms to the sizes, shapes, lines, and dimensions shown and to obtain accurate
alignment, location, grades, level, and plumb work in the finished structures.
c. Provide 1 inch chamfer on exposed corners and edges as indicated.
3.3. Placing Reinforcement
a. General: Comply with the Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute's recommended practice,
"Placing Reinforcing Bars," for details and methods of reinforcement placement and sup-
ports and with other specifications provided by the Owner.
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-125-7

95-125 Cast-in-Place Concrete Idaho Power
b. Clean reinforcement bars of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other materials that
reduce or destroy the bond with the concrete.
c. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and
support reinforcing by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers, and hangers, as approved by
the Owner.
d. Place reinforcement to maintain minimum coverage as indicated for protection of the
concrete.Arrange, space, and securely tie reinforcement bars and bar supports to hold the
reinforcement in position during concrete placement operations. Set wire ties so the ends are
directed into the concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.
e. Lap splices shall be staggered from one another at a minimum of 90'or as specified on the
drawings or directed by the project engineer.
f. Install welded wire fabric in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one
full mesh and lace the splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous
laps in either direction.
3.4. Construction Joints
a. Construction Joints: Construction joints shall not be permitted unless shown on the drawings
or specifically approved by the Owner.
b. Where a construction joint is to be made standing water shall be removed, the surface of the
concrete shall be cleaned and roughened and an approved bonding agent shall be used.
c. Construction joints not indicated on the design drawings shall be so made and located as not
to impair the strength of the structure.
d. Provide keys in joints as indicated, including dowels across joints when indicated.
3.5. Anchor Bolts and Embedded Items
a. Concrete shall not be placed until after the Owner has inspected the anchor bolts and
embedded items.
b. Anchor bolts shall be accurately positioned. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to
accurately set the bolts initially and to maintain the required position until after the concrete
has set.
c. Prior to setting,the threads on the upper end of each anchor bolt shall be protected to prevent
the adherence of concrete. When installed, the bolts shall be clean and the portions to be
embedded in concrete shall be free of oil or other detrimental substances that would
adversely affect the bond between the bolts and the concrete.Anchor bolts shall be in
position and at the specified projection height prior to the pouring of concrete.
Internal Use Only
95-125-8 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power 95-125 Cast-in-Place Concrete
d. Deviations from the specified positions of the anchor bolts after the concrete has set shall not
exceed the following:
1. The horizontal distance between centers of adjacent anchor bolts shall be within plus or
minus one-sixteenth(+/- 1/16) inch.
2. The horizontal distance between diagonally opposite anchor bolts shall be within plus
or minus one-sixteenth (+/- 1/16) inch of the specified distance, measured at the top of
the concrete and at the top of the anchor bolts.
3. The elevation of the top of the lowest anchor bolt shall not be less than specified and
that of the highest bolt shall not exceed the specified elevation by more than one-fourth
(1/4) inch.
4. The centers of individual anchor bolts shall not deviate from lines parallel with faces of
the structure by more than one-sixteenth(1/16) inch in six (6) inches due to rotation of
the set or from other causes.
5. With the foundation completed, the set of the anchor bolts at each foundation shall not
deviate more than one-sixteenth(1/16) inch from its specified position on the
foundation and the anchor bolts for a two-legged structure shall be centered within
one-sixteenth(1/16) inch of the centerlines of the structure.
e. The Contractor shall remove concrete adhering to the portions of anchor bolts extending
above finished concrete grade during concrete finish and cleanup. Remove concrete at the
finish grade line that would prevent the base plates on the legs of station structures from
seating fully on the finished concrete elevation.
f. Any foundation that does not satisfy the specified requirements for line and grade will be
rejected.
g. Forms for Slabs: Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to
achieve required elevations and contours in finished surfaces. Provide and secure units to
support the screed strips using strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.
h. Post-installed anchors shall be drill and epoxy type anchors. Expansion or mechanical type
anchors are not permitted. Use Hilti HIT-HY 200 adhesive or approved equal. Use Hilti
HAS-E type bolts or approved equal.Anchors shall be installed per the manufacturer's
instructions. Voids drilled into concrete must be completely filled with epoxy.Adhesive
anchors shall not be installed any sooner than 21 days after placement. (ACI 318-19,
Section 26.7.2)
3.6. Concrete Placement
a. Inspection: The Owner must inspect the formwork before concrete is placed. The inspection
is to occur after completion of the formwork, installation of reinforcing steel, and placement
of items to be embedded or cast in place. The Contractor shall notify other trades whose work
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-125-9

95-125 Cast-in-Place Concrete Idaho Power
is connected to, combined with,or influenced by concrete work,allowing reasonable time for
other trades to complete work that must be completed be-fore concrete is placed.
b. General: Comply with ACI 304, "Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing
Concrete," and as otherwise specified by the Owner.
c. Deposit the concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be
placed on concrete that has hardened sufficiently to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a
section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as specified. Deposit
concrete so as to avoid segregation at its final location.
d. Place concrete in such a manner that no dirt or foreign material becomes mixed with the
concrete.
e. If concrete cannot be placed as stated in note d above, or if the concrete will fall over
reinforcement at distances greater than 4 feet, concrete shall be placed by tremie or drop
chute or alternate method approved by the Engineer of Record.
f. Concrete placed under water shall be placed by tremie method.
g. Placing Concrete in Forms: Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers no deeper than 24
inches and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. Where placement consists of
several layers, place each layer while the preceding layer is still plastic to avoid cold joints.
1. Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand
spading, rodding, or tamping. Use equipment and procedures for consolidation of
concrete complying with ACI 309 Section 1.3.a.
2. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators
vertically at uniformly spaced locations no farther than the visible effectiveness of the
machine. Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate a placed layer and at least 6 inches into the
preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to
set.At each insertion,limit the duration of vibration to the time necessary to consolidate
the concrete and the complete embedment of the reinforcement and other embedded
items without causing the mix to segregate.
h. Placing Concrete Slabs: Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous operation,
within the limits of the construction joints, until completing the placement of a panel or
section.
1. Consolidate the concrete during placement operations so that the concrete is thoroughly
worked around reinforcement, other embedded items and into corners.
Internal Use Only
95-125-10 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power 95-125 Cast-in-Place Concrete
2. Bring slab surfaces to the correct level with a straightedge and strike off the excess. Use
bull floats to smooth the surface free of humps or hollows. Do not disturb the slab
surfaces prior to beginning the finishing operations.
3. Maintain reinforcing in the proper position on chairs during concrete placement.
3.7. Concrete Encased Duct Banks
a. Where indicated on the drawings, encase conduits in a concrete envelope (see Part 2.6.0 for
Flowable fill/slurry specification) sized as indicated.
b. Envelopes may be poured directly against the sides of trenches if the cut is clean, even and
free of loose material. Remove loose material from trenches before and during the pouring of
concrete to ensure sound envelopes. Carefully spade concrete during pouring to eliminate all
voids under and between conduits and honeycombing of the exterior surface.
c. Do not use power-driven tampers or agitators unless they are specifically designed for the
application in order to ensure that the watertight integrity of the conduit is maintained.
d. Generally,pour an entire concrete envelope in one continuous pour. Where more than one
pour is necessary, terminate each pour in a sloped plane.
e. Provide reinforcement where envelopes connect to manholes or structures to prevent
shearing of joints.
f. Provide"hold downs"as indicated in construction drawings to prevent conduits from floating
during placement.
g. For concrete duct runs that are shallower than 30 inches use 1,000 psi minimum concrete
between the top of the duct run and finish grade. Contact stations engineer for appropriate
concrete specification.
3.8. Cold-Weather Placement
a. General:
1. Comply with the provisions ofACI 306R and as follows. Protect concrete work from
the physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions,
or low temperatures.
2. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40'F for(3) consecutive
days and the air temperature is not more than 50'F for more than 12 hours,
uniformly heat the water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture
temperature of not less than 50'F and not more than 80'F at the point of placement.
3. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete
on a frozen subgrade or on a subgrade containing frozen materials.
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-125-11

95-125 Cast-in-Place Concrete Idaho Power
4. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or
chemical accelerators unless otherwise accepted in the mix designs.
5. Curing and Protection:
a. The newly placed concrete shall be so housed and heated that the air surrounding
the concrete can be maintained at a temperature above 50' F for five (5) days or
70' F for three (3) days after placing. Insulation of the forms may be used for
cold weather protection provided the methods used and the portion of the
structure to be so protected are approved by the Owner.
b. The maximum temperatures within the enclosure will be limited to 100' F when
the heat is supplied by means of salamanders, stoves, or forced hot air. This type
of heating will be permitted only when adequate provisions are taken to protect
the concrete surface from dehydration and calcium accumulation by covering the
exposed surfaces with plastic sheets or approved chemical sealant.At no time
shall heat be concentrated directly on the concrete.
C. When heat is applied, the ambient air temperature shall increase at a rate not to
exceed 40' F per hour until a maximum temperature not to exceed 100' F is
reached. The maximum temperature shall be held reasonably uniform until the
concrete has reached the desired strength. In discontinuing the heat, the ambient
air temperature shall be decreased at a rate not to exceed 40' F per hour until a
temperature has been reached about 20' F above the temperature of the air to
which the concrete will be immediately exposed. The concrete shall be protected
from temperatures below freezing for six(6) days after casting.
d. The measures set forth above are the minimum required to assure that the
concrete will not be damaged by freezing and cold weather after the protection
is removed.
3.9. Hot-Weather Placement
a. When hot weather conditions exist that would impair the quality and strength of the concrete,
such as high ambient or concrete temperatures, high wind speed, high solar radiation, or low
humidity, place the concrete complying with ACI 305R and as specified by the Owner.
1. Cool the ingredients before mixing to maintain the concrete temperature at the time of
placement to below 90'F. The mixing water may be chilled or chopped ice may be used
to control the temperature,provided the water equivalent of the ice is calculated and
added to the total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is the
Contractor's option.
2. Cover reinforcing steel with water-soaked burlap, if it becomes too hot, so that the steel
temperature will not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before embedding
it in concrete.
Internal Use Only
95-125-12 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power 95-125 Cast-in-Place Concrete
3. Fog spray forms, reinforcing steel, and the subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep
the subgrade moisture uniform without puddles or dry areas.
4. Use water-reducing, retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low
humidity, or other adverse placing conditions, as acceptable to the Owner.
3.10. Finishing Formed Surfaces
a. For formed concrete surfaces exposed to view provide a smooth formed"Class A" finish per
ACI 347. Permitted irregularities are 1/8-inch for gradual and abrupt variations.
b. For formed concrete surfaces not exposed to view provide a rough formed"Class C" finish
per ACI 347. This is the concrete surface having texture imparted by the form-facing material
used, with tie holes and defective areas repaired and patched, and fins and other projections
exceeding 1/4 inch in height rubbed down or chipped off. Permitted irregularities are 1/2-inch
for gradual and abrupt variations.
3.11. Monolithic Slab Finishes
a. Trowel Finish:Apply a trowel finish to monolithic slab surfaces exposed to view and slab
surfaces to be covered with flooring. Use a bull float,power-driven trowel, and final hand-
troweling operation to provide a final surface free of trowel marks,uniform in texture and
appearance, and with finish surfaces to tolerances of FF 20 (floor flatness) and FL 17 (floor
levelness)measured according to ASTM E 1155.
b. No slip Broom Finish:Apply a no-slip broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and
ramps, and elsewhere as indicated.
3.12. Concrete Curing and Protection
a. Do not set structures or equipment on new concrete foundations until the concrete has cured
for(7) days. Protect freshly placed concrete,before and during finishing, from premature
drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures.Apply an evaporation-control material
according to the manufacturer's instructions after screeding and bull floating,but before
power floating and troweling.All exposed concrete shall be properly cured for seven(7)days
by the moist curing method using wetted burlap, Kraft paper, or polyethylene sheets to
prevent evaporation or by spray application of a liquid membrane-forming compound
conforming to ASTM Designation C309, Type 1. The membrane shall be applied according
to the manufacturer's recommendations. Surface defects shall be filled prior to application of
the membrane-curing compound.All concrete surfaces on which curing compound has been
applied shall be adequately protected for the duration of the curing period from any cause
which would disrupt the continuity of the curing membrane. No curing compound shall be
used on surfaces requiring subsequent bonding.
3.13. Concrete Surface Repairs
a. Patching Defective Areas: When acceptable to the Owner, repair and patch defective areas
with cement mortar immediately after removing the forms.After form removal all fins, small
projections or other irregularities shall be removed by proper tooling.
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-125-13

95-125 Cast-in-Place Concrete Idaho Power
b. Metal form ties extending from the face of exposed concrete shall be cut off at least three-
fourths (3/4) inch deep in the concrete immediately after removal of the forms. The holes
shall be filled with a cement-sand mortar approximately the same color as the adjoining
concrete. The mortar shall be mixed and placed as dry as possible and finished flush with the
adjoining surface.
c. Voids greater than 3/4" diameter shall be patched with non-shrink grout intended for the
specific purpose. Place the grout according to the manufacturer's instructions. Foundations
with voids deeper than 2 1/4" shall be rejected.
d. Repairing Monolithic Slabs Surfaces: Test slab surfaces for smoothness, flatness or slope
where specified and verify surface tolerances. Correct low and high areas as specified. Test
unformed surfaces, sloped to drain, for trueness of slope and smoothness by using a template
having the required slope.
1. Correct high areas in unformed surfaces by grinding, after the concrete has cured at
least 14 days.
2. Correct low areas in unformed surfaces during or immediately after completing surface
finishing operations, by cutting out low areas and replacing them with patching mortar.
Finish the repaired areas to blend into the adjacent concrete. Proprietary underlayment
compounds may be used when acceptable to the Owner.
3. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes not exceeding 1 inch in
diameter,by cutting them out and replacing them with fresh concrete. Place, compact,
and finish the patch material to blend with the adjacent finished concrete. Cure the
patch in the same manner as the adjacent concrete.
3.14. Quality Control Testing During Construction
The Contractor,unless otherwise instructed, shall be required to perform the following testing for
quality control:
1. One concrete slump test in accordance with ASTM C 143 at the point of placement at
the start of each placement.
2. One air content test at the point of placement in accordance with ASTM C 173.
3. One concrete temperature test at the point of placement in accordance with
ASTM C1064. Take additional temperature tests where warranted by weather
conditions or delays in delivery.
Test result reports shall be submitted to Engineer of Record.
The Contractor,unless otherwise instructed, shall be required to make a set of compressive test
specimens, each consisting of(4) compressive test cylinders made and cured in accordance with
ASTM C31 and C 172, current edition. One sample shall be tested at seven(7) days and two(2) at
Internal Use Only
95-125-14 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power 95-125 Cast-in-Place Concrete
twenty-eight(28) days. One cylinder shall be held for additional testing in the event of a low
break. The strength level of the concrete will be considered satisfactory if both twenty-eight(28)
day breaks equal or exceed 4,500 psi. If one of the twenty-eight(28) day breaks is between 3,500
and 4,500 psi then the fourth test cylinder shall be tested. The strength level of the concrete will
be considered satisfactory if the average of all three (3) strength test results equal or exceed
4,500 psi. If one of the twenty-eight(28) day breaks is below 3,500 psi the strength level of the
concrete will be considered unsatisfactory.
The Contractor shall be responsible to provide sampling and testing for quality control of concrete
as follows:
I. One set of tests shall be performed for any quantity of ten (10) yards or more of
concrete placed.
2. One set of tests shall be performed for every thirty (30)yards of concrete placed in a
single day.
3. In addition to the above requirements, one set of tests shall be performed for each of the
following:
a. Transformer foundation
b. Dead-end drilled pier foundation
C. Metal-clad foundation
d. Concrete Gate Apron
4. If less than five (5) cubic yards of concrete is placed in one day and no concrete is
placed for any of the items listed in 3.14.A.3 above, then concrete testing is
not required.
All quality control testing shall be the responsibility of the Contractor through a qualified testing
laboratory approved by the Owner. The cost of testing shall be borne by the Con-tractor.
The Contractor shall require the laboratory to send one copy of the compressive test reports to the
Engineer of Record and others as required by the Owner.
Additional Tests: The testing agency will make additional tests of in-place concrete when test
results indicate specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been attained in the
structure and as directed by the Owner. The testing agency may conduct tests to determine the
adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by other methods as
directed. The Contractor shall pay the cost for additional tests for concrete that has been
determined to be unsatisfactory. If testing substantiates that the concrete fails to meet the
characteristic requirements of the specifications,the Owner may order such concrete removed and
replaced at the expense of the Contractor.
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-125-15

95-125 Cast-in-Place Concrete Idaho Power
Internal Use Only
95-125-16 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power
CHAPTER
95-126 Precast Concrete Tq!)=M
1. General
1.1. Summary
a. This specification covers the materials, manufacture, transportation, and installation of
precast, reinforced concrete units produced in accordance with the Owner's authorized plans
and these specifications.
1.2. Submittals—N/A
1.3. Related Sections
a. 95-116, Station Earthwork
b. 95-125, Cast-in-place concrete
1.4. References
a. Where applicable, the latest editions of the following standards shall be considered a part of
these specifications. In cases of conflict, these specifications shall take precedence over the
listed standard. (See also Section 3, Materials)
b. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
1. ASTM C478, "Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections"
2. ASTM C789, "Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Box Sections for
Culverts, Storm Drains and Sewers"
3. ASTM C825, "Specification for Precast Concrete Barrier"
4. ASTM C850, "Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Box Sections for
Culverts, Storm Drains, and Sewers with Less Than 2 ft Cover Subjected to Highway
Loadings"
5. ASTM C857, "Recommended Practice for Minimum Structural Design Loading for
Underground Precast Concrete Utility Structures"
6. ASTM C858, "Specification for Underground Precast Concrete Utility Structures"
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-126-1

95-126 Precast Concrete Idaho Power
7. ASTM C890, "Practice for Minimum Structural Design Loading for Monolithic or
Sectional Precast Concrete Water and Wastewater Structures"
8. ASTM C913, "Specification for Precast Concrete Water and Wastewater Structures"
9. ASTM C915, "Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Crib Wall Members"
10. ASTM C923, "Specification for Resilient Connectors Between Reinforced Concrete
Manhole Structures, Pipes and Laterals"
11. ASTM C936, "Specification for Solid Concrete Interlocking Paving Units"
12. ASTM C990, "Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe, Manholes and Precast Box
Sections Using Preformed Flexible Joint Sealants"
13. ASTM C1227, "Specification for Precast Concrete Septic Tanks"
c. American Concrete Institute (ACI)
1. ACI 318, "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete"
d. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO)
1. "Standard Specification for Highway Bridges"
2. "Guide Specifications for Structural Design of Sound Barriers"
e. American Welding Society(AWS)
1. Structural Welding Code - Structural Steel,AWS D1.1
2. Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel,AWS D1.4
1.5. Franchise Products
a. Products manufactured under franchise arrangements shall conform to all the requirements
specified by the franchiser. Items not included in the franchise specification but included in
this specification shall conform to the requirements in this specification.
2. Plan Requirements
2.1. Standard Units
a. For standard units, the Precaster will supply cut sheets showing conformance to project
drawings and requirements and the applicable ASTM specifications listed in this
specification. The Precaster shall certify that such products will meet the
ASTM specifications.
Internal Use Only
95-126-2 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power 95-126 Precast Concrete
2.2. Custom-made Units
a. The plans for precast concrete units shall be shop drawings furnished by the Precaster for
approval by the Owner or his agent (specifier). These drawings shall show complete design,
installation, and construction information in such detail as to enable the Owner to determine
the adequacy of the proposed units for the intended purpose. Details of steel reinforcement
size and placement and supporting design calculations, if appropriate, shall be included. The
drawings shall include a schedule that will list the size and type of precast concrete unit at
each location where the units are to be used. The precast concrete units shall be produced in
accordance with the approved drawings.
2.3. Proprietary Units
a. For proprietary units, the Precaster may supply standard plans or informative literature.
Supporting calculations and design details shall be available upon request. The Precaster
shall warrant that such products will perform the intended task.
3. Materials
3.1. Concrete
a. Raw materials for concrete shall meet the following standards.
1. Portland Cement:ASTMC150, Type 1, 11, 111 or V
2. Aggregates:ASTM C33 or C330
3. Water: Water shall be potable water or water free of deleterious substances in amounts
harmful to concrete or embedded metals.
4. Admixtures:
a. Air-entraining:ASTM C260
b. Water reducing, retarding, accelerating, high range water reducing:ASTM C494
C. Pozzolans, fly ash and other mineral admixtures:ASTM C618
d. Ground granulated blast furnace slag:ASTM C989
3.2. Reinforcing Steel
a. Concrete reinforcement shall be steel bars or welded wire fabric, or a combination of both.
Reinforcement shall meet the following standards:
b. Bars:
1. Deformed Billet-steel:ASTM A615
2. Deformed Rail-steel:ASTM A616
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-126-3

95-126 Precast Concrete Idaho Power
3. Deformed Axle-steel:ASTM A617
4. Deformed Low-alloy steel:ASTM A706
c. Wire:
1. Plain:ASTM A82
2. Deformed:ASTM A496
d. Welded Wire Fabric:
1. Plain Wire:ASTM Al 85
2. Deformed Wire:ASTM A497
e. Epoxy Coated Reinforcement:
1. Reinforcing Bars:ASTM A775
2. Wire and Fabric:ASTM A884
f. Galvanized Reinforcement:
1. Reinforcing Bars:ASTM A7673.3
g. Inserts and Embedded Metal
1. All items embedded in concrete shall be of the type required for the intended task and
meet the following standards:
a. Structural steel plates, angles, etc:ASTM A36
b. Proprietary items: In accordance with manufacturers published literature
C. Welded studs:AWS DI. 1
d. Finishes (as required):
• Shop primer: Manufacturers' standards
• Hot-dipped galvanized:ASTM A152
• Zinc-rich coating: MIL-P-2135 self-curing, one component, sacrificial
• Cadmium coating
Internal Use Only
95-126-4 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power 95-126 Precast Concrete
h. Joint Sealant and Joint Gaskets:
1
1. Joints for Circular Concrete Sewer and Culvert Pipe, Using Rubber Gaskets:ASTM
C443
2. External Sealing Bands for Noncircular Sewer, Storm Drain, and Culvert Pipe:ASTM
C877
3. Joints for Concrete Pipe, Manholes, and Manufactured Box Sections Using Preformed
Flexible Joint Sealants:ASTM C990
4. Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants:ASTM C920
i. Pipe Entry Connectors:
1. Resilient Connectors between Reinforced Concrete Manhole Structures, Pipes and
Laterals:ASTM C93
j. Grout:
1. Cement grout: Portland cement with enough water for the required strength and sand for
proper consistency. The grout may contain mineral or chemical admixtures, if approved
by the Owner's representative.
2. Non-shrink grout: Premixed,packaged expansive and non-expansive shrink resistant
grout.
4. Concrete Mixes
4.1. Mix Proportions
a. Concrete shall be a uniform mix of quality materials as listed in Section I. Mix proportions
shall be determined by following the standards in ACI 318 Chapter
1. Recommendations for selecting proportions for concrete are given in detail in"Standard
Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete" (ACI
21 1). (This standard provides two methods for selecting and adjusting proportions for
normal weight concrete: the estimated weight and absolute volume methods. Example
calculations are shown for both methods. Proportioning of heavy-weight concrete by
the absolute volume method is presented in an appendix.)
2. Recommendations for lightweight concrete are given in"Standard Practice for
Selecting Proportions for Structural Lightweight Concrete" (ACI 212). (This standard
provides a method of proportioning and adjusting structural grade concrete containing
lightweight aggregates.)
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-126-5

95-126 Precast Concrete Idaho Power
4.2. Water-Cement Ratio and Air Content
a. Concrete that will be exposed to freezing and thawing shall contain entrained air and shall
have water to cement ratios of 0.45 or less. Concrete which will not be exposed to freezing,
but which is required to be watertight, shall have a water to cement ratio of 0.50 or less if the
concrete is exposed to fresh water or 0.45 or less if exposed to brackish water or sea water.
For corrosion protection, reinforced concrete exposed to deicer salts, brackish water or
seawater shall have a water to cement ratio of 0.40 or less.
b. The air content of concrete that will be exposed to freezing shall be within the limits given in
Table 4.2.
c. Table 4.2 Total Air Content (%)* for Frost-Resistant Concrete
Nominal Maximum
Aggregate Size (in) Severe Exposure Moderate Exposure
3/8 6.0 to 9.0 4.5 to 7.5
'/z 5.5to8.5 4.0to7.0
3/4 4.5to7.5 3.5to6.5
1 4.5 to 7.5 3.0 to 6.0
1-1/2 4.0 to 7.0 3.0 to 6.0
*For specified compressive strengths greater than 5000 psi,air content may be reduced 1 percent.
4.3. Compressive Strength
All concrete shall develop a minimum compressive strength of 4000 psi in 28 days unless other
strengths are designated on the drawings.
5. Manufacture
5.1. Forms
a. Forms for manufacturing precast concrete products shall be of the type and design consistent
with industry standards. They should be capable of consistently providing uniform products
and dimensions. Forms shall be constructed so that the forces and vibrations to which the
forms will be subjected shall cause no product damage. Forms shall be cleaned of concrete
buildup after each use. Coatings of form release agents shall not be allowed to build up.
5.2. Reinforcement
a. Cages of reinforcement shall be fabricated either by tying the bars, wires or welded wire
fabric into rigid assemblies or by welding,where permissible, in accordance with AWS D 1.4.
b. Reinforcing shall be positioned as specified by the design and so that the concrete cover
conforms to the requirements. The tolerance on concrete cover shall be one-third of that
specified but not more than 1/2 in. Concrete cover shall not be less than 1/2 in. Positive
Internal Use Only
95-126-6 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power 95-126 Precast Concrete
means shall be taken to assure that the reinforcement does not move significantly during the
casting operations.
5.3. Embedded Items
a. Embedded items shall be positioned at locations specified in the design documents.
Inserts, plates,weldments, lifting devices and other items to be embedded in precast concrete
products shall be held rigidly in place so that they do not move significantly during casting
operations.
5.4. Placing Concrete
a. Concrete shall be deposited into forms as near to its final location as practical. The free fall of
the concrete shall be kept to a minimum.
b. Concrete shall be consolidated in such a manner that segregation of the concrete is minimized
and honeycombed areas are kept to a minimum. Vibrators used to consolidate concrete shall
have frequencies and amplitudes sufficient to produce well-consolidated concrete.
5.5. Cold Weather Requirements
a. Recommendations for cold weather concreting are given in detail in"Cold Weather
Concreting"reported by ACI Committee 30 (This report presents requirements and methods
for producing satisfactory concrete during cold weather.)
b. Adequate equipment shall be provided for heating the concrete materials and protecting the
concrete during freezing or near-freezing weather.
c. All concrete materials and all reinforcement, forms, fillers, and ground with which concrete
is to come in contact shall be free from frost.
d. Frozen materials or materials containing ice shall not be used.
5.6. Hot Weather Requirements
a. Recommendations for hot weather concreting are given in detail in"Hot Weather
Concreting"reported by ACI Committee 30 (This document defines the hot weather factors
that affect concrete properties and construction practices and recommends measures to
eliminate or minimize the undesirable effects.)
b. During hot weather, proper attention shall be given to ingredients, production methods,
handling,placing,protection, and curing to prevent excessive concrete temperatures or water
evaporation that could impair required strength or serviceability of the member or structure.
5.7. Curing
a. Curing by Moisture Retention
I. Moisture shall be prevented from evaporating from exposed surfaces until adequate
strength for stripping (See Section 5.9) is reached by one of the following methods:
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-126-7

95-126 Precast Concrete Idaho Power
a. Cover the concrete with polyethylene sheets a minimum of 6 mils thick.
1
b. Cover the concrete with burlap or other absorptive material and keep them
continually moist.
C. Add curing compounds applied at a rate not to exceed 200 sq. ft. per gallon or
per manufacturer's recommendations.
2. Surfaces that will be exposed to weather during service shall be cured as above for a
minimum of 3 days. Forms shall be considered effective in preventing evaporation from
the contact surfaces. If the air temperature is below 50'F, the curing period shall be
extended.
b. Curing with Heat and Moisture
1. Concrete shall not be subjected to steam or hot air until after the concrete has attained
its initial set. Steam, if used, shall be applied within a suitable enclosure that permits
free circulation of the steam. If hot air is used for curing, precautions shall be taken to
prevent moisture loss from the concrete. The temperature of the concrete shall not be
permitted to exceed 160'F. These requirements do not apply to products cured with
steam under pressure in an autoclave.
5.8. Finishes
a. Standard formed surfaces: These are surfaces cast against approved forms using industry
practice in cleaning the forms, designing the concrete mixes, placing, and curing the
concrete. Normal color variations, form joint marks, small surface holes caused by air
bubbles and minor chips and spills will be tolerated but no major imperfections, honey-
combs or other defects will be permitted.
b. Standard unformed surfaces: These are surfaces finished with a vibrating screen, or by hand
with a float.Normal color variations, minor indentations, minor chips and spills will be
tolerated but no major imperfections, honeycombs, or other defects shall be permitted.
c. Special finishes:
1. Troweled,broomed or other finishes shall be according to the requirements of project
documents and performed per industry standards or supplier specifications.
2. Precasters shall submit sample finishes for approval when required by the project
documents. The sample finishes shall be approved prior to the start of production.
5.9. Stripping Products From Forms
a. Products shall not be removed from the forms until the concrete reaches the compressive
strength for stripping required by the design. If no such requirement exists, products may be
removed from the forms after the final set of the concrete, provided that stripping damage
is minimal.
Internal Use Only
95-126-8 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power 95-126 Precast Concrete
5.10. Patching and Repairs
a. No repair is required to formed surfaces that are relatively free of air voids and honey-
combed areas, unless the surfaces are required by the design to be finished.
b. Repairing Minor Defects
1. Defects that will not impair the functional use or expected life of a manufactured pre-
cast concrete product may be repaired by any method that does not impair the product.
c. Repairing Honeycombed Areas
1. When honeycombed areas are to be repaired,all loose material shall be removed and the
areas cut back into essentially horizontal or vertical planes to a depth at which coarse
aggregate particles break under chipping rather than being dislodged. Proprietary repair
materials shall be used in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. If a
proprietary repair material is not used, the area shall be saturated with water.
Immediately prior to repair, the area should be damp, but there should not be excess
water.A cement-sand grout or an approved bonding agent shall be applied to the
chipped surfaces, followed immediately by consolidating an appropriate repair material
into the cavity.
d. Repairing Major Defects
1. Defects in precast concrete products that impair the functional use or the expected life
of the products shall be evaluated by qualified personnel to determine if repairs are
feasible and, if so, to establish the repair procedure.
6. Quality Assurance
6.1. General
a. The Precaster shall demonstrate adherence to the standards set forth in the National Precast
Concrete Association Quality Control Manual. The Precaster shall meet either Section 6.1
or 6.2.
b. NPCA Certification
1. The Precaster shall be certified by the National Precast Concrete Association's Plant
Certification Program prior to and during production of the products for this project.
c. Qualifications, Testing and Inspection
1. The Precaster shall have been in the business of producing precast concrete products
similar to those specified for a minimum of 5 years. The Precaster shall maintain a
permanent quality control department or retain an independent testing agency on a
continuing basis. The agency shall issue a report, certified by a licensed engineer,
detailing the ability of the Precaster to produce quality products consistent with
industry standards.
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-126-9

95-126 Precast Concrete Idaho Power
2. The Precaster shall show that the following tests are performed in accordance with the
ASTM standards indicated. Tests shall be performed for each 150 cu. yd. of concrete
placed, but not less frequently than once per week.
a. Slump: C143
b. Compressive Strength: C31, C192, C39
c. Air Content (when air-entrained concrete is being used): C231 or C 1 73
d. Unit Weight: C 13 8
d. The Precaster shall provide documentation demonstrating compliance with this section.
e. The Owner may place an inspector in the plant when the products covered by this
specification are being manufactured.
7. Storage And Shipment
7.1. Handling
a. Products shall be stored,handled and shipped in a manner to minimize damage. Lifting holes
or inserts shall be consistent with industry standards. Lifting shall be accomplished with
methods or devices intended for the purpose of handling these products.
7.2. Minimum Strength
a. Products shall not be shipped until they are at least 5 days old,unless it can be shown that the
concrete strength has reached at least 75% of the specified 28-day strength, or that damage
will not be caused which will impair the performance of the product.
7.3. Acceptance
a. The Owner's representative upon arrival at the job site shall make final inspection and
acceptance of the precast concrete products.
8. Installation
8.1. Site Access
a. The general contractor shall be responsible for providing adequate access to the site to
facilitate hauling, storage and proper handling of the precast concrete products.
8.2. Installation
a. Precast concrete products shall be installed to the lines and grades shown in the project
drawings or otherwise specified by the Owner. Suitable lifting devices at points provided by
the Precaster shall lift the products. The products shall be installed per the Precaster's
recommendation.
Internal Use Only
95-126-10 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power 95-126 Precast Concrete
8.3. Watertightness
a. Where watertightness is a necessary performance characteristic of the precast concrete
product's end use,watertight joints, connectors and inserts should be used to ensure the
integrity of the whole system.
b. When testing is required for an underground product, one of the following methods must to
be followed:
1. Use vacuum testing prior to backfill according to ASTM C 1244.
2. Use water testing according to contract documents and the
Precaster's recommendations.
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-126-11

95-126 Precast Concrete Idaho Power
Internal Use Only
95-126-12 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power
CHAPTER
95-137 Structural Steel TDMIT
1. General
1.1. Summary
a. This section covers the work necessary for erecting steel structures and connections,
installing protective coatings, and repairing any damage to protective coatings as well as all
other work necessary for the erection of complete structures.
b. The Owner will provide all materials,unless otherwise noted. Materials specified herein are
for informational purposes only. Refer to specification 95-175, Installation Of
Owner-Furnished Products.
1.2. Submittals
a. Welding certifications. See 3.5.b. and 2.1.1.
1.3. Quality Assurance
a. Industry Specifications: The Contractor shall comply with all applicable provisions of the
following specifications and documents:
1. AISC: "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."
2. AISC: "Specification for the Design, Fabrication, and Erection of Structural Steel for
Buildings" and including"Commentary of the AISC Specification."
3. AISC: "Specifications for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325-93 or ASTM A490-93
Bolts" and"Appendix A, Testing Method to Determine the Slip Coefficient for
Coatings Used in Bolted Joints" approved by the Research Council on Structural
Connections of the Engineering Foundation,November 13, 1985 and endorsed by the
American Institute of Steel Construction and Industrial Fasteners Institute.
4. ASTM A 6: "Specification for General Requirements for Rolled Steel Plates, Shapes,
Sheet Piling, and Bars for Structural Use."
b. Welding Standards: The Contractor shall comply with applicable provisions ofAWS D1.1:
"Structural Welding Code--Steel."The Contractor shall present evidence that each welder has
satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for the welding processes involved and,
if pertinent, has undergone recertification.
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-137-1

95-137 Structural Steel Idaho Power
1.4. Storage and Handling
a. The Contractor shall store materials in a manner to permit easy access for inspection and
identification. The Contractor shall keep steel members off the ground by using pallets,
platforms, or other supports and protect steel members and packaged materials from erosion
and deterioration.
1. The Contractor shall store fasteners in a protected place and clean and lubricate bolts
and nuts, which become dry or rusty, before use.
2. The Contractor shall not store materials on a structure in a manner that might cause
distortion or damage to structural members or supporting structures. Repair or replace
damaged materials or structures as directed by the Owner.
3. Long pieces shall not be lifted in such a manner that the items are bent or deformed.
2. Products
2.1. Materials
Materials shall meet the following specifications:
a. Structural Steel Shapes, Plates, and Bars:ASTM A 36.
b. Steel Pipe:ASTM A 53, Type E or S, Grade B.
c. Structural Tubing:ASTM A 500 (Grade B) or A 501.
d. Unheaded Rods:ASTM A 36.
e. Anchor Bolts:ASTM A 307, Grade A, carbon-steel, hot-dip galvanized.
1. Hooked anchor bolts are not allowed.
f. High Strength Bolt, Nuts, and Washers:ASTM A 325
g. Standard Bolts,Nuts, and Washers:ASTM A 394, Type 0.
h. Finish: Hot-dip, zinc coating per ASTM A 123 and A 153, Class C.
1. "Double dipping" is not allowed.
i. Welding: Welding shall comply with the AWS D 1.1 code for procedures, appearance,
and quality of welds, as well as all proper methods and practices used in correcting
welding work.
Internal Use Only
95-137-2 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power 95-137 Structural Steel
2.2. Finish
Galvanized structures are preferred. Do not use powder coated structures unless directed by the
project engineer.
a. Galvanizing:All structural steel, unless otherwise specified, shall be hot dip galvanized
according to current requirements of the standard specification for zinc coating of steel
shapes,plates, and bars,ASTM-A 123. The fabricator will be responsible for
high-quality galvanizing.
1. Structures shall not be "double dipped."
2. Structures shall be fabricated to allow proper venting and drainage during galvanizing.
b. Powder Coating: When specified by the engineer, Powder coating shall conform to ASTM-
D3451.A three-coat powder coating process shall be used as follows:
1. The first coat is a zinc-rich primer.
2. The second is a chrome application.
3. The third is a clear coat finish.
c. Finish Repair.
• Galvanized structures: Use a zinc-rich paint, zinc solder or zinc metallizing to meet
ASTM A 780.
• Powder coated structures: Use matching color paint over a zinc-rich primer applied in
strict compliance with the manufacturer's instructions.
3. Execution
3.1. Erection
a. Before erection proceeds, the Contractor shall verify the elevations of the concrete
foundations and the locations of the anchor bolts.
b. The Contractor shall not set steel structures on new concrete until concrete has cured for(7)
days.
c. The Contractor shall provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during
erection to keep the structural steel secure,plumb, and in alignment so as to maintain
temporary construction loads equal to or less than the intensity of the design loads. The
Contractor shall remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel, connections,
and bracing are in place, unless otherwise directed. Do not remove temporary shoring until
cast-in-place concrete has attained its designed compressive strength.
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-137-3

95-137 Structural Steel Idaho Power
d. The Contractor shall set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated on
the drawings and according to AISC specifications referenced in this Section.
e. The Contractor shall maintain the erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC's "Code
of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."
f. The Contractor shall align and adjust the various members forming part of a complete frame
or structure before permanently fastening the members. The Contractor shall clean bearing
surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact before assembly.The Contractor
shall perform all necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and
alignment. The Contractor shall:
1. Level and plumb the individual members of the structure.
2. Establish required leveling and plumbing measurements on the mean operating
temperature of structure.
g. The Contractor shall maintain proper drainage of hollow sections. These sections shall not be
placed directly on concrete foundations. Steel sections that are not hollow may be placed
directly on concrete foundations if indicated by engineering drawings. Hollow sections that
have not been supplied with proper drainage shall be field modified as directed by the
project engineer.
h. Steel members shall be placed in such a manner as to avoid"ponding"—where water can
collect and cause rusting or other corrosion or damage due to freeze/thaw cycles.
i. The Contractor shall splice members only where indicated.
j. The Contractor shall remove erection bolts on welded, exposed structural steel; fill the holes
with plug welds; and grind them smooth at the exposed surfaces and repair finish according
to ASTMAA 780.
k. The Contractor shall finish sections thermally cut during erection equal to a sheared
appearance.
1. The Contractor shall not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or by using drift pins.
The Contractor shall ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts.
in. Beveled washers shall be used on sloping or beveled surfaces where required to provide a
proper fit.
Internal Use Only
95-137-4 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power 95-137 Structural Steel
3.2. Anchor Bolts
The Contractor shall:
a. Coordinate the installation of anchor bolts and other connectors required for securing
structural steel to "in-place"work.
b. Provide templates and other devices for presetting bolts and other anchors to their accurate
locations.
3.3. Bolted Connections
The Contractor shall:
a. Leave all connections loose until the structure is completely erected. The final tightening of
bolted connections shall be from the bottom to the top of the structure.
b. Install and tighten high-strength bolts according to the Research Council on Structural
Connections (RCSC) "Specification for Structural Joints Using High Strength Bolts" The
"turn-of-nut"method described below may be used.
c. Turn-of-Nut Method: Bolts shall first be brought to a"snug-tight"condition to ensure that the
parts being joined are brought into good contact with each other. "Snug-tight" is defined as
the tightness attained with a few impacts of an impact wrench or the full effort of an
ironworker using an ordinary spud wrench to bring the plies into firm contact. The nuts and
steel shall be marked in this position and the bolts systematically turned as shown in the
following table. During this operation there shall be no rotation of any parts not turned by the
wrench. Nut Rotation from snug-tight.
Table 95-1. Condition for turn-of-nut pretensioning*
Bolt Length Disposition of Outer Faces of Bolted Parts
Both faces normal to One face normal to bolt Both faces sloped not more
bolt axis axis,other sloped not more than 1:20 from normal to
than 1:20 bolt axis
Not more than 4db 1/3 turn 1/2 turn 2/3 turn
More than 4db but not 1/2 turn 2/3 turn 5/6 turn
more than 8db
More than 8db but not 2/3 turn 5/6 turn 1 turn
more than 12db
See RCSC"Specification for Structural Joints Using High Strength Bolts"Table 8.2 for complete information.
d. Washers are not required except as described in the Research Council on Structural
Connections (RCSC) "Specification for Structural Joints Using High Strength Bolts"
Section 6.1.
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-137-5

95-137 Structural Steel Idaho Power
3.4. Special Considerations for Connections to Hollow Structural
Sections (HSS)
a. Blind bolts may be used to make attachments to hollow structural shapes (HSS). Use
Lindapter"Hollo-boltsTM" or approved equal as specified by the engineer. Installation shall
be as required by the manufacturer's instructions.
b. Self-tapping crews may be used to make attachments to hollow structural shapes (HSS).
Use Buildex TeksTM self-drilling fastener or approved equal as specified by the engineer.
Installation shall be as required by the manufacturer's instructions.
3.5. Field Welded Connections
a. Field welded connections shall be permitted only where shown on the drawings or where
specifically authorized by the Owner.
b. Welding required for welded field splices, for the adjustment of steel structures, or for
miscellaneous additions shall be performed by a welder qualified per AWS D1.1, Structural
Welding Code-Steel, or AWS D 1.2, Structural Welding Code-Aluminum. The Owner may
require radiographic testing.
3.6. Cleaning
a. Galvanized Surfaces: The Contractor shall clean field welds,bolted connections,and abraded
areas and apply galvanizing repair paint according to ASTM A 780.
Internal Use Only
95-137-6 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power
CHAPTER
95-170 Basic Electrical Materials
and Methods 9517)
1. General
1.1. Summary
a. This section covers the requirements for the installation of the electrical materials specified
herein and as shown on the project drawings.
b. The Contractor shall provide all materials associated with the lighting, receptacle, and
heating or ventilating branch circuits in the control building. Unless noted otherwise, the
Owner will provide all other materials.Any materials specified herein are for informational
purposes. Refer to specification 95-175, Installation Of Owner-Furnished Products.
1.2. Submittals—N/A
1.3. Quality Assurance
a. UL Compliance: Materials manufactured within the scope of the Underwriters Laboratories
shall conform to UL Standards and have an applied UL listing mark.
2. Products
2.1. Outlet and Device Boxes
a. Sheet Steel: Use one-piece, drawn type, zinc or cadmium plated sheet steel.
b. Cast Metal:
1. Box: Use malleable iron.
2. Cover: Use gasketed,weatherproof, malleable iron with stainless steel screws.
3. Hubs: Use threaded hubs.
4. Lugs: Use cast mounting lugs.
5. Manufacturer: Use Crouse-Hinds, Type FS or FD,products or approved equal.
2.2. Junction and Pull Boxes
a. Outlet Boxes Used as Junction or Pull Boxes: Use boxes as specified under Article 3.1,
Outlet and Device Boxes.
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-170-1

95-170 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods Idaho Power
b. Large Sheet Steel Box: Use NEMA 250, Type 1 boxes.
66=
1. Box: Use code-gauge, galvanized steel.
2. Cover: Use full access, screw type covers.
3. Machine Screws: Use corrosion resistant screws.
c. Concrete Boxes: Use boxes as shown on the drawings.
2.3. Wiring Devices
a. AC Light Switches: Switches must meet the following parameters:
1. NEMA WD 1 and FS W-S-896E
2. Specification grade, totally enclosed, ac type, with quiet tumbler switches and screw
terminals
3. Capable of controlling 100 percent tungsten filament and fluorescent lamp loads
4. A single pole, 20 amp, 120/277 volts units
b. DC Light Switches: Switches must meet the following parameters:
1. NEMA WD 1 and FS W-S-896E
2. Specification grade, totally enclosed, ac type, with quiet tumbler switches and screw
terminals
3. Capable of controlling 100 percent tungsten filament and fluorescent lamp loads
4. Two-pole, 30 amp, 120/277 volts units, with brown handle
5. Manufacturer: Hubbell HBL3032 or approved equal
c. Receptacle, Duplex: Receptacles must meet the following parameters:
1. NEMA WD 1 and FS W-C-596
2. Specification grade, two-pole, three-wire grounding type with screw type wire
terminals suitable for No. 10 AWG wire
3. 125 volt,NEMA WD 1, Configuration 5-20R, 20 amp units.
d. Receptacle, Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter: Duplex, specification grade, tripping at 5mA.
1. Rating: 125 volts,NEMA WD 1, Configuration 5-20R,20 amps, capable of interrupting
5,000 amps without damage
Internal Use Only
95-170-2 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power 95-170 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
2.4. Device Plates
1
a. General: The use of sectional-type plates is not permitted.
b. Cast Metal:
1. Material: Use malleable ferrous metal with gaskets.
2. Screws: Use oval-head stainless steel screws.
c. Weatherproof:
1. For Receptacles: Use gasketed cast metal or stainless steel with individual caps over
each receptacle opening.
2. For Switches: Use gasketed, cast metal switches incorporating external operators to
operate the internal switches.
2.5. Nonfused Switch, Individual, 0 to 600 Volts
a. Use NEMA KS 1 switches.
b. Use quick-make, quick-break, motor rated, load-break, heavy-duty(HD)type switches with
external markings clearly indicating the ON and OFF positions.
c. Use switches suitable for use with 750C wire at the full NFPA 70, 75 °C rating.
d. Enclosure: Use NEMA 250, Type 1 or 3R as shown on the drawings.
2.6. Lighting and Power Distribution Panelboard (DC And AC)
a. Use NEMA PB 1,NFPA 70, an UL 67.
b. Panelboards and Circuit Breakers: Use units suitable for use with 750C wire at the full NFPA
70, 75°C ampacity rating.
c. Short-Circuit Current Equipment Rating: Fully rated
d. Rating:
1. AC Panelboard:Use panelboards rated at 22,000 amperes rms symmetrical and 120/240
VAC.
2. DC Panelboard: Use panelboards rated at 10,000 amperes DC and 125 VDC.
e. Cabinet:
1. Indoor: Use NEMA, type 1, general use cabinets.
2. Outdoor: Use NEMA, type 3R, rainproof cabinets.
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-170-3

95-170 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods Idaho Power
f. Bus Bar: Use copper bars, full sized throughout length.
1
g. Neutral: Use insulated neutrals, rated the same as the phase bus bars with at least one
terminal screw for each circuit.
h. Circuit Breakers: Use molded case, bolt-on, thermal-magnetic breakers, meeting NEMA AB
1 and UL 489 specifications.
2.7. Support and Framing Channels
a. Material: Use rolled, mild strip steel, 12-gauge,ASTM A570, Grade 33 as manufactured by
Unistrut.
b. Finish: Use rust-inhibiting acrylic channels painted for interior use or galvanized for exterior
use.
c. Inserts: Use continuous inserts.
d. Beam Clamps: Use gray cast iron clamps.
3. Execution
3.1. Outlet and Device Boxes
a. At each outlet or device in the wiring or raceway system, install boxes suitable for the
conditions encountered and sized to meet NFPA 70 requirements.
b. Size:
1. Depth: Provide a minimum depth of 2 inches,unless otherwise required by structural
conditions. Box extensions are not permitted.
2. Ceiling Outlet: Provide a minimum 4-inch octagonal sheet steel device box, unless
otherwise required for fixture installation.
3. Switch and Receptacle: Provide a minimum switch and receptacle box that is 2-inch by
4-inches.
c. Locations:
1. Unless specifically dimensioned, indicated locations are approximate.
2. To avoid interference with other equipment and structural features, relocate outlets
when directed to do so by the Owner.
3. Light Switch: Install light switches on the lock side of the door.
4. Light Fixture: Install light fixtures in a symmetrical pattern according to the room lay-
out unless otherwise shown.
Internal Use Only
95-170-4 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power 95-170 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
d. Mounting Height:
1
1. General:
a. Measure to centerline of box.
b. Where specified heights do not suit the building construction or finish,mount the
units as directed by the Owner.
2. Light Switch: Mount light switches 48 inches above the floor.
3. Thermostat: Mount thermostats 54 inches above the floor.
4. Wall-Mounted Telephone Outlet: Mount wall-mounted telephone outlets 52 inches
above the floor.
5. Telephone Outlet Box: Mount telephone outlet boxes 15 inches above the floor.
6. Convenience Receptacle: Mount convenience receptacles 15 inches above the floor.
e. Install all outlets and boxes level and plumb.
f. Support boxes independently from the conduit by attachment to the building structure or a
structural member.
g. Fasten boxes with wood screws on wood,bolts and expansion shields on concrete or brick,
toggle bolts on hollow masonry units, and machine screws threaded into steelwork.
h. Threaded studs, driven in by powder charge and provided with lock washers and nuts, are
acceptable in lieu of expansion shields.
i. Install separate junction boxes for flush or recessed lighting fixtures where required by the
fixture terminal temperature.
j. Open only those knockouts in sheet steel device boxes than are required and seal unused
openings.
k. Exterior Locations: Use cast metal.
1. Interior Locations:
1. Exposed Raceways: Use cast metal
2. Concealed Raceways: Use sheet steel
3. Lighting Circuits, Ceiling: Use sheet steel
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-170-5

95-170 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods Idaho Power
3.2. Junction and Pull Boxes
a. Install boxes where shown and where necessary to terminate, tap-off, or redirect multiple
conduit runs.
b. Install pull boxes where necessary in the raceway system to facilitate conductor installation.
c. Label each pull and junction box with the associated branch circuits or feeders contained
within the box.
d. Use outlet boxes as junction and pull boxes wherever possible and where allowed by the
applicable codes.
e. All boxes installed shall be accessible.
f. Do not install boxes on finished surfaces.
g. Install all boxes plumb and level.
h. Support the boxes independent from the conduit by attachment to the building structure or a
structural member.
i. Fasten the boxes with wood screws on wood, bolts and expansion shields on concrete or
brick, toggle bolts on hollow masonry units, and machine screws threaded into steelwork.
j. Threaded studs, driven in by powder charge and provided with lock washers and nuts, are
acceptable in lieu of expansion shields.
k. At or Below Grade: Install boxes for below grade conduit flush with finished grade.
1. Location/Type:
1. Indoor: Use NEMA 250, Type 1.
2. Outdoor: Use NEMA 250, Type 4.
3. Underground: Use concrete.
3.3. Telephone Outlet
a. Provide empty outlet boxes and cover plates meeting the requirements of the Telephone
Company.
3.4. Wiring Devices
a. Switches:
1. Install switches to operate in a vertical direction.
Internal Use Only
95-170-6 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power 95-170 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
2. Install single-pole, two-way switches such that the toggle is in the up position when the
switch is on.
b. Receptacles:
1. Install receptacles with the grounding slot down.
2. Ground receptacles to boxes with grounding wire only.
c. Weatherproof Switches and Receptacles:
1. Install weatherproof switches and receptacles in cast metal box.
2. Install them such that the hinge for protective cover is above the receptacle opening.
3.5. Device Plates
a. Securely fasten device plates to the wiring device and ensure a tight fit to the box.
b. Plates shall not extend beyond the sides of the box unless the plates have no sharp corners or
edges.
c. Install the plates with an alignment tolerance to box of 1/16 inch.
d. Types:
1. Interior: Use cast metal types.
2. Exterior: Use weatherproof types.
3.6. Lighting and Power Distribution Panelboard
a. Install panelboards securely, plumb, in-line and square with the walls.
b. Install the top of the cabinet 6 feet above the floor unless otherwise directed.
c. Label each circuit breaker with the equipment being fed(information is listed on the
panelboard wiring diagram)using a label maker with 3/4" yellow tape and black lettering.
3.7. Support and Channel Framing
a. Furnish rust inhibiting acrylic paint and paint any cut ends prior to their installation.
b. Install framing where required for mounting and supporting electrical equipment and
raceway systems
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-170-7

95-170 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods Idaho Power
Internal Use Only
95-170-8 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power
CHAPTER
95-171 Raceway and Cable Tray TD=11
1. General
1.1. Summary
a. The Contractor shall be responsible for installing all materials and accessories necessary for
the installation of a complete substation raceway and cable tray system.
b. The Contractor shall provide all the materials associated with the lighting, receptacle, and
heating/ventilating branch circuits in the control building. The Owner will provide all other
materials, unless otherwise noted. Materials specified herein are for informational purposes.
Refer to IPC Specification 95-175, Installation of Owner-Furnished Products.
1.2. Submittals—N/A
2. Products
2.1. Conduit
a. Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit(ERSC) shall be hot-dip galvanized with a chromated
protective layer. ERSC shall meet the requirements of ANSI C80.1 and UL6.All ERSC
conduit shall be schedule 40 unless otherwise specified. Threads shall be hot-dip galvanized
after cutting.
b. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) shall be hot-dip galvanized with a chromated and
lacquered protective layer. EMT shall meet the requirements of ANSI C80.3 and UL 797.
c. Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride(PVC) Conduit shall meet the requirements of NEMA TC2 and
UL 651. The conduit shall be UL listed for concrete encasement,underground direct burial,
concealed or direct sunlight exposure, and 90 degrees Celsius (°C) insulated conductors.
All PVC conduit shall be schedule 40 unless otherwise specified.
d. Flexible Metal, UV resistant, Liquid-Tight Conduit shall be UL 360 listed for 105°C
insulated conductors. The conduit shall be fabricated with galvanized steel and an extruded
PVC jacket.
e. Flexible Metal,Nonliquid-Tight Conduit shall be fabricated with galvanized steel meeting
the requirements of UL 1.
2.2. Fittings
a. Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit(ERSC):
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-171-1

95-171 Raceway and Cable Tray Idaho Power
1. General:
a. The conduit fittings must meet the requirements of UL 514 B.
b. Type: Use threaded, galvanized steel conduit.
2. Bushings:
a. Use insulated metallic,bonding bushings approved for the purpose.
Bushings shall be of malleable iron/steel construction adequately protected
against corrosion, assembled with an insulator listed or certified for 150°C/302
degrees Fahrenheit(°F) application and flammability rating of 940V-0 with
insulator positively secured in place.
3. Grounding Bushing:
a. Use insulated metallic grounding bushings approved for the purpose.
Grounding bushings shall be of malleable iron/steel construction adequately
protected against corrosion, assembled with an insulator listed or certified for
150°C/302°F application and flammability rating of 940V-0 with insulator
positively secured in place.
4. Conduit Hub:
a. Hubs shall be of malleable iron/steel construction, electro-zinc plated and
equipped with a nylon insulated throat and oil-resistant/moisture-resistant
sealing ring. Female taper hub threads shall be adequately relieved to prevent
bottoming of conduit.
5. Conduit Bodies:
a. Use malleable iron conduit bodies, sized as required by the National Fire
Protection Association (NFPA) 70.
6. Couplings: Use the couplings supplied by the conduit manufacturer.
7. Expansion Fittings:
a. For Deflection/Expansion Movement use Type XD fittings.
b. For Expansion Movement Only use Type XJ fittings.
b. Cable Sealing Fittings:
1. Use cable sealing fittings to form watertight, nonslip, cord or cable connection with
the conduit.
Internal Use Only
95-171-2 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power 95-171 Raceway and Cable Tray
2. For conductors with an OD of 1/z-inch or less use a neoprene bushing at the
connector entry.
c. Electrical Metallic Tubing:
1. The fittings must meet the requirements of UL 514B.
2. Type: Use steel body fittings and locknuts with steel or malleable iron
compression nuts.
3. Compression Ring: Use stainless steel fittings.
4. Connector and Coupling Manufacturer: Use compression type fittings rated
appropriately for the type of installation; i.e., water tight or concrete tight, etc.
d. PVC Conduit: Use PVC, slip-on fittings, meeting the requirements of NEMA TC-3.
e. Flexible Metal, Liquid-Tight Conduit:
1. Use metal insulated throat connectors with integral nylon or plastic bushings rated
for 105°C/302°F.
2. Use insulated throat and sealing O-rings.
3. Use a long design type that extends outside of box or other device at least 2 inches.
f. Flexible Metal,Nonliquid-Tight Conduit:
1. Use fittings that meet the requirements of UL 514 B.
2. Body: Use Galvanized Steel bodies.
3. Throat: Use Nylon insulated throats.
4. 1-1/4-inch conduit and smaller: Use a one screw body.
5. 1-1/2-inch conduit and larger: Use a two-screw body.
2.3. Surface/Cable Trench
a. All surface/cable trench shall be rated for H2O traffic loading and shall be either pre-cast
concrete or high-density polymer concrete (HDPC).
b. Precast concrete trench shall comply with the requirements of specification 95-126
Precast Concrete.
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-171-3

95-171 Raceway and Cable Tray Idaho Power
c. High-density polymer concrete (HDPC) trench shall comply with the
following requirements:
1. Express Trough material shall consist of high-density polymer concrete (HDPC) or
aggregates bound together with polyester resin and/or reinforced with continuous
woven glass strands for glass fiber. Precast concrete shall be fire resistant and
electrically nonconductive.
2. The precast HDPC concrete mix shall have the following certified,
tested characteristics:
a. Compressive strength: 17,000 psi minimum
b. Tensile strength: 1,800 psi minimum
C. Modulus of rupture: 6,500 psi minimum
d. Modulus of elasticity: 1.83 x 106 psi minimum
e. Freeze/thaw resistance (2,500 cycles): No change
f. Fire resistance (maximum): 10 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84; or
maximum burning rate of 0.3 inches per minute for each 0.1 inch of thickness
when tested in accordance with ASTM D635
g. Shear: 6,000 psi minimum
3. Covers shall be provided with appropriate lifting devices for easy removal during cable
installation and maintenance. Covers shall be designed to withstand AASHTO H2O
traffic loading on a regular basis without permanent deformation or sagging.
Covers shall have recessed areas to house the security bolt heads. Each recessed area
shall have a diameter that is large enough to accommodate the socket for the bolt heads.
2.4. Cable Riser
a. Cable risers for control buildings and metalclad switchgear shall be constructed from sheet
steel as indicated on the drawings.
b. The cable riser shall be constructed in compliance with drawings provided by IPC Stations
Design. The finished riser shall be free of sharp edges,burrs or other deformations that could
cause injury.
c. The fabricated product shall be powder coated as follows:
1. Properly prepare the riser by either washing or media blasting to remove all rust, dirt,
grease, or other contamination.
2. Use a zinc primer base coat.
Internal Use Only
95-171-4 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power 95-171 Raceway and Cable Tray
3. Provide a powder coating thickness of 3.0 mil minimum. The color shall be ANSI 61
Light Gray.
1
4. Any scratches or penetrations caused during installation shall be"touched up"using the
product and instructions provided by the manufacturer of the original coating.
d. The specified handles and latches shall be securely attached to the steel after the riser is
powder coated. The finished product shall fit together snugly.
e. Attach the finished riser to the control building using epoxy type anchors and make sure that
all holes are filled or sealed to prevent moisture.
2.5. W i reways
a. Wireways must meet the requirements of UL 870.
b. Type: Use steel-enclosed wireways with removable, screw type covers.
c. Rating: Use indoor or outdoor rated wireways as required.
d. Finish: The finish shall be gray, baked enamel.
2.6. Cable Trays
a. Cable trays must meet the requirements of NEMA VE 1.
b. Type: Use a ladder type,with welded construction.
c. Material: Use a copper-free aluminum alloy 6063-T6 finish.
d. Dimensions: Use the dimensions shown on the drawings.
e. Use fittings of the same cross-sectional tray area and with hardware of the same material as
the cable tray.
f. Tray Grounding must conform to NFPA 70 and NEMA VE 1.
g. Expansion Joints: Use NEMA VE 1 for 25°F maximum temperature variation.
h. The cable tray shall have no sharp edges,burrs, or weld projections.
2.7. Manholes and Handholes
a. Manholes and handholes shall be as shown on the drawings and as listed in the Bill
of Materials.
b. Cable Racks:
1. Arms and Insulators must be adjustable and of sufficient number to accommodate the
cables for each raceway entering or leaving the manhole, including spares.
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-171-5

95-171 Raceway and Cable Tray Idaho Power
2. Wall Attachment:
a. Use adjustable inserts in concrete walls. Bolts or embedded studs are
not permitted.
b. Insert Spacing:Use a maximum 3-foot on center spacing around the entire inside
perimeter of manhole.
C. Arrange the cable racks so that the spare raceway ends are clear for future
cable installation.
2.8. Miscellaneous
a. Auxiliary Gutters must meet the requirements of Article 374 of the NEC.
b. Cable Trenches are installed as shown on the drawings.
c. Duct Bank Spacers:
1. Type: Use non-metallic, interlocking, spacers for multiple conduit sizes.
2. Use spacers suitable for all types of conduit.
d. Raceway Coating:
1. Material: Use bitumastic or plastic tape coatings.
e. Wraparound Duct Band:
1. Material: Use heat-shrinkable, cross-linked polyolefin wraparound duct bands,
precoated with hot melt adhesive.
3. Execution
3.1. General
a. All raceways shall be installed in a neat and orderly manner and shall comply with the NEC.
b. All material and equipment shall be stored appropriately to protect it from the deteriorating
effects of the elements. Touch-up paint shall be provided as required.
c. Crushed or deformed raceways are not permitted.
d. Maintain the raceway entirely free of obstructions and moisture.
e. Immediately after installation, plug or cap the raceway ends with watertight and dust-tight
seals until the time for pulling the conductors.
f. Avoid moisture traps where possible.When moisture is unavoidable in exposed conduit runs,
provide a junction box and a drain fitting at the conduit low point.
Internal Use Only
95-171-6 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power 95-171 Raceway and Cable Tray
g. The conduit runs shall follow the route identified on the drawings.
1
h. Underground runs shall be routed as direct as possible,using the least number of bends as is
practical. In no case shall conduits have greater than 360 degrees of bend. Contact the Owner
if a conflict arises with any given underground conduit route.
i. Group raceways installed in same area.
j. Follow structural surface contours when installing exposed raceways. Avoid
obstructing passageways.
k. Run exposed raceways parallel or perpendicular to the walls, structural members,
or intersections of vertical planes.
1. Install watertight fittings in outdoor, underground, or wet locations.
m. Install concrete tight fittings for conduit encased in concrete or flowable fill.
n. Paint the threads with zinc-rich paint or liquid galvanizing com-pound, before the assembly
of the fittings for galvanized conduit that is installed in exposed or damp locations.
o. All metal conduits must be reamed, with burrs removed, and cleaned before the installation
of conductors, wire, or cable.
p. Do not install conduit in concrete equipment pads or foundations,unless noted on drawings.
q. Install concealed and buried raceways so that they emerge at right angles to the surface and
have no curved portion exposed.
r. Conduit, conduit fittings, and conduit boxes that will be embedded in concrete shall be held
securely in position with non-metallic supports while the concrete is being placed.
3.2. Conduit Application
a. Diameter:
I. Light and Receptacle Circuits Inside Control Building: Use a minimum 1/2-inch conduit.
2. All Other Circuits: Use a minimum 1-inch conduit.
b. Exterior Exposed: Use rigid galvanized steel, electric metallic tubing, or PVC schedule
40 conduit.
c. Interior Exposed in Control Building: Use electric metallic tubing.
d. Interior Concealed(Not Embedded in Concrete): Use electric metallic tubing.
e. Aboveground, Embedded in Concrete: Use PVC schedule 40.
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-171-7

95-171 Raceway and Cable Tray Idaho Power
f. Direct Earth Burial (non-traffic areas): Use PVC schedule 40.
1
g. Concrete-Encased Raceways: Use PVC schedule 40.
h. Under Slabs-On-Grade: Use PVC schedule 40.
3.3. Connections
a. For motors, transformers, and other equipment where flexible connection is required to
minimize vibration use flexible metal, liquid-tight conduit.
b. Lighting Fixtures in Dry Areas: Use flexible metal, nonliquid-tight conduit.
c. Outdoor Areas Exposed to Moisture: Use flexible metal, liquid-tight conduit.
d. Transition from Underground to Exposed: Use PVC Schedule 40 conduit.
e. Transition from Concrete Encased or Through Concrete Slab: Use rigid galvanized
steel conduit.
f. Under Equipment Mounting Pads: Use rigid galvanized steel conduit.
g. Exterior Light Pole Foundations: Use PVC Schedule 40 conduit.
3.4. Penetrations
a. Make penetrations at right angles,unless otherwise shown.
b. Notching or penetration of structural members, including footings and beams,
is not permitted.
c. Apply a single layer of wraparound duct band to all metallic conduits protruding through
concrete slabs to a point 2 inches above and 2 inches below the concrete surface.
d. Concrete Walls and Floors: Provide a non-shrink grout dry-pack, or use a water-tight
seal device.
e. Entering Structures:
1. General: Seal the raceway at the first box or outlet with oakum or expandable plastic
compound to prevent the entrance of gases, liquids, or pests from one area to another.
2. Heating,Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Equipment:
a. Penetrate the equipment in the area established by the manufacturer.
b. Terminate the conduit with flexible metal conduit at the junction box or conduit
attached to exterior surface of the equipment prior to penetrating into
the equipment.
Internal Use Only
95-171-8 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power 95-171 Raceway and Cable Tray
3. Non-waterproofed Wall or Floor:
1
a. Provide a schedule 40, galvanized pipe sleeve or a watertight entrance
seal device.
b. Fill the space between the raceway and sleeve with an expandable plastic
compound or use oakum and lead joint on each side.
4. Handholes and Manholes:
a. Metallic Raceways: Provide insulated grounding bushings.
b. Nonmetallic Raceways: Provide bell ends flush with wall.
C. Install handholes and manholes such that the raceways enter as near as possible
to one end of the wall,unless otherwise shown.
3.5. Support
a. Support conduit from structural members only, at intervals not exceeding NFPA 70 (NEC)
requirements and, in any case, not exceeding 8 feet. Do not support the conduit from piping
or other raceways.
b. Multiple Adjacent Raceways: Provide a ceiling trapeze consisting of/2-inch all-thread bolts
and Unistrut.
c. Provide and attach wall brackets, strap hangers, or the ceiling trapeze as follows:
1. Wood: Use wood screws.
2. Hollow Masonry Units: Use toggle bolts or masonry anchors.
3. Concrete:Use expansion anchors,epoxy anchors,or threaded studs driven in by powder
charge with lock washers and nuts. Epoxy anchors are required for applications that are
exposed to weather.All holes must be completely filled or sealed to prevent moisture.
4. Steelwork: Use machine screws.
5. Hardware Type: Use galvanized hardware.
d. Inserting nails or wooden plugs into concrete or masonry for attaching raceways is not
permitted. Do not weld raceways or pipe straps to steel structures. Do not use wire in lieu of
straps or hangers.
3.6. Bends
a. A run of conduit, embedded or exposed, shall not contain more than the equivalent of four
quarter-bends (360 degrees total)between pull points, e.g., conduit bodies and boxes. Pull
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-171-9

95-171 Raceway and Cable Tray Idaho Power
boxes shall be installed, if required, to limit any run of conduit to four quarter bends
(360 degrees total).
b. Make all bends and offsets of the longest practical radius.
c. Install the bends with symmetrical bends or cast metal fittings.
d. Avoid field-made bends and offsets,but where necessary, make field-made bends with an
acceptable hickey or bending machine. Do not heat metal raceways to facilitate bending.
e. Make bends in parallel or banked runs from same center or centerline with same radius so
that bends are parallel.
f. Factory elbows may be installed in parallel or banked raceways if there is change in plane of
run, and raceways are same size.
g. PVC Conduit:
1. Bends less than 45 degrees: Provide factory-made elbows.
2. Use manufacturer's recommended method for forming smaller bends.
3. All bends 45 degrees or greater, including riser elbows: Provide RGS elbows.
h. Flexible Conduit: Do not make bends that exceed allowable bending radius of cable to be
installed or that significantly restricts conduit flexibility.
3.7. Expansion/Deflection Fittings
a. Provide on all raceways at all structural expansion joints, and in long tangential runs.
b. Provide expansion/deflection joints for 50T maximum temperature variation.
c. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.8. PVC Conduit
a. Solvent Welding:
1. Provide manufacturer recommended solvent; apply to all joints.
2. Install such that joint is watertight.
b. Adapters:
1. PVC to Metallic Fittings: PVC terminal type.
2. PVC to Rigid Metal Conduit: PVC female adapter.
Internal Use Only
95-171-10 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power 95-171 Raceway and Cable Tray
c. Belled-End Conduit: Bevel the unbelled end of the joint prior to joining.
1
3.9. Wireways
a. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
b. Locate with cover on accessible vertical face of wireway,unless otherwise shown.
3.10. Cable Trays
a. Install in accordance with Application Information Section of NEMA VE 1.
b. Install such that joints are not made at support brackets.
c. Install horizontal section support brackets between support point and quarter point of
tray span.
d. Provide ceiling trapeze for all horizontal tray. Ceiling trapeze shall consist of 1/2-inch
all-thread bolts and Unistrut framing.
e. Install support within 2 feet on each side of expansion joints and within 2 feet of
fitting extremity.
f. Install horizontal tray level,plumb, straight, and true to line or grade within a tolerance of
1/8-inch in 10 feet and within a cumulative maximum of%2-inch.
g. Install vertical tray plumb within a tolerance of 1/8-inch in 10 feet.
h. Install without exposed raw edges.
i. Provide grounding as specified in specification 95-179, Station Grounding.
3.11. Termination at Enclosures
a. Cast Metal Enclosure: Provide manufacturer's pre-molded insulating sleeve inside metallic
conduit terminating in threaded hubs.
b. Sheet Metal Boxes, Cabinets, and Enclosures:
1. Rigid Galvanized Conduit:
a. Provide one lock nut each on inside and outside of enclosure.
b. Install insulated bushing on ends of conduit where grounding is not required.
C. Provide insulated throat when conduit terminates in sheet metal boxes having
threaded hubs.
d. Sealing locknuts to be used on outside of NEMA 3R and NEMA 12 enclosures.
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-171-11

95-171 Raceway and Cable Tray Idaho Power
2. Electric Metallic Tubing: Provide gland(rain tight) compression, insulated connectors.
1
3. Flexible Metal Conduit: Provide two screw type, insulated, malleable iron connectors.
4. PVC Schedule 40 Conduit: Provide PVC terminal adapter with lock nut.
3.12. Underground Raceways
a. Install the conduit(s)below the station ground grid with a minimum of I inch of sand
between cables or conduits both vertically and horizontally and as shown on the drawings.
If not specified on the drawings, low voltage power and control cable raceways shall be
buried a minimum of 24 inches, medium voltage power cable raceways shall be installed a
minimum of 42 inches and concrete encased raceways shall be installed a minimum depth of
30 inches.
b. Conduit trench bottom shall be smooth and filled with 3 inches of sand to provide bedding for
the raceways.
c. The first 3 inches of backfill above the pipe zone shall be sand or soil free of materials that
would damage or be corrosive to the conduit.
d. "Warning"Tape Installation: Install approximately 18 inches above underground or concrete-
encased raceways.Align parallel to, and within 12 inches of, centerline of runs.
e. Grade: Maintain minimum grade of 3 inches in 100 feet, either from one man-hole,handhole,
or pullbox to the next, or from a high point between them, depending on surface contour.
£ Make routing changes as necessary to avoid obstructions or conflicts.
g. Couplings: In multiple conduit runs, stagger so that couplings in adjacent runs are not in
same transverse line.
h. Spacers:
I. Provide preformed, non-metallic spacers, designed for such purpose, to secure and
separate parallel conduit runs in a trench or concrete encasement.
2. Install at intervals not greater than that specified in NFPA 70 for support of the type
conduit used,but in no case greater than 10 feet.
i. Support conduit so as to prevent bending or displacement during backfilling or
concrete placement.
j. Installation with Other Piping Systems:
I. Crossings: Maintain minimum 12-inch vertical separation.
2. Parallel Runs: Maintain minimum 12-inch separation.
Internal Use Only
95-171-12 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power 95-171 Raceway and Cable Tray
k. Metallic Raceway Coating:Apply wherever rigid galvanized steel race-ways are installed
underground.Along entire length, coat with raceway coating or apply tape with one-half tape
width overlap to obtain two complete layers.
1. Concrete Encasement:As specified in specification 95-125, Cast-In-Place Concrete.
in. Trenching and Backfill:
1. As specified in specification 95-116, Substation Earthwork.
2. Do not backfill until inspected by the Owner.
3.13. Manholes and Handholes
a. Install manholes and handholes where shown on the drawings. Provide excavation, shoring,
bracing,backfilling, and grading as required.
b. Do not install until final raceway grading has been determined.
c. Install such that raceways enter at nearly right angles and as near as possible to one end of
wall, unless otherwise shown.
d. Grounding:As shown on the drawings and as specified in specification 95-179,
Station Grounding.
3.14. Cable Trenches
a. Install cable trenches where shown on the drawings. Provide excavation,bracing,backfilling,
and grading as required.
b. Trench bottom shall be smooth and filled with 3 inches of sand to provide bedding for
the cables.
c. Grounding:As shown on the drawings and as specified in specification 95-179,
Station Grounding. Use diamond tipped bit to field drill holes for grounding as required.
d. Over excavate and compact structural fill below and beside the trench as directed in
manufacturer's installation instructions.
e. Where designated roadways cross trench, the top of the road must be level with the top of
the trench.
3.15. Empty Raceways
a. Conduit shall be proofed and cleaned prior to installation.
b. Provide permanent, removable cap over each end.
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-171-13

95-171 Raceway and Cable Tray Idaho Power
c. Provide PVC plug with pull-tab for underground raceways with end bells.
1
d. Provide nylon pull cord.
3.16. Protection of Installed Work
a. Protect products from effects of moisture, corrosion, and physical damage
during construction.
b. Provide and maintain manufactured watertight and dust-tight seals over all conduit openings
during construction.
c. Touch up painted conduit threads after assembly to cover nicks or scars.
Internal Use Only
95-171-14 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power
CHAPTER
95-172 Conductors and Cables TDMIM
1. General
1.1. Summary
a. This Section covers wires and cables and associated connectors, splices, and terminations for
all wiring systems.
b. Work shall include the placement of cable in cable tray and conduit systems, splicing where
necessary,terminating conductors, labeling, coiling and taping spare conductors, cable tying,
and testing.
c. The Contractor shall provide all conductors, accessories, and materials associated with
lighting, receptacle, and heating/ventilating branch circuits in the control building. The
Owner will provide all other conductors, accessories, and materials, unless specified
otherwise. Refer to specification 95-175, Installation Of Owner-Furnished Products.
d. Conductors typically used by the Owner are specified herein. Refer to the Bill of Materials
for a complete listing of the conductor types and accessories.
1.2. Submittals
a. The Contractor shall prepare a written report of the maximum pulling tension data for each
pull for submission to the Owner, including the cable reel numbers associated with each pull,
the cable manufacturer information, and the cable manufacturing date with the written report.
1.3. Quality Assurance
a. Materials manufactured within the scope of the Underwriters Laboratories shall conforin to
UL Standards and have an applied UL listing mark, and
b. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.4. Coordination
a. Coordinate the layout and installation of cables with other installations.
b. Revise locations and elevations from those indicated, as required to suit field conditions and
as approved by the Owner.
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-172-1

95-172 Conductors and Cables Idaho Power
1.5. Electrical Testing
a. Unless specified otherwise, the Contractor shall be responsible for all visual and mechanical
inspections of the conductors and cables. The Owner will perform all insulation resistance
tests.
2. Products
2.1. Conductors 600 Volts and Below
a. Control Building Branch Circuit Wire:
1. Standards: Conform to applicable requirements of NEMA WC 3, WC 5, and WC 7.
2. Conductor Material: Copper.
3. Stranding: Solid conductor for No. 10 AWG and smaller and stranded conductor for
larger than No. 10 AWG.
4. Insulation: Type THHN (dry locations)/THWN (wet locations).
5. Minimum Size: No. 14 AWG.
6. Application: Control building lighting and receptacle wiring.
b. Control Panel and Switchboard Wire:
1. Type: XHHW/SIS.
2. Insulation: Flame-retardant ethylene propylene rubber(FR-EPR),UL listed VW-1, 600-
volt.
3. Operating Temperature: 90°C dry, 75 °C wet
4. Conductor: Tinned annealed copper per ASTM B33
5. Stranding: 41 strand, Class K per ASTM B 174
6. Insulation: Insulation shall be free stripping either inherently by conductor
manufacturing process or by providing paper separator tape.
7. Application:Wiring for control panels, switchboards and control apparatus,in conduits,
and in wet or dry locations.
c. Substation AC and DC Local Service Cable:
1. Type: USE-2 or RHW-2 or RHH,VW-1.
2. Insulation: Cross-linked polyethylene, thermosetting XLPE or EPR/thermoset CPE
Internal Use Only
95-172-2 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power 95-172 Conductors and Cables
3. Operating Temperature: 90 °C wet or dry
1
4. Conductor:Annealed, coated copper
5. Stranding: Class B per ASTM B8
6. Application:
a. AC and DC local service main, feeder, and branch circuits
b. Where sunlight resistance is required for connection to local service transformers
C. Direct burial installations or surface trench and conduit systems.
2.2. Conductors Above 600 Volts
a. Station Triplexed 15-kV Getaway Cables:
1. Type: 3-1/C 15-kV shielded cables with concentric neutral and PVC jacket, triplexed
into a 3-conductor assembly. The cable shall be UL listed as Type W-90 or MV-105 in
accordance with UL 1072. The cable shall be suitable for use in wet and dry locations,
in conduit, underground duct systems, direct buried and aerial installations.
2. Conductors: Compact, concentric-lay, Class B round, stranded copper in accordance
with ASTM B8.
3. Size: 750 kcmil CU with one-sixth rated concentric neutral.
4. Strand Screen: Extruded semi-conducting ethylene-propylene rubber(EPR) or black-
colored, non-conducting thermoset material in accordance with ICEA S-68-516.
5. Insulation: Extruded, ethylene-propylene rubber(EPR) in accordance with NEMA
WC8 and AEIC CS6.
6. Insulation Thickness: 100 percent insulation level, 175-mil, 15-kV nominal.
7. Insulation Shielding: Black, semi-conducting, nonmetallic material extruded directly
over the insulation in accordance with ICEA S-68-516 and AEIC CS6.
8. Metallic Shield(Concentric Neutral): 20412 AWG copper wires concentrically
applied.
9. Jacket: Extruded, black linear, low-density polyethylene (PE)material in accordance
with ICEA S-68-516 applied over the cable assembly. The jacket shall be marked with
three red stripes spaced 120 degrees apart in accordance with ICEA S-68.
10. Operating Temperature: 90°C continuous normal operations, 130 °C emergency
operating conditions, and 250 °C short-circuit conditions
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-172-3

95-172 Conductors and Cables Idaho Power
b. Station Triplexed 15-kV Getaway Cables (Reduced Diameter):
1. Type: Reduced diameter 3-1/C 15-kV shielded cables with concentric neutral and PVC
jacket, triplexed into a 3-conductor assembly. The cable shall be UL listed as Type MV
90 or MV 105 in accordance with UL 1072. The cable shall be suitable for use in wet
and dry locations, in conduit, underground duct systems, direct burial and aerial
installations.
2. Conductors: Compressed, concentric-lay, Class B round stranded copper in accordance
with ASTM B8.
3. Size: 750 kcmil CU with one-sixth rated concentric neutral.
4. Strand Screen: Extruded semi-conducting ethylene-propylene rubber(EPR) or black-
colored, non-conducting thermoset material in accordance with ICEA S-68-516.
5. Insulation: Extruded ethylene-propylene rubber(EPR)in accordance with NEMA WC
and AEIC CS6.
6. Insulation Thickness: 100 percent insulation level, 175-mil, 15-kV nominal.
7. Insulation Shielding: Black semi-conducting nonmetallic material extruded directly
over the insulation in accordance with ICEA S-68-516 and AEIC CS6.
8. Metallic Shield(Concentric Neutral): Fourteen concentrically applied 0.250" by 0.030"
copper flat straps or thirty concentrically applied 0.108" by 0.030" copper flat straps.
9. Jacket: Extruded black linear low-density polyethylene (PE)material in accordance
with ICEA S-68-516 applied over the cable assembly. The jacket shall be marked with
three red stripes spaced 120'apart in accordance with ICEA S-68.
10. Operating Temperature: 90°C continuous normal operations, 130 °C emergency
operating conditions, and 250 °C short-circuit conditions
11. Triplex Assembly: Equivalent outside diameter of the triplex cable shall be 3.50" or less
for installation in 4" conduit.
2.3. 600-Volt Rated Cable
a. Multi-conductor Interconnection Cable:
1. Assembly: Multiple 600-volt conductors cabled in accordance with UL 1277 using
fillers, as required, with a cable binder tape overall. The cable assembly shall be free
stripping and passes the ICEA T 29-520 210,000 Btu/hr Vertical Tray Flame Test.
2. Typical Assemblies:
a. Two conductor cables: 2C#12 and 2C#10
Internal Use Only
95-172-4 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power 95-172 Conductors and Cables
b. Four conductor cables: 4C#12, and 4C #10
1
c. Seven conductor cables: 7C#12
3. Type: TC, meeting requirements of UL 1277
4. Insulation: Flame-retardant ethylene-propylene rubber(FREP) or flame-retardant cross-
linked polyethylene (FRXLPE), UL rated VW-1
5. Temperature Rating: 90 °C dry locations, 75'C wet locations
6. Conductor: Coated copper
7. Stranding: Class B stranded per ASTM B8
8. Jacket: Vulcanized chlorosulfonated polyethylene (CSPE) or thermoset chlorinated
polyethylene (CPE). Thermoplastic CPE is not permitted. The jacket shall be free
stripping.
9. Color Code: ICEA Method 1, Sequence E-1
10. Application: Interconnection between apparatus control cabinets and between control
panels. Suitable for installation in open air(sunlight resistant), cable trays, conduit,
cable trenches, or direct earth burial
b. Multi-conductor Shielded Yard Cable:
1. Assembly: Multiple 600-volt conductors cabled in accordance with UL 1277 using
fillers, as required, with 5 mil helically applied copper tape shield with 25% overlap.
The cable assembly shall be free stripping and pass the ICEA T 29-520 210,000 Btu/hr
Vertical Tray Flame Test.
2. Typical Assemblies:
a. Two conductor cables: 2C#10, 2C#8, 2C#6
b. Four conductor cables: 4C#10, 4C#8, 4C#6
C. Seven conductor cables: 7C#12.
d. Twelve conductor cables: 12C#10
3. Type: TC, meeting the requirements of UL 1277.
4. Insulation: Flame-retardant ethylene-propylene rubber(FREP) or flame-retardant cross-
linked polyethylene (FRXLPE), UL rated VW-1: XHHW-2
5. Temperature Rating: 90 °C in dry locations and 75 °C in wet locations
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-172-5

95-172 Conductors and Cables Idaho Power
6. Conductor: Coated copper
1
7. Stranding: Class B stranded per ASTM B8
8. Cable Shield: 5 mil copper tape, helically applied(spiral)with 25% overlap.
9. Jacket: Vulcanized chlorosulfonated polyethylene (CSPE) or thermoset chlorinated
polyethylene (CPE). Thermoplastic CPE is not permitted. The jacket shall be
free stripping.
10. Color Code: ICEA Method 1, Sequence E-1
l l. Application: Connection between substation apparatus and equipment located within
the Control Building and SCADA interconnection circuits and suitable for installation
in open air(sunlight resistant), cable trays, conduit, cable trenches, or direct earth
burial.
2.4. 300-Volt Rated Cable
a. Twisted Shielded Pair or Triad Instrumentation Cable:
1. Assembly: Single pair or triad of 300-volt conductors with overall aluminum-polyester
foil shield and tinned copper drain wire. Insulated conductors are twisted into a pair or
triad. The cable shall be suitable for installation in open air, in cable trays (passes the
vertical tray flame test), or conduit.
2. Size:
a. Pairs: IPR#18.
b. Triads: 1 TR#18, 1 TR#16
3. Type: PLTC, meeting requirements of UL 13.
4. Insulation: Flame-retardant PVC (15 mils).
5. Temperature Rating: 105 °C.
6. Conductor Identification: Pigmented black and white in pairs and black, red and white
in triads.
7. Conductor: 7-strand bare soft annealed copper.
8. Stranding: Class B stranded per ASTM B8.
9. Cable Shield: 1.35 mil aluminum-polyester foil providing 100 percent coverage and 7-
strand tinned copper drain wire. The drain wire shall be sized two sizes smaller than the
conductor.
Internal Use Only
95-172-6 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power 95-172 Conductors and Cables
10. Jacket: Black, flame retardant, sunlight- and oil-resistant PVC. The jacket shall be
permanently and legibly marked with the manufacturer's name, maximum working
voltage for which the cable was tested, the type of cable, and a UL listing mark.A
ripcord shall be laid longitudinally under the jacket to facilitate removal.
11. Application: SCADA instrumentation cable.
b. Multiple-Twisted Shielded Pairs with a Common, Overall Shield Instrumentation Cable.
1. Assembly: Multiple shielded pairs of 300-volt conductors with an overall aluminum-
polyester foil shield and tinned copper drain wires. Insulated conductors are twisted into
pairs. The cable shall be suitable for installation in the open air, in cable trays (passes
vertical tray flame test), or conduit.
2. Sizes:
a. Two Pair: 2PR#18.
b. Four Pair: 4PR#18.
3. Type: PLTC, meeting requirements of UL 13.
4. Insulation: 15 mil flame-retardant PVC
5. Temperature Rating: 105 'C.
6. Conductor Identification: Pigmented black and white with the white conductor
numerically printed for group identification
7. Conductor: 7-strand bare, soft-annealed copper.
8. Stranding: Class B stranded per ASTM B8.
9. Group Shield: 1.35 mil aluminum-polyester foil providing 100 percent coverage and a
7-strand tinned copper drain wire. The drain wire shall be sized two sizes smaller than
the conductor.All group shields are completely isolated from each other.
10. Cable Shield: 2.35 mil aluminum-polyester foil providing 100 percent coverage and 7-
strand tinned copper drain wire. The drain wire shall be the same size as the conductor.
11. Jacket: Black, flame retardant, sunlight- and oil-resistant PVC. The jacket shall be
permanently and legibly marked with the manufacturer's name, maximum working
voltage for which cable was tested, the type of cable, and a UL listing mark.A ripcord
shall be laid longitudinally under the jacket to facilitate removal.
12. Application: SCADA instrumentation cable.
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-172-7

95-172 Conductors and Cables Idaho Power
2.5. Grounding Conductors
a. Equipment: Stranded copper with green, Type THHN/THWN insulation.
b. Direct Buried(Substation Ground Grid): See specification 95-179, Station Grounding.
2.6. Accessories for Conductors 600 Volts and Below
a. Tape:
1. General Purpose,Flame-Retardant Tape: 7-mil,vinyl plastic, Scotch Brand 33,rated for
90°C minimum, meeting requirements of UL 510
2. Flame Retardant, Cold and Weather Resistant Tape: 8.5 mil,vinyl plastic, Scotch Brand
88.
3. Arc and Fireproofing:
a. 30-mil, elastomer
b. Manufacturers and Products:
3M No. 7700 with 3M No. 27 glass cloth tape binder.
b. Identification Devices:
1. Marker Plate: 0.75" X 1.25" rectangular plastic identification tag with cable number in
black lettering. Thomas & Betts TC223-TB or equivalent.
c. Connectors and Terminations:
1. Nylon, self-insulated crimp connectors
2. Self-insulated, free spring wire connector(wire nuts)
a. UL Standard 486C
b. Plated steel, square wire springs
3. Self-insulated, setscrew wire connector
a. Two-piece compression type with setscrew in a brass barrel.
b. Insulated with an insulator cap screwed over brass barrel.
4. Shield ground connector
a. "Flag style" copper foil splice to#10 AWG ground conductor.
b. T E Connectivity(Tyco Electronics) Termi-foil terminal#329254 or equivalent.
Internal Use Only
95-172-8 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power 95-172 Conductors and Cables
d. Cable Lugs:
1
1. Meet NEMA CC1
2. Rated 600 volts and fabricated of the same material as the conductor metal.
3. Non-insulated, ring-tongue, compression lugs:
a. Suitable for use with 75 °C wire at full NFPA 70, 75 °C ampacity, Burndy Type
YAV or equivalent.
b. Use slip-on black extruded plastic tubing to insulate the crimping barrel,Natvar
T105 or equivalent.
4. Non-insulated crimp connectors and terminators:
a. Suitable for use with 75 °C wire at full NFPA 70, 75 °C ampacity
5. Non-insulated, bolted, two-way connectors and terminators
e. Cable Ties:
1. Plastic ties shall be Thomas & Betts ties utilizing metal stop tabs (TY5242M or equal).
Proper tools will be used to cut off the tag ends leaving no sharp edges.
2. Wax string shall be#12 cord, waxed linen lacing.
f. Heat Shrinkable Insulation:
1. Thermally stabilized, cross-linked polyolefin
2. Manufacturer and Product: Thomas &Betts; SHRINK-KON.
2.7. Accessories for Conductors Above 600 Volts
a. Termination Kits shall be:
1. Capable of terminating a single conductor,polymeric-insulated, shielded cable.
2. Capable of producing a termination with a current rating equal to, or greater than, the
cable ampacity and meeting Class 1 requirements of IEEE 48.
3. Capable of accommodating any form of cable shielding or construction without the
need for special adapters and/or accessories
b. Splice Kits shall:
l. Have the components necessary to provide insulation,metallic shielding and grounding,
and an overall jacket
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-172-9

95-172 Conductors and Cables Idaho Power
2. Be capable of making splices that have a current rating equal to, or greater than that of
the cable ampacity and conforming to IEEE 404.
3. Match the voltage classification of the cable.
4. Provide a compression connector, splice insulating and conducting sleeves, stress-relief
materials, shielding braid and mesh, and an abrasion-resistant,heat shrinkable adhesive-
lined rejacketing sleeve to provide a waterproof seal.
2.8. Pulling Compound
a. Shall be nontoxic, non-corrosive, noncombustible, nonflammable, wax-based lubricant - UL
listed.
b. Shall be suitable for rubber, neoprene, PVC, polyethylene, CPE, and lead-covered wire and
cable
c. Shall be suitable for zinc-coated steel, aluminum, PVC, bituminized fiber, and fiberglass
raceways
d. Manufacturers and Products:
1. Ideal Co.;Yellow 77
2. Polywater, Inc.
3. Cable Grip Co
2.9. Cinder Blocks
a. Patio cinder blocks shall be used for the protection of direct buried cable. The patio blocks
shall be 2-1/4" X 8"X 16".
3. Execution
3.1. General
a. Install conductors as shown and as specified in the Bill of Materials and the Cable List.
b. Do not exceed cable manufacturer's recommendations for the maximum pulling tensions and
minimum bending radii. When pulling compound is used,use only UL listed compounds
compatible with the cable outer jacket and with the raceways involved.
c. Conductors Rated Above 600 Volts: The Contractor shall be responsible for providing the
proper cable pulling equipment and tension dynamometer. The Contractor shall monitor the
conductor pulling eye position and pulling tension and record the maximum pulling tensions
required for the installation of all conductors.
d. Tighten screws and terminal bolts in accordance with UL 486A for copper conductors.
Internal Use Only
95-172-10 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power 95-172 Conductors and Cables
e. Cable Lugs: Provide lugs with the correct number of holes, bolt size, and center-to-center
spacing as required by equipment terminals.
f. Cap all spare conductors with UL listed end caps.
3.2. Transfer and Inspection of Materials
a. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
1. When obtaining materials and equipment the Contractor is required to complete an
inventory for compliance with the drawings, equipment list, and specifications.
2. The Contractor shall carefully inspect all cable for visible defects. The outside of each
cable reel shall be carefully inspected and any protruding nails, fastenings, or other
objects that might damage the cable shall be removed.A thorough visual inspection for
flaws,breaks, or abrasions in the cable sheath shall be made as the cable leaves the reel
and the pulling speed shall be slow enough to permit this inspection. Damage to the
sheath or flash of the cable shall be sufficient cause for rejecting the cable. Instances of
damage shall be promptly brought to the attention of the Owner. Cable damaged in any
way during installation shall be replaced by and at the expense of the Contractor.
b. The Contractor shall familiarize himself with and comply with the cable manufacturer's
recommendations for storage, maximum pulling tensions,minimum bending radii, and other
installation requirements.
3.3. Storage of Materials
a. All materials and equipment shall be stored to protect them from deterioration or damage.
Any material damage incurred during on-site storage shall be replaced at the expense of
the Contractor.
b. Cable reels shall be stored and handled in a manner that will prevent physical damage to the
cable. Cable reels shall be stored on a hard surface to prevent contact between the cable
insulation and the earth due to sinking of the reel. Prevent impact damage between reels by
aligning the reels flange to flange or by using guards across the flanges. During storage, the
ends of all cable shall be protected with UL listed end caps.
c. If the cable is outdoors and a substantial time delay is expected before terminating the cable,
cover both ends of the cable with tape to eliminate the hazards of dirt, moisture, and
inadvertent electrical connection.
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-172-11

95-172 Conductors and Cables Idaho Power
3.4. Conductor Color Coding
a. All Systems: Equipment grounding, green.
b. Potential and Current Circuits (Typical 4/C cable)
Function Color
Phase 1 White
Phase 2 Red
Phase 3 Green
Neutral Black
c. Local Service - Direct Current (DC):
FUNCTION COLOR
Positive Black
Negative White
d. Local Service and Branch Circuits-Alternating Current(AC) 240 VAC and Below:
FUNCTION COLOR
X Black
Y Red
Z Blue (high leg)*
N White
GND Green
'High leg of a 240/120 VAC three-phase,four-wire delta system should be designated
by an orange wire per NEC2005 section 110.15,"High Leg Marking."This can be
done by a conductor that is orange in color or by other effective means(color tape)
as long as it is done at each point on the system where a connection is made.
Internal Use Only
95-172-12 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power 95-172 Conductors and Cables
e. Power Circuit Breaker(Typical 7/C cable):
1
FUNCTION COLOR IDENTIFICATION
Positive Black P1
Negative White N1
Close Red C
Trip Green T
"a" contact Orange A
"b" contact Blue B
to be assigned White/ Black -
f. Air Break Switch(Typical 7/C cable)
FUNCTION COLOR IDENTIFICATION
Positive Black P1
Negative White N1
Close Red C
Trip Green T
"A" contact Orange A
"B" contact Blue B
To be assigned White/with -
Black Tracer
g. Conductors Above 600 volts:Apply general purpose, flame retardant tape at each end, and at
accessible locations wrapping at least six full overlapping turns, covering an area 1-1/2 to 2
inches wide.
1. Colors:
a. Grounded Neutral: White
b. Phase A: Brown
C. Phase B: Orange
d. Phase C: Yellow
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-172-13

95-172 Conductors and Cables Idaho Power
Stations Control Wiring Field Practices for Color Codes as
Shown in the On-the-Job (OJT) Apprentice Manual
Abbreviation Lead AC 2C/12 Control 7C/12
B BLACK X BLACK AN+ BLACK
W WHITE Y RED AN1 WHITE
R RED X BLACK AN2 RED
G GREEN Y W/RED TAPE AN3 GREEN
O ORANGE X BLACK AN7 ORANGE
BL BLUE NO WHITE AN9 BLUE
W/B W/BLACK AN15 W/B
R/B R/BLACK PT JNCT BOX
G/B G/BLACK X1 WHITE AC
X2 RED 1C/## IPC Industry
Currents 4c/10 X3 GREEN 1-X BLACK 01 BLACK
C1 WHITE Y1 W/B 2-Y RED 02 RED
C2 RED Y2 ORANGE 3-Z BLUE 03 BLUE
C3 GREEN Y3 BLUE GND GREEN GREEN
CO BLACK
Potentials 4c/12 DC
Potentials 7c/12 V1-V4-V7 WHITE 1C/## IPC Industry
V7 WHITE V2-V5-V8 RED POS BLACK RED
V8 RED V3-V6-V9 GREEN NEG WHITE BLACK
V9 GREEN V0 BLACK GND GREEN GREEN
VO BLACK
123 W/B
VO BLUE From PT To J-Box 3-Phase 2401120 Delta with
208V High Leg
30 RECT OR Potentials 7c/12
AC
V1 WHITE 1C/## IPC Industry
DC 2C/12 V2 RED
1-X BLACK 01 BLACK
P BLACK V3 GREEN 2-Y RED 020RANGE
N WHITE VO BLACK (HL)
P BLACK V7 W/B 3-Z ORANGE 03 BLUE
N RED V8 ORANGE (HL)
V9 BLUE N WHITE WHITE
DC 4C/12 GND GREEN GREEN
P B-R Control 7C/12 X&Y= BLACK BLACK
120/ CABLE CABLE
N W-G P BLACK 240VAC MARKED MARKED
N WHITE LOCAL WITH WITH
SERVICE COLORED COLORED
AC 4C/12 C RED Z-208V TAPE TAPE
X BLACK T GREEN TO GND
Y RED A ORANGE
Z WHITE* B BLUE *For 208 VAC,30 tape BLUE
GND GREEN ANN+ W/B For 240 VAC,30 tape ORANGE(HL)
Internal Use Only
95-172-14 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power 95-172 Conductors and Cables
3.5. Preparation for Conductor Placement
a. Immediately prior to the placement of each cable or cable group, inspect the raceway and
ascertain that the installation is complete and free of all materials detrimental to the cable or
its placement. No wire or cable shall be installed in a conduit unless it is free of all foreign
material.
b. Ream, remove burrs, and clear the interior of installed conduit before pulling wires or cables.
c. Concrete-Encased Raceway Installation: Prior to installation of the conductors, pull a
mandrel, approximately 1/4-inch smaller than the raceway inside diameter, through each
raceway.
d. Both ends of each cable shall be made waterproof and properly tagged with weather-resistant
tags.
e. If the raceway appears inadequate to accommodate the assigned cable(s), notify the Owner.
Work shall be discontinued for questionable routes until the Contractor is advised as to how
to proceed.
f. Prior to installation, all cable shall be carefully checked for proper size and length before
being pulled into conduits, cable trench, or tray in order to minimize pulling stresses and the
need for splices. Cable pulled into the wrong conduit or duct or cut too short to rack, train,
and splice as specified herein shall be removed and replaced by and at the expense of the
Contractor.
3.6. Conductor Installation
a. Reuse existing conductor when called for in the drawings. The same testing requirements
apply as described herein.
b. The conductor shall not be handled when the temperature is below the minimum installation
temperature recommended by the manufacturer. If conductor heating is required prior to
installation, the conductor shall be stored in a heated building in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendation for at least 24 hours. The conductor shall be installed the
same day it is removed from heated storage.
1. Conductor in Conduit
a. All conductors assigned to a particular duct or conduit shall be grouped and
pulled-in simultaneously using cable grips and Owner provided lubricants as
necessary. Lubricants shall be applied liberally and continuously during the pull.
Any conductor installed in such a manner that the conductor jacket receives cuts
or abrasions shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense.
b. The pulling tension of any conductor shall not exceed the maximum tension
recommended by the conductor manufacturer. If any excessive strain develops,
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-172-15

95-172 Conductors and Cables Idaho Power
the pulling operation shall be stopped at once and the difficulty determined and
corrected.
C. To avoid insulation damage from excessive sidewall pressure at bends, the
pulling tension at the bend shall not exceed the manufacturer's
recommendations.
2. Conductor In Trench Or Tray
a. When pulling through open trench, a person is required to assist at corners to
avoid conductor damage.
b. Each set of circuit conductors feeding AC and DC yard load centers shall be
bundled together at 6' intervals to maximize magnetic field cancellation and
prevent induction in adjacent cables/conductors.
3.7. Conductors 600 Volts and Below
a. Install 10 AWG or 12 AWG conductors for branch circuit wiring in lighting and receptacle
circuits.
b. Connections and Terminations:
1. Install wire nuts only on solid conductors.
2. Install un-insulated crimp connectors and terminators for control and power conductors
that are No. 6 AWG and smaller.
3. Install un-insulated crimp connectors and terminators for control and power circuit
conductors that are No. 4 AWG through No. 2/0 AWG.
4. Install un-insulated, bolted, two-way connectors and terminators for power circuit
conductors that are No. 4/0 AWG and larger.
5. Tape-insulate all un-insulated connections.
6. Place no more than one conductor in any single-barrel pressure connections.
7. Compression Lugs:
a. Lugs are to be used with NatVar extruded plastic tubing placed as a sleeve over
the crimp.
b. Attach lugs with a tool specifically designed for that purpose.
C. Tools shall provide complete and accurate crimps. The crimper shall have guides
to prevent over crimping.
Internal Use Only
95-172-16 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power 95-172 Conductors and Cables
d. Provide an insulation crimp properly crimped to the conductor insulation.
1
c. Do not use soldered mechanical joints.
d. Splices and Terminations.
1. Indoors: Use general purpose, flame retardant tape.
2. Outdoors: Use flame retardant, cold-and weather-resistant tape.
e. Equipment Cabinets, Panels, and Control Panels:
1. Remove surplus wires,bridle and secure.
2. Where conductors pass through openings or over edges of metal members, remove
burrs, chamfer the edges, and install bushings and protective strips of insulating
material to protect the conductors.
f. Control and Instrumentation Wiring
1. Remove surplus wires,bridle and secure.
2. Leave sufficient length at all ends of the conductors to conveniently make connections
to the equipment. Provide a 2-inch, minimum loop at all CT cable connections.
3. Spare conductors at each end of a multi-conductor cable shall be retained in a length
equal to that of the longest single conductor.
4. All cable wires shall terminate on terminal blocks.
5. All terminations shall be grouped as to function whenever possible.
6. Current transformer secondary leads in the yard equipment should have approximately
6 feet of excess cable prior to cutting. This practice will reduce the odds of future
splicing if rolling phases or ratio changes become necessary.
7. Where terminals provided accept such lugs, terminate control and instrumentation
wiring with non-insulated ring-tongue lugs and slip-on extruded plastic
insulating tubing.
8. Make terminations with methods consistent with the terminals provided and in
accordance with terminal manufacturer's instructions.
9. Locate splices only in readily accessible cabinets or junction boxes using terminal
strips.
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-172-17

95-172 Conductors and Cables Idaho Power
10. Cable Protection:
a. Maintain the integrity of the shielding of instrumentation cables.
b. Ensure that shield grounds do not occur because of damage to the cable jacket
covering the shield.
g. Extra Conductor Length: For conductors to be connected by others, install minimum of 6 feet
of extra conductor in freestanding panels and minimum 2 feet in other assemblies.
h. Connect the copper tape shields for all multi-conductor shielded yard cable to ground at both
ends using approved"flag style" copper foil splice to #10 AWG ground conductor.
3.8. Conductors Above 600 Volts
a. Make joints and terminations with splice and termination kits in accordance with the kit
manufacturer's instructions.
b. Install splices or terminations as continuous operation in accessible, clean, dry locations.
c. Single Conductor Cable Terminations: Provide heat shrinkable stress control and outer
non-tracking insulation tubing, high relative permittivity stress relief mastic for insulation
shield cutback treatment, and a heat-activated sealant for environmental sealing, and
including a ground braid and clamp.
d. Install terminals or connectors acceptable for the type of conductor material used.
e. Provide outdoor rain skirts for all outdoor equipment terminations.
£ Ground the concentric neutrals for all terminations.
g. Provide the necessary mounting hardware, covers, and connectors.
h. Give 2 working days notice to the Owner prior to making splices or terminations.
i. Rack and secure the conductors installed in manholes and handholes.
3.9. Direct Buried Control Cables (Not allowed without prior owner
approval)
3.10. Splices
a. Do not splice unless specifically indicated or approved by the Owner.
b. Splices shall be avoided wherever possible but shall, if required,be prepared and insulated in
a manner equal to that of the conductor as specified by the manufacturer.All splices shall be
readily available for inspection.
Internal Use Only
95-172-18 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power 95-172 Conductors and Cables
c. A splice should never be present at the emergence of a conductor or wire from a conduit. If a
splice is required at this point the conductor shall be pulled such that the splice does not
interfere with the entering or exiting conductors.
d. Current transformer secondary conductors shall not be spliced.
3.11. Cable Ties
a. Bundling: Where single conductors and cables in handholes, vaults, cable troughs, cable
trays, and other indicated locations are not wrapped together by some other means,bundle
the conductors from each conduit throughout their exposed length with cable ties placed at
intervals not exceeding 12 inches on center.
b. Cable Tray Installation:
1. Install wire and cable in cable trays parallel and straight.
2. Bundle, in groups, all wire and cable of same voltage having a common routing and
destination using cable ties at maximum intervals of 3 feet.
3. Clamp cable bundles prior to the making end termination connections.
4. Fasten wires, cables, and bundles to the tray with wax string at the following
maximum intervals:
a. Horizontal Runs: 3 feet.
b. Vertical Runs: 3 feet.
c. Where conductors must pass from the cable trench/tray to instrument panels, they shall be
bundled in the trench/tray so they can pass as one group.
d. Plastic Ties (not preferred)
1. Use plastic ties to secure cable in previously wired panels and trays where plastic is
predominantly used.
2. Plastic ties should be used exclusively to secure cable in outdoor gear and where there is
outdoor exposure to prevent damage due to rodents and weather conditions.
3. Flush cutoff of tag ends is required to prevent sharp edges.
e. Wax String (preferred)
1. Waxed, flax-12 cord is used in cable trays where a cable crosses perpendicular to a
rung. The cable is secured to the tray rung with a saddle knot that allows it to continue
straight and does not pull in any direction.
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-172-19

95-172 Conductors and Cables Idaho Power
2. Use waxed, flax-12 cord to secure cable in previously wired panels and trays where
string is predominantly used.
3. New installations shall use wax string, not plastic ties.
3.12. Conductor Arc and Fireproofing
a. Install arc and fireproofing tape on all medium voltage and communications cables
throughout their entire exposed length in vaults, tunnels,pull boxes, and switchgear.
b. Wrap conductors of same circuit entering from separate conduit together as single cable.
c. Follow any tape manufacturer's installation instructions.
d. Secure tape at intervals of 5 feet with bands of tape binder. Each band is to consist of a
minimum of two wraps directly over each other.
3.13. Circuit Identification
a. Cables and wires in the same circuit or grouping shall be identified as indicated in the Cable
List. The circuit number shall be fastened to each cable or wire grouping at both ends.
Individual wires are not labeled.
b. Tags supplied by the Owner shall be used for cable tagging. The cable number shall be
printed with laminated labeling tape with black print on a white surface.The opposite side
should display a date stamp.
1. The tag should be attached with wax string at a location that can be readily viewed.
2. The tag should be tied as the cable exits the cable tray, directly before the cables are
broken out into individual wires. Where this is not feasible, the tag is to be attached to
the first wire placed.
3. A tag should never be present at the emergence of a cable from a conduit to prevent
interference with the entering or exiting of future cables.
Internal Use Only
95-172-20 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power
CHAPTER
95-173 Control Panels on
1. General
1.1. Work Included
a. This section covers the work necessary to furnish control panels (in a 19-inch wide rack
configuration), complete with switches, relays, instruments, meters, terminal blocks,
and other control devices and accessories as required for a complete and functional system
meeting the protection, operation,and control requirements specified. The control panels will
be installed indoors in a substation control building where the operating temperature range is
from 40°F to 110 °F.
b. The control panels and associated control wiring shall be similar to the station control panels
presently manufactured by the Owner. The control panels are a modular system made of
various termination, control and protection modules. The Owner will provide control panel
materials as specified herein.All other control panel switches, relays, instruments,
controllers, etc, shall be furnished and assembled into the control panel by the Contractor.
c. The Owner will provide the Contractor drawings that shall be used for reference
during bidding.
d. Photographs and additional information regarding control panel construction will be
available from the Owner for the Contractor's use after award of contract.
1.2. Submittals—N/A
1.3. Abbreviations
a. Whenever, in these specifications, the following abbreviations are used, the intent and
meaning shall be interpreted as follows:
1. ANSI -American National Standards Institute
2. IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
3. NEC -National Electrical Code
4. NEMA-National Electrical Manufacturer's Association
5. UL-Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-173-1

95-173 Control Panels Idaho Power
1.4. Owner Furnished Equipment
a. The Owner will furnish control panel components to the Contractor as required.
b. The Contractor shall provide the Owner with the quantities of the material noted. Notify the
Owner a minimum of 4 weeks prior to the material needs date.
c. The Contractor shall verify the delivery schedule of Owner-furnished materials by contacting
the Owner before making final arrangements for, or committing resources to, the relocation,
handling, or protection of such products. The Contractor shall include delivery and testing in
the construction sequencing and scheduling.
d. Prior to the acceptance of Owner-furnished materials by the Contractor,the Contractor shall
inspect the condition of the material and record in writing all products transferred to the
Contractor's care for signature by the Owner. Damage to or loss of equipment and materials
shall be immediately reported to Owner.
e. If the Contractor determines the Owner-furnished items are damaged, defective, or missing
prior to transfer to the Contractor's care, the Owner will arrange for repair or replacement of
such items, as required.
f. The Contractor shall familiarize himself with the Owner-furnished products to determine any
special equipment requirements or needs and include them in the bid. The Contractor shall
supply all labor, tools, construction equipment, and agents used for transferring to the
Contractor's care,unloading, transporting, inspecting, storing, or handling Owner-furnished
products.
g. The Contractor is responsible for protecting all Owner-furnished items from damage.
The Contractor shall protect the Owner against all losses to Owner furnished items while in
the care of the Contractor and until final acceptance of the work by the Owner.
The Contractor shall repair or replace items damaged as a result of his operations.
1.5. Shop Drawings
a. Submittal Procedures:
I. Submit to the Owner for review and approval five copies of all shop drawings and other
specified information.
2. Identify the project,pertinent drawing sheet and detail number(s), products, units and
assemblies, and the system or equipment identification.
3. At the time of each submission, give the Owner specific written notice of each variation
that the submittal may have from the requirements of the specifications. In addition,
make specific notation on each shop drawing submitted to the Owner for review and
approval of each such variation.
Internal Use Only
95-173-2 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power 95-173 Control Panels
b. The following specific information shall be provided:
1
1. Data to be submitted at the time of the bid:
a. Complete, descriptive drawings, catalog cuts, and descriptive literature which
shall include make, model, and dimensions of all equipment.
b. Outline and arrangement drawings.
C. Diagrams and/or information describing electric power supply requirements and
control interfaces.
d. Summary of master control software requirements and the proposed approach
for integration with the overall substation control system.
e. All exceptions to the applicable requirements and specifications provided herein.
2. Data to be submitted after the bid is awarded:
a. Complete electrical schematic and wiring diagrams, interconnection diagrams
showing power and control interfaces among all system components.
b. Control panel arrangement drawings and program documentation (PLC or
micro-processor based, as applicable) and I/O listing.
C. Outline drawings for all items that are shipped loose.
d. Detailed installation manuals.
e. Detailed information on structural, electrical, or other changes or modifications
necessary to adapt the proposed equipment to the 19-inch rack configuration.
f. Recommended procedure for the protection and handling of materials prior to
installation.
g. Specific panel-to-panel interconnection cabling requirements and yard cabling
requirements.
3. Materials to be submitted at project completion:
a. Operating and maintenance manuals and maintenance summary forms
b. Certified factory test reports
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-173-3

95-173 Control Panels Idaho Power
2. Products
2.1. Nameplates and Tags
a. Panel Nameplates: Panel identification located on the panel face.
1. Inscription: Panel number(coordinate with the Owner).
2. Materials: Laminated plastic attached with panhead screws.
3. Size: 3-inch wide by 1-inch high.
4. Letters: 3/16-inch white on black background.
b. Module Nameplates: Module identification located on the module face (lower right hand
corner).
1. Inscription: Module number(coordinate with the Owner).
2. Materials: Laminated plastic attached with panhead screws.
3. Size: 2 1/8-inch wide by 5/8-inch high.
4. Letters: 1/8-inch white on black background.
c. Component Nameplates-Panel Face: Component identification located on panel face under or
near component.
1. Inscription: Component function.
2. Materials: Laminated plastic attached with panhead screws.
3. Size: 2 1/8-inch wide by 5/8-inch high.
4. Letters: 1/8-inch white on black background.
d. Component Nameplates-Back of Panel: Component identification located on or near the
component on the back of the panel.
1. Inscription: Component identification.
2. Materials: Laminated plastic attached with panhead screws.
3. Size: 2 1/8-inch wide by 5/8-inch high.
4. Letters: 1/8-inch white on black background.
Internal Use Only
95-173-4 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power 95-173 Control Panels
2.2. Control Panel Fabrication
a. General:
1. The control panels shall be furnished as a complete prewired package ready for
installation and termination of field wiring and interconnection wiring between panels.
2. Panel construction, components, and wiring: In compliance with the National Electrical
Code (NEC), state and local codes, and applicable sections of NEMA,ANSI, and UL.
b. Panel Construction:
1. Panels and associated modules shall be constructed with materials similar to those
shown on the example drawings provided by the Owner.
2. Steel Panel Modules:
a. Sand and remove all mill scale, rust, grease, and oil.
b. Fill all imperfections and sand smooth.
C. Paint with one coat of DuPont Vari-Prime#625S and two coats of two-
component type epoxy enamel.
d. Dry film thickness: 3 mils, minimum
e. Color:ANSI#70 gray.
3. Control devices shall be mounted semi-flush on the panel modules.
4. Smaller back-of-panel mounted equipment shall be mounted on mounting brackets
(72BKU72). Larger back-of-panel mounted equipment shall be mounted on the rack
cover plates using Contractor installed welded mounting studs. Cover plate through bolt
mounting is not acceptable.
5. Mounting Heights:
a. Control Switches: 48-inches.
b. GUI: 54-inches.
2.3. Electrical Requirements
a. All equipment shall operate from a 24, 48 or 125 VDC or 120 VAC supply.
b. Wires within control panels:
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-173-5

95-173 Control Panels Idaho Power
1. AC Circuits:
a. Type: 600-volt, type SIS stranded copper.
b. Size: For the current to be carried, but not less than No. 14 AWG.
C. Color: Gray.
2. Analog Signal Circuits:
a. Type: 300-volt, twisted-shielded stranded copper pairs.
b. Size: No. 18 AWG minimum.
3. DC circuits:
a. Type: 600-volt, type SIS stranded copper.
b. Size: For the current to be carried, but not less than No. 14 AWG.
4. Grounding Conductors:
a. Type: 600-volt, type SIS stranded copper.
b. Size: No. 12 AWG (min).
C. Color: Green.
5. Special Signal Cables: Use manufacturer's standard cables.
6. Restrain wiring with plastic ties or waxed string and ducts.
7. Arrange wiring neatly, cut to proper length, and remove surplus wire.
8. Use abrasion protection for wire bundles which pass through holes or across edges of
sheet metal.
9. Connection to Screw-Type Terminals:
a. Non-insulated ring-tongue compression lugs with extruded plastic
insulating tubing.
b. Use manufacturer's recommended tools with properly sized anvils to make crimp
lug terminations. The tool shall provide a complete, controlled crimp and shall
not release until the crimp is complete. Do not use plier-type crimpers.
C. Wires terminated in a crimp lug: a maximum of one.
Internal Use Only
95-173-6 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power 95-173 Control Panels
d. Lugs installed on a screw terminal: a maximum of two.
1
10. Connections to Compression Clamp-Type Terminals:
a. Strip, prepare, and install the wires in accordance with the terminal
manufacturer's recommendations.
b. Wires installed in a compression screw and clamp: a maximum of two.
11. Splicing and tapping of wires is only allowed at device terminals or terminal blocks.
12. Separate DC and analog signal circuits by at least 2 inches from AC power and control
wiring, except at unavoidable crossover points and at device terminations. Design
panels to keep crossovers to a minimum.
13. Arrange wiring to allow access for testing, removal, and maintenance of circuits and
components.
14. Plastic Wire Duct Fill: Do not exceed manufacturer's recommendations.
c. Owner-Furnished Terminal Block Modules:
1. All panel-to-panel interconnection wiring and all outgoing wiring (yard control cables)
shall terminate at the Owner-furnished terminal block modules.
2. Panels will typically be served from an overhead cable tray or floor trench in the
building. Terminal blocks shall be installed at the tops or bottom of the panels,
respectively.
3. All panel-to-panel interconnection cables and all yard cables will be routed through the
cable tray and terminated to the bottom of the terminal blocks for top feed panels and at
the top of the terminal blocks for bottom feed panels.
4. The panel wiring shall be routed through the panel-wiring duct and terminated on the
top side of the block for top feed panels and at the bottom side of the blocks for bottom
feed panels.
5. Quantity:
a. Accommodate present and spare needs.
b. Install a maximum of two wires per terminal.
C. Wire spare and unused panel mounted elements to their panels' terminal blocks.
d. Wire and terminate all PLC UO including spares.
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-173-7

95-173 Control Panels Idaho Power
e. Spare Terminals: Maintain 20 percent of all connected terminals, but not less
than 5 per terminal block.
6. Terminal Block Types:
a. Terminal block types shall be as shown on the Owner-furnished drawings.
d. Grounding of Control Panels:
1. A ground bus is located on each Owner-furnished terminal block module. Each panel
ground bus will be connected to the station ground grid with#2 (min) insulated copper
conductor.
2. Surge protection devices (MOVs) shall be installed between the Owner-furnished
terminal block and the ground bus for each conductor of yard control cables to sup-
press transients.
3. MOV's Ratings:
a. CT cables: 1000-volts
Manufacturer: GE#V1000LA160BP
or equivalent
b. PT cables: 150-volts
Manufacturer: GE#V 150LA20AP
or equivalent
C. DC Control Cables: 480-volts
Manufacturer: GE#V480LA80BP
or equivalent
4. Surge protection devices, cable shields, equipment grounds, and 120 VAC receptacle
grounds shall terminate on the ground bus.
3. Execution
3.1. General
a. Work shall be performed in a work-man like manner by craftsmen skilled in the particular
trade.All work shall present a neat and finished appearance.
3.2. Preparation for Shipment
a. As far as is practical, the equipment specified herein shall be factory assembled.
b. Each 19-inch panel shall be shipped individually,packaged in manner to minimize panel
vibration and damage during shipment.
c. Each panel shall be tagged to facilitate the final assembly of the panel lineup in the field.
Internal Use Only
95-173-8 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power 95-173 Control Panels
3.3. Services Of Contractor
a. Inspection, Startup, Testing, and Field Adjustment:
1. Provide supervision during installation as specified in the Series Capacitor
specification.
2. Complete the Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation subsequent to
installation, startup, and commissioning (appendix G).
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-173-9

95-173 Control Panels Idaho Power
Internal Use Only
95-173-10 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power
CHAPTER
95-175 Installation of
Owner-Furnished Products TDM11M5
1. General
1.1. General
a. This specification section defines the work necessary to receive,unload, store, install or
modify, and coordinate testing and operational startup of Owner-furnished products.
b. Owner-furnished products are generally defined as follows:
1. New materials and equipment obtained by the Owner from various manufacturers under
separate contract with the Owner.
2. New materials and equipment manufactured by the Owner at the Owner's facilities.
3. Existing materials and equipment reconditioned by the Owner at the Owner's facilities.
4. Existing materials and equipment located at the project site or to be relocated from other
substations.
1.2. Submittals
a. The Contractor shall provide the Owner with 2 weeks advance written notice prior to
substantial completion to allow for scheduling of the Owner's personnel for functional testing
and commissioning.
1.3. Contractor's Responsibility
a. The Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner to determine availability of material and
equipment.
b. Where the Owner manufactures products such as control panels and other equipment, the
Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner to determine any special handling, receiving,
unloading, and installation instructions. General handling, receiving,unloading, and
installation instructions for control panels are included herein.
c. The Contractor shall have complete responsibility for the necessary handling, installing,
adjusting, and maintaining of Owner-furnished products. Provide and coordinate the
construction of interconnecting structures, equipment, electrical work, and appurtenances to
achieve installation and operation of Owner-furnished products as shown and specified and
as required to provide a complete and functional system.
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-175-1

95-175 Installation of Owner-Furnished Products Idaho Power
d. The Contractor shall perform visual and mechanical inspections and testing as specified in
specification 95-181, Electrical Testing, on all Owner-furnished products. Unless noted
otherwise, the Owner will perform all functional testing and commissioning on all Owner-
furnished products.
2. Products
2.1. General
a. The Contractor shall provide products required to complete the work under this section,
except where products are specifically specified as Owner-furnished. This includes all
products necessary to provide a complete and proper functioning system.
2.2. Owner-Furnished Products
a. All Owner-furnished products will be listed on the Bill of Material or on the drawings.
3. Execution
3.1. General
a. The installation and erection of Owner-furnished products shall conform to the drawings and
the manufacturers recommended installation procedures.All work shall be done in a neat and
workman-like manner.
b. Demolition required for equipment relocation shall be as shown on the drawings and in
accordance with specification 95-115, Selective Demolition.
c. Erection work shall include receiving, unloading, storage, removal from storage, hauling,
cleaning, erection on foundations,modifications to existing structures,temporary wiring,and
other work necessary to place all equipment into successful operation. In addition, erection
work shall include the complete assembly of equipment shipped unassembled; dismantling
and reassembly of equipment to make adjustments; and provision of personnel for placing the
equipment.
d. Erection procedures not specified herein shall be in accordance with the equipment
manufacturers.
e. The Contractor shall properly dispose of all shipping materials.
3.2. Equipment Protection
a. All equipment shall be protected from damage of any kind from the time it is unloaded until
it is ready for initial operation.
3.3. Cleaning
a. The exterior and interior surfaces of each piece of equipment shall be cleaned of sand, dirt,
and other foreign materials after its removal from storage and immediately before its
movement to its final location.
Internal Use Only
95-175-2 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power 95-175 Installation of Owner-Furnished Products
b. Before the initial operation of individual items of equipment, the Contractor shall remove all
dirt, mortar, and other material that has been spilled, misplaced, or otherwise has been
allowed to mar the finish surfaces.The interior of all electrical equipment shall be thoroughly
wiped and vacuumed clean before the equipment is energized.All debris shall be removed
from the site and disposed of by the Contractor.
3.4. Major Equipment
a. General:
1. The Contractor shall receive,unload,uncrate, assemble, install and place the equipment
in accordance with the manufacturers'recommendations, instruction books and
drawings. The Contractor shall be responsible for assembling and mounting the
equipment on the structures, and making grounding, bus, and control cabling
connections.
2. The Contractor shall provide all miscellaneous drilling, adjustments, mounting holes,
touch up painting, etc., to produce a complete installation to accommodate all
equipment,buses, materials, and future equipment and structures where specified. The
Owner shall be notified immediately of any assembly problems.
3. The ground protection scheme at the metalclad switchgear may operate due to welding
activities on the switchgear assembly. If welding is required on the metalclad
switchgear assembly, notify the Owner prior to performing any welding activities.
4. The Contractor shall notify the Owner when installation of major equipment has been
completed to allow the Owner to perform the pre-energization tests required by the
manufacturer.
3.5. Control Panels
a. Unloading and Handling: The control panels are shipped in sections (90"H X 19" or 23" W)
to allow easy handling. Because the weight distribution in the cabinets is uneven,use extreme
care during handling and transport.
b. Inspections:
1. While the control panels are still on the truck, inspect the equipment for any signs of
damage or mishandling. Do not attempt to install the system if damage is apparent.
2. Verify that all items have been received.
3. Check for loose connections or unsecured components in the panels.
4. Check for any unsafe condition that may be a potential safety hazard.
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-175-3

95-175 Installation of Owner-Furnished Products Idaho Power
c. Installation:
1
1. Use a suitable material handling device to move each cabinet to its final location.
Exercise extreme care because of the uneven weight distribution.
2. The control panels are intended for indoor installation in control buildings, power
plants, metalclad switchgear, or enclosures that will provide shelter from the elements.
The operating temperature range is from 40°F to 110°F.
3. When installing the control panels and making electrical connections, exercise extreme
care to prevent metal filings, conductor strands, etc., from coming in contact with any
device in the control panel. Provide blankets or other necessary measures as required.
4. A C3X5.4#channel is provided for use as the base for mounting 90" steel panels to the
floor. Required lengths of 3-inch channel shall be securely anchored to the floor with
'/z"X 2" expansion bolts. Provide leveling shims as required utilizing 3" steel washers.
5. Carefully lower the panels to the floor channels and position them for interconnection.
The floor channels and panel sides are drilled and tapped for 3/8"NC cap screws. Install
5/16"NC cap screws,washers, and nuts in the holes provided to connect panels to the
3-inch channel and to interconnect each control panel forming a row of panels.
6. A 3"X 1/4" steel top trim plate is provided for installation at the top of the control panels.
The top trim plate is drilled for %2" NC cap screws and the top of the control panels are
drilled and tapped for %2"NC cap screws. Install 3/8"NC cap screws,washers, and nuts
in the holes provided.
7. Panels shall be installed securely, plumb, inline, and square with the walls. To prevent
the tops from shifting,panels shall be anchored to the ceiling or walls with suitable
structural steel struts to match existing conditions or as shown on the drawings
8. Verify that adequate access is provided on all sides of the equipment.
3.6. Location Tolerances
a. Equipment shall be located within 1/8-inch of the dimensional location indicated on the
drawings unless otherwise permitted.
3.7. Alignment
a. Rigid components such as bus,breaker bushings, capacitors bushings and enclosures shall be
aligned and connected with special care to prevent excessive stress in joints, supports, and
connections.
3.8. Equipment Finish
a. Surfaces of most electrical equipment, such as panels, capacitors, and circuit breakers, are
finished at the factory. Care shall be exercised to prevent damage to this original finish during
installation of the equipment and during construction work.
Internal Use Only
95-175-4 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power 95-175 Installation of Owner-Furnished Products
b. If the factory finish is damaged during the course of construction, the damage area shall be
repaired in a manner acceptable to the Owner.
c. The refinished surface shall be equivalent in every respect to the original surface, including
color, texture, and smoothness. Refinishing paint, if furnished with the equipment, may be
used. Otherwise, the paint shall be obtained from the equipment manufacturer or equal as
approved by the Owner.
3.9. Galvanized Surface Coatings
a. All galvanized surfaces on which the galvanizing is removed by cutting, drilling, or by any
other operation shall be repaired using a zinc-rich paint, zinc solder or zinc metallizing to
meet ASTM A 780.
3.10. Equipment Nameplates
a. All equipment shall have external tags identifying the device.
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-175-5

95-175 Installation of Owner-Furnished Products Idaho Power
Internal Use Only
95-175-6 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power
CHAPTER
95-176 Insulators Tq!)Ml%
1. General
1.1. Summary
a. This section covers the work necessary for installing all insulators.
b. The Owner will provide all materials,unless noted otherwise. Refer to specification 95-175,
Installation Of Owner-Furnished Products.
1.2. Submittals—N/A
2. Products (Not Used)
3. Execution
3.1. Handling
a. All insulators will be supplied in crates. The Contractor must handle insulators with care
during assembly. Foreign matter shall be cleaned from all insulators before mounting.
3.2. Installation
a. All insulators and bushings shall be cleaned of oil, dirt,paper,tape or other foreign materials.
Notify the Owner to inspect any damage on any porcelain or polymer insulator.
b. Insulators shall be lifted into place using proper lifting slings and hardware to protect the
insulators from damage and/or personal injury.
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-176-1

95-176 Insulators Idaho Power
Internal Use Only
95-176-2 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power
CHAPTER
95-177 Buswork TDMIT
1. General
1.1. Summary
a. This section covers the work necessary for the installation of high voltage station electrical
conductors(buswork)and connectors. Buswork installation shall include rigid bus, strain and
jumper bus, cable jumper, static wires, fittings, and all hardware required to form a complete
system of current-carrying paths connecting the equipment as shown on the drawings.
b. The Owner will provide all materials,unless noted otherwise. Materials specified herein are
for informational purposes. Refer to specification 95-177, Installation of Owner-
Furnished Products.
1.2. Submittals
a. See Section 3.7 Aluminum Bus Welding.
2. Products
2.1. Buswork
a. Rigid bus:
1. All Aluminum bus shall comply with ANSI H35.2 (latest edition)Dimensional
Tolerances for Aluminum Mill Products
2. Aluminum tubular bus: Use ANSI Schedule 40 standard pipe size(SPS), 6063-T6 alloy
in compliance with ASTM B241 Standard Specification for Aluminum and
Aluminum-Alloy Seamless Pipe and Seamless Extruded Tube.
3. Aluminum Universal angle bus (UABC): Use 6101-T61 alloy in compliance with
ASTM B317 Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bar, Rod, Tube,
Pipe, Structural Profiles, and Profiles for Electrical Purposes (Bus Conductor). Use
angle bus with center line grooves to facilitate bolt hole location.
4. Aluminum rectangular bar conductor: Use 6061-T61 alloy in compliance with ASTM
B317 Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bar, Rod, Tube, Pipe,
Structural Profiles, and Profiles for Electrical Purposes (Bus Conductor).
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-177-1

95-177 Buswork Idaho Power
5. Copper tubular bus: Use hard drawn seamless copper tubular bus in compliance with
ASTM B-188 Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Bus Pipe and Tube.
Use standard or extra heavy pipe sizes as indicated in drawings.
6. Copper rectangular bar: Use Copper alloy 110 that complies with ASTM B 152
b. Stranded bus conductors (wire jumpers or strain bus) shall comply with the following:
• AAC aluminum alloy 1350 shall comply with ASTM B231.
• ACSR shall comply with ASTM B232.
• ACSS shall comply with ASTM B856.
2.2. Connectors
Bolted fittings or compression(Swaged) fittings are the preferred methods of connecting
buswork. Welded connections shall be used only when approved by the project engineer.
a. Use connectors as shown on the drawings and selected from the following types:
• Bolted aluminum connectors
• Extra high voltage (EHV) connectors—aluminum
• Bolted copper or bronze connectors
• Compression aluminum and copper connectors
• Welded aluminum connectors
b. A corrosion inhibitor shall be used for all bolted connections.
1. For all current carrying bolted, compressed, or swaged connections, a corrosion
inhibitor must be used as outlined in this chapter.
2.3. Aeolian Vibration Dampers
a. See Part 3.3 below.
3. Execution
3.1. General
a. Clearance
b. All current-carrying buses,jumpers, connectors and other hardware shall be installed in
conformance with the applicable drawings.The Contractor shall verify that all clearances and
spacing are equal to or greater than those listed in the table below.
Internal Use Only
95-177-2 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power 95-177 Buswork
Table 95-1. Clearances and spacing
1
Nominal Min. Metal-to-Metal Distance
System between Supported Min. Clearance between Overhead Conductors
Voltage Conductors,All Disc. Switches and the following:
Ground for Rigid Bus
(klo Phase to Phase Phase Ground d Personnel Over Cable Over
Safety Roadways Roadways
2.4 0'-6" 0'-3" 8'-9" 18'-0" 18'-6"
4.16 0'-7" 0'-4" 8'-10" 18'-0" 18'-6"
12.5 1'-0" 0'-7" 9'-0" 18'-0" 18'-6"
25 1'-3" 0'-10" 9'-3" 18'-2" 18'-8"
34.5 1'-6" 1'-1" 9'-6" 18'-7" 19'-1"
46 1'-9" 1'-5" 9'-10" 18'-11" 19'-5"
69 2'-7" 2'-1" 10'-5" 19'-9" 20'-3"
115 4'-5" 3'-6" 11'-7" 23'-0" 23'-7"
138 5'-3" 4'-2" 12'-2" 23'-11" 24'-6"
161 6'-0" 4'-10" 12'-10" 24'-9" 25'-3"
230 7'-5" 5'-11" 13'-9" 27'-4" 27'-11"
345 9'-11" 8'-8" 20'-6" 31'-8" 32'-2"
500 Value not 12'-0" 20'-6" 32'-0" 32'-0"
established
3.2. Aluminum Bus Storage
a. If aluminum bus is shipped from the manufacturer and received wrapped in paper or
packaged in cardboard cartons, the Contractor shall unpack, clean and check all the
aluminum bus immediately upon receipt. The bus finish may be damaged if such materials
are allowed to become wet and remain on the bus. In addition,the Contractor shall remove all
other materials that might damage the bus finish. Store the bus in such a manner that the
finish will be protected.
3.3. Rigid Bus Installation
a. Bus supports shall be set so that the centerline of the bus is uniform and in perfect alignment.
Shimming may be necessary to accomplish this. The bus support shall be set so that the bus
will fit snugly in the saddle. No skewing will be allowed. Where joints are made, there shall
be no declination. Vertical bus or risers shall be perpendicular to lower bus and in alignment
with it.
b. Horizontal deflection of installed rigid bus shall be less then L/200 where L=the length of
the bus between supports. The phases shall be parallel except as indicated on the drawings.
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-177-3

95-177 Buswork Idaho Power
c. Bus end caps shall be installed at all open ends. Steel mesh may be used to plug the opening
if a fitting does not allow for an end cap to be used.
d. When required,bus couplers shall be installed within the first quarter span on either side of a
bus support.
e. Rigid bus shall be installed in complete conformance with the recommendations of the
manufacturer and the drawings. If the design contradicts manufacturer recommendations
contact the project engineer.
f. Install vibration dampers externally or internally as required. Install all aluminum conductor
in pipe sizes less than 3 '/2" inches SPS, and external vibration dampers on pipe sizes 3 '/2"
inches SPS and above. Vibration dampers shall be installed as required in the following table:
Table 95-2. Vibration dampers
Standard Pipe Size Max Bus Span without Wire Insert Recommended Insert
1" 6' - 0" 2/0 AAAC Anaheim
1-1/4" 7' - 6" 2/0 AAAC Anaheim
1-1/2" 8' -4" 4/0 AAAC Alliance
2" 10' - 9" 4/0 AAAC Alliance
2-1/2" 12' - 9" 4/0 AAAC Alliance
3" 15' - 10" 336.4 AA Tulip
3-1/2" 18' - 3" Use external damper
4" 20' -4" Use external damper
5" 25' - 6" Use external damper
6" 30' - 3" Use external damper
g. Use only one external damper per span. External dampers shall be placed one-third of the bus
span plus 2' from the support. External dampers shall be installed as required by the
manufacturer.
h. Drill a maximum of 5/32-inch diameter seep hole in all locations where moisture could
collect and freeze. Larger holes are unacceptable.All holes shall be reamed to remove sharp
edges.
3.4. Strain and Jumper Bus Installation
a. Jumpers and buses shall be smoothly formed,and adjacent runs shall be uniform and pleasing
in appearance and symmetrically shaped maintaining required electrical clearances.
Internal Use Only
95-177-4 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power 95-177 Buswork
b. Stranded conductor shall be installed without twists, kinks, or"birdcaging" and shall be
handled to avoid abrasions or other damage. No splices shall be allowed in overhead
strain buses.
c. All strain buses and incoming line conductors shall be sagged in conformance to
values supplied.
3.5. Bolted Electrical Connections
a. General information:
1. Bolts shall be torqued in accordance with the following table:
Table 95-3. Bolt torque
Torque (ft-lb
Bolt Material Bolt Size Lubricated) Comments
Aluminum Alloy-2024-T4 1/2" 13 NC 30 Heavy Hex Series
Aluminum Alloy-2024-T4 5/8" 11 NC 45 Heavy Hex Series
Aluminum Alloy-2024-T4 3/8" 16 NC 12 Standard Bolts
Aluminum Alloy-2024-T4 1/2" 13 NC 25 Standard Bolts
Aluminum Alloy-2024-T4 5/8" 11 NC 40 Standard Bolts
Structural Steel Grade 5 1/2"-13 NC 38
Structural Steel 18-8 1/2-13 NC 25
Structural Steel 18-8 5/8-11 NC 40
Copper Alloy-Bronze 3/8" 16 NC 20+
Copper Alloy-Bronze 1/2" 13 NC 40+
Copper Alloy-Bronze 5/8" 11 NC 55+
2. Connections shall be made by alternately tightening the nuts with a torque wrench until
the proper torque values are reached. Bolts shall not extend beyond the nut more than
half the bolt diameter.
3. In cases where the manufacturer's specified torque values are in conflict with
Table 95-3, the manufacturer's specifications should be used.
4. An oxide inhibiting compound must be used at the contact surfaces of all electrical
connections (bolted or compression) involving aluminum to aluminum or aluminum to
copper surfaces. Two styles of inhibitor are stocked by IPC stores.
a. Inhibitor (4695) is the only approved compound for use in Stations. It does not
contain any grit and is suitable for use on threaded connections,
connections where one or both surfaces are plated, and for connections involving
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-177-5

95-177 Buswork Idaho Power
wire bus. This inhibitor will not scratch the surface plating which may lead to
corrosion or gall (jam) threads.
b. Inhibitor(4696) is carried by IPC stores and contains a grit which may be
conductive or non-conductive. This grit helps break through the oxides that may
form on the connection surface immediately after it is brushed. Inhibitors with
non-conductive grit are not approved for use in Stations. Fittings with
manufacturer applied corrosion inhibitor with grit may be installed per
manufacturer's directions.
b. Aluminum to Aluminum Connections:
1. When aluminum fittings are used:
a. Clean the contact areas of the conductors and fittings with a stainless steel wire
brush to remove any oxide. Immediately coat these contact areas with a liberal
amount of approved corrosion inhibitor compound.
b. Make the connections with Aluminum Alloy 2024-T4 or Stainless steel-zinc
plated Grade 5 bolts, two flat washers, one lock washer, and one nut per
connection. Tighten bolts as specified in 3.5.A above. Use caution in tightening
lubricated bolts.
C. Remove the excess corrosion inhibitor that squeezes out of the connection.
c. Extra High Voltage (EHV) Fittings—Aluminum
1. EHV Fittings may be required for DOW bus (see design drawings) and are always
required for 345-kV and 500-kV bus.
2. Install EHV fittings using the same method described in 3.5.b or per the
manufacturer's specifications.
3. Bolts shall not extend beyond the edges of the fittings.
d. Copper to Copper Connections:
1. When bronze or copper clamps are used:
a. Clean the contact areas of the clamp and the conductor with a burnishing brush
or a similar approved method.
b. Grease the connecting surfaces with Sanchem NO-OX-ID or other approved
corrosion inhibitor.
C. Make the connections using copper alloy (bronze) or steel-zinc plated grade 5
bolts, two flat washers, one lock washer, and one nut per connection.
Internal Use Only
95-177-6 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power 95-177 Buswork
Tighten bolts as specified in 3.5.A above. Use caution in tightening
lubricated bolts.
d. Remove the excess corrosion inhibitor that squeezes out of the connection.
e. Aluminum to Copper Connections:
1. Clean the contact areas of the conductors and fittings with a stainless steel wire brush to
remove any oxide.
2. Coat all aluminum surfaces with an approved corrosion inhibitor.
3. Use Aluminum Alloy 2024-T4 or Stainless steel-zinc plated Grade 5 bolts, two flat
washers, one lock washer, and one nut per connection. Tighten bolts as specified in
3.4.a above. Use caution in tightening lubricated bolts.
4. Remove the excess corrosion inhibitor that squeezes out of the connection.
3.6. Compression (Swaged) Connections
a. Use fittings, tools and dies supplied by the same manufacturer.
b. Make connections in strict compliance with the instructions of the manufacturer.
3.7. Aluminum Bus Welding
Bolted fittings or compression(Swaged) fittings are the preferred methods of connecting
buswork.Welded connections shall be used only when approved by the project engineer and shall
comply with the following requirements:
a. All welders shall be qualified in compliance with the requirements of the Structural Welding
Code-Aluminum (ANSI -AWS D1.2/D1.2M).
b. Not less than 10 days prior to the start of welding work, the Contractor shall submit to the
Owner, in writing, the names of all qualified welders to be used on the job, the dates they
were qualified and a record of their past three years of experience. Welders who have not
welded on aluminum in the past 6 months shall not be considered qualified.
c. All welds shall be such that they will pass a radiographic test per AWS D1.2/D1.2M.
d. The Contractor shall utilize either the Tungsten Inert-Gas arc process (noted here-in after as
TIG) or the Metal Inert-Gas arc process (noted here-in after as MIG) for all aluminum
welding. The TIG method is recommended when welding pipe 2" in diameter and smaller.
The MIG method is recommended for pipe diameters larger than 2",plates and other shapes.
e. In addition to the requirements stated herein, all aluminum welding shall be done in strict
conformance with the latest recommendations of the American Welding Society and the
Aluminum Association.
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-177-7

95-177 Buswork Idaho Power
f. Prior to welding aluminum remove oil and grease using an organic solvent such as acetone or
a strong soap. Rinse and dry the parts.After removing oil and grease remove oxidation with a
stainless steel wire brush that has only been used for aluminum. Do not use iron or brass wire
brushes, emery cloth or other devices which can contaminate the aluminum.All surfaces
shall then be wiped just prior to welding with a clean, dry cloth to remove solvent scum and
any moisture that may be present.
g. The shielding gas used for all aluminum welding shall be commercially prepared and shall be
certified as being a welding grade and purity. The gas shall be one hundred percent(100%)
argon, or a mixture of seventy-five percent(75%)helium and twenty-five percent(25%)
argon for MIG and one hundred percent(100%) argon for TIG.
h. Type ER4043 filler metal shall be used for all aluminum welding, except for those isolated
cases where the base metal is other than types (356, 6061, or 6063)normally used in the
electrical power industry. The Contractor shall contact the Owner for the correct filler metal
in those special cases.
i. A major cause of poor aluminum welds is internal impurities and external contamination of
the filler metal. The Contractor shall use only the highest quality filler metal. It shall be
stored in a dry, warm,uniform-temperature storage area. The original carton shall not be
opened until the filler metal is actually needed for welding.
j. Filler metal rod for the TIG process shall be kept in a container that is kept closed except
while removing the rods.
k. Filler metal wire for the MIG process shall be uniform in diameter, of a suitable temper, free
from slivers, scratches,inclusions,kinks waves or sharp bends and spooled so that it is free to
unwind without restriction. Proper pitch and cast shall also be maintained to prevent
wandering of the wire as it emerges from the electrode gun. Wire left on the machine
overnight shall be sealed tightly to prevent contamination.
Wire left on the machine that is not scheduled for use in less than 24 hours shall be returned
to its original carton and tightly sealed.
1. Filler metal that, in the judgment of the Owner, is unsuitable for the work shall be
immediately removed from the job.
in. The edges of the materials to be butt-welded together shall be prepared in conformance with
the data tables and joint design drawings of Table 69.14, Table 69.16 and Figure 69.22 of
Chapter 69,Welding Handbook RP60 of the American Welding Society. Where other than
butt-weld joints are to be made, if joint details are not shown on the drawings the Contractor
shall submit proposed joint designs for approval to the Owner.
n. If deemed necessary, the Owner will select welds that shall be radiographically tested by a
certified, approved testing laboratory. The results, comments and recommendations shall be
Internal Use Only
95-177-8 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power 95-177 Buswork
sent to the Owner. Initial testing costs shall be borne by the Owner. The cost of retesting
welds that have tested unsatisfactory shall be borne by the Contractor.
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-177-9

95-177 Buswork Idaho Power
Internal Use Only
95-177-10 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power
CHAPTER
95-178 Switches and Fused
Disconnects Tq!)Ml%
1. General
1.1. Summary
a. This section covers the procurement and installation of high voltage air break switches and
fuses for Idaho Power stations rated for 15kV to 230kV and current ratings up to 2000 amps.
This specification covers group operated air-break switches, hook-stick disconnects and
fused disconnects.
b. The Owner will procure all switches and fuses,including support structures(see specification
95-137), mounting hardware and grounding materials, unless noted otherwise. Refer to
specification 95-175, Installation Of Owner-Furnished Products.
1.2. Submittals
a. The switch manufacturer shall submit properly scaled approval drawings in AutoCAD.dwg
format for each switch to be supplied. Drawings shall clearly show the locations and sizes of
all mounting holes as well as the specific hardware required for mounting the switch to the
supporting structure.
1. The weight of the switch shall be clearly shown on the drawings.
2. The drawings shall clearly indicate the dimensions of the switch when open as well as
when closed.
b. The manufacturer shall provide complete installation instructions for each switch to be sup-
plied. Instructions shall include detailed instructions for properly adjusting the switch.
1. An installation list shall be included in the instruction book. See 2.3.0. and 2.3.P.
2. Instructions for properly slinging and lifting the switches shall be included.
c. Complete ANSI and NEMA test results shall be furnished upon request.
2. Products
2.1. General
a. High voltage air break switches shall be designed, manufactured and tested in accordance
with the latest rating and manufacturing standards of the IEEE,ANSI and NEMA(IEEE
C37.30.1)
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-178-1

95-178 Switches and Fused Disconnects Idaho Power
b. The IEEE,ANSI and NEMA standards for high voltage air break switches are to be regarded
as the minimum standards for the purpose of these specifications.
2.2. Service Conditions
a. All switches shall be suitable for outdoor, unsheltered service and the usual service
conditions described in ANSI Standard C37.30. except:
1. The altitude may be as high as 5500 ft.
2. Wind loads should be considered for 90 mi/h gusts.
3. The ice-breaking rating shall be 3/4".
4. The vertical terminal loading, F4, for 123-170kV switches rated for 600-1600 amps
shall be increased from 110 pounds to 175 pounds.
b. Switches shall be designed and manufactured so that no maintenance is required over the
expected life of the device.
2.3. General Requirements
a. All high voltage air break switches shall be designed and manufactured for a minimum
service life of forty years under normal service conditions as described above.
b. High voltage air break switches shall be capable of operating for a minimum of 1000
complete open and close operating cycles.
c. All contacts shall be self-cleaning as the switch is opened and closed.
d. All copper parts of an aluminum switch must be hot dip tin plated and shall be bolted to the
aluminum with type S316 stainless steel hardware. Type S301 3,000 pound compression
washers and S316 flat washers are to be used under the bolt head and the nut.Mating surfaces
are to be properly cleaned and coated with an oxide inhibiting compound that shall remain
stable at a temperature of 3000.
e. Contacts which require grease or other lubrication for proper operation are not acceptable.
f. Hinge joints that require grease or other lubrication for proper operation are not acceptable
unless they are threaded joints with approved"O"rings or other approved positive methods
of sealing.
g. Springs in the current carrying portion of the switch shall be arranged so that they do not
carry current. They shall have suitable ice shields.
h. All switches shall be furnished with minimum standard strength porcelain station post
insulators unless otherwise specified in the inquiry or purchase order.
Internal Use Only
95-178-2 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power 95-178 Switches and Fused Disconnects
i. All switches shall be crated and packaged so as to protect the insulator and the equipment
from potential damage that could occur during shipping.
j. Insulators shall be ASA-70 gray glaze.
k. Insulators for 69kV and below switches shall have 3 inch bolt circles.
1. Insulators for 115kV and above switches shall have 5 inch bolt circles.
m. Terminal pads shall be drilled according to NEMA Standards.
n. Switch base and operating controls shall be furnished to fit the support structure specified by
Idaho Power,prints of which will be furnished with inquiry or purchase order.
o. A stainless-steel name plate shall be affixed to each pole of the switch. The name plate shall
have all the information required by the latest version of IEEE C37.30.
p. Installation list- Components and parts shipped detached for field assembly shall be
described in an installation list and tagged with proper identification so there will be no
confusion at the time of receipt, handling, storage or the installation of the switch. These
components or parts shall be attached to a main switch pole or poles for shipment.
q. Installation list- The installation list shall be included in the instruction book and shall
include the following:
• An itemized list of all hardware necessary for the installation of the switch.
• The quantity and catalog number of each item.
• A list of all parts due for complete shipment.
• Purchase order number.
• The operate rod shall be clearly marked to identify it with the switch with which
it belongs.
2.4. Group Operated Air-Break Switches
a. All group operated switches shall be furnished with arcing horns of stainless steel or silicon
bronze rod. Hard drawn copper rod is not acceptable.
b. All group operated switches shall be furnished with a gear type operation mechanism with a
gear ratio of 30:1 unless specified otherwise. Swing handle operate mechanisms shall not be
used unless specifically stated in the inquiry and purchase order.
c. Controls for group operated switches shall be furnished with stainless steel outboard
bearings, guide bearings when necessary (plastic is not acceptable), lower locking plate and
gear handle. Each switch phase shall have open and close stops, adjustable and self-locking.
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-178-3

95-178 Switches and Fused Disconnects Idaho Power
d. Bearing housings shall be sufficiently sealed to prevent water intrusion into the bearing
rolling elements.
e. Sleeve type bearings are not acceptable.
f. Group operated switches shall have an open-close indicator on the vertical operating pipe
near the operating handle or gear. Gear handles shall have a prominent indicator to show the
proper direction of the rotation handle.
g. Flexible,braided copper ground lead shall be furnished for each operating handle. The lead
shall be a minimum of two feet long and have a cross-sectional area equivalent to 4/0 kcmil.
h. All control fittings for use on pipe will have a hardened self-piercing set screw, minimum
3/8" diameter, of rust resistant alloy.
2.5. Hook Stick Type Switches
a. Hook-stick operated switches must have a positive blade latch in the closed position to
prevent the switch from opening due to fault currents or vibration.
b. The opening eye of hook-stick operated switches must provide pry-out leverage to facilitate
opening of the switch without necessitating excessive thrusting action on the eye.
c. Hook-stick operated switches must close in correct alignment regardless of the direction from
which the closing thrust is applied.
d. Hook-stick operated switches shall be supplied with 90'blade stops unless specifically stated
in the inquiry and purchase order.
2.6. Fuse Holders and Fuses
a. Fuse holders shall be capable of withstanding three full fault operations before replacement is
needed.
b. Holder removal socket shall accommodate standard or bayonet head hook stick.
c. Fuses and holders shall be designed so that a fault causes to the fuse to drop out to the open
position.
d. Fuses shall be designed and constructed to reduce dielectric stress levels below which corona
is initiated.
e. All hinge assemblies shall be self-locking.
Internal Use Only
95-178-4 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power 95-178 Switches and Fused Disconnects
3. Execution
3.1. Installation
a. Switch operator platforms or mats shall be installed for all switches as shown on the
drawings. Switch handles and platforms shall be grounded in conformance with the drawings
and as specified in specification 95-179, Station Grounding.
b. Mechanical interlocks, electrical interlocks or key interlocks shall be completely installed as
the drawings require. The Contractor shall be responsible for the final adjustment of the
interlock schemes.
c. Switches, disconnects and fuses shall be installed in conformity with Idaho Power drawings
and the manufacturer drawings which show the mounting and installation requirements. The
Contractor shall review the manufacturer drawings and shall provide miscellaneous brackets,
bearings, couplings, nuts,bolts, lock washers and other necessary hardware to completely
install the switches, disconnects and fuses, unless noted other-wise.
d. The Contractor shall be responsible for all modifications to the steel structures in order to
install a complete,working switch, disconnect and/or fuse assembly. Final touch-up painting
shall be applied where required. Use approved Zinc-rich spray as required by specification
95-137, Structural Steel.
e. Switch handles and operating platforms shall be arranged and aligned to ensure the proper
switching of the unit from the ground. Materials shall be lifted into place using proper rigging
and hardware to protect the equipment from damage and all personnel from personal injury.
f. Final adjustments and settings shall be made by the Contractor to produce a complete,
working, operable assembly.A group operated air break switch, when properly adjusted
should close all phases at the same time.When closed,all blades should be completely closed
and rotated fully into proper position. Group operated air break switches shall be inspected
and approved by Idaho Power operations personnel prior to piercing or"spiking"
the switches.
g. Electrical clearances - the final switch installation must meet all IEEE and Owner electrical
clearances as specified in specification 95-177 when the switch is open and closed and at all
positions in between.
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-178-5

95-178 Switches and Fused Disconnects Idaho Power
Internal Use Only
95-178-6 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power
CHAPTER
95-179 Station Grounding Tq!)=10)9
1. General
1.1. Summary
a. This section covers requirements for a complete grounding installation for stations and
communications sites, as shown on the drawings.
b. This section includes the grounding system for all elements of the installation including but
not limited to the following:
• Metallic structures
• Shield wires
• Lightning arrestors
• Reclosers
• Circuit breakers
• Regulators
• Meter cabinets
• Potential and current transformers
• Power transformers
• Fence
• Control buildings and panels
• Switch platforms
• Communication towers
• Cables
• Surface trench
• Dead end pier foundations
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-179-1

95-179 Station Grounding Idaho Power
c. Grounding shall be established in accordance with the latest edition of IEEE 80, Guide for
Safety in Substation Grounding, and the National Electrical Code.
d. The Owner will provide the grounding conductor,the exothermic weld shots and the lugs for
grounding the project. The Contractor will be responsible for providing the molds required to
complete the project. Materials specified herein are for informational purposes. Refer to
specification 95-175, Installation of Owner-Furnished Products.
1.2. Submittals—N/A
1.3. Definitions
a. Grounded Conductor(Neutral):A system or circuit conductor that is intentionally grounded.
b. Grounding Conductor:A conductor used to connect equipment or the grounded circuit of a
wiring system to a grounding electrode system(the main station ground grid).
2. Products
2.1. Conductor
a. Direct Buried: Use bare, stranded-copper conductor, tinned stranded copper, and stranded-
copperweld conductor. The conductor sizes and specific locations are shown on the drawings.
b. Metalclad Switchgear and Interior Equipment: Use stranded copper with green, THHN/
THWN insulation.
c. Cable Trays and Cable Trenches: Use bare, stranded-copper conductor.
d. Communication Towers: Use individually tinned, stranded-copper conductor.
e. External ground wire: Use bare, stranded copperweld conductor outside the station fence to
deter theft.
2.2. Splices and Connections
a. Below ground splices and connections: Use exothermic or swage type connectors.
b. Above ground connections: Exothermic, swage or mechanical (compression) 3.1.a—clarified
depth of buried grounding conductor connections are all acceptable.All connectors shall
have ratings equivalent to or greater than the ground grid conductor.
2.3. Ground Rods
a. Ground rods shall be 5/8 or 3/4 inch x 10 feet copperweld rods.
2.4. Grounding Mats
a. Ground mats shall be 6"X 6" X#6 X#6 preformed, copper mats.
Internal Use Only
95-179-2 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power 95-179 Station Grounding
2.5. Equipment Ground Plates
a. Equipment ground plates used for grounding communications towers to foundation rein-
forcing steel shall be ERICO B 164-2Q or LP-C682.
2.6. Conductive Concrete
a. Conductive concrete shall contain fly ash meeting ASTM C 618 requirements.
3. Execution
3.1. Installation
a. The station grounding conductor is typically installed 15 inches below the finish grade of the
yard surface or approximately 19" below the top of the 4" of the finish grade crushed rock
described in IPC Specification 95-116 21b5. Grounding conductor may be installed at a
greater depth to avoid conflicts with the surface trench. Communication site ground
conductor shall be installed 30 inches below grade.
b. A 7/16 inch(minimum)bare, stranded copperweld conductor shall be buried, as described
above, 3' outside the station fence. This ground wire shall be connected to the internal station
ground grid at each fence corner and every 50 feet(maximum).
c. Grounding conductors shall be straight and free from kinks, breaks and other damage after
installation. Conductors shall be thoroughly cleaned prior to making all connections.
All connections shall be inspected by the Owner prior to burial.
d. In existing substations or where existing ground grids and underground circuits are present,
trenching shall be by hand from a depth of 6 inches above to a depth of 6 inches below circuit
and ground grid elevation.The Contractor may proceed with machine excavations at all other
depths where space and access permit.
e. Damaged cable shall be excavated in both directions back to the nearest connection point and
replaced with new cable. Labor and material costs for replacing damaged cable shall be the
responsibility of the Contractor.
f. All intersections of grounding cables shall be connected together.All taps and ground rods
shall be connected with separate connectors to the main ground grid. Below grade grounding
connections shall be exothermic or swage type as specified herein and indicated on drawings,
Bills of Material, and Material requests.All dirt shall be removed from the splice area, and
care shall be taken to ensure the conductors are clean and dry just prior to making the
connection. Each connection shall be inspected and approved before the trench may be
backfilled.All molds required to make exothermic connections shall be furnished by
the Contractor.
g. Ground rods shall be driven full length or to refusal.At refusal the rod shall be cut and
connected as if the rod were driven full length. The Owner shall be informed immediately of
all rods that were not driven full length. The location of ground rods will be shown on the
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-179-3

95-179 Station Grounding Idaho Power
drawings. Connect ground rods to the main ground grid using an exothermic or swage
type connection.
h. Installing ground rods in rock: Where ground rods are specified and solid or stratified rock is
encountered, the Contractor shall auger a hole 10.5 feet deep, unless otherwise stated, and at
least 4 inches in diameter. Ground rods shall be placed in the hole and supported at the center.
Water shall be used to fill the hole to 1/3 its depth.A granular grade of bentonite shall be
slowly poured into the hole. Water and bentonite shall be alternated until the hole is filled.
The material shall be thoroughly tamped full depth to eliminate voids and ensure proper
compaction. Communication sites shall have ground rod holes filled with conductive
concrete in place of the bentonite solution.
i. Grounding mats shall be installed where personnel stand to operate switching devices such as
air break switches, ground switches, hook operated disconnect and fused switches, and bus
disconnect switches. The location of ground mats will be shown on the drawings.
Ground mats are installed 6" below finished grade.
j. After installing the below grade station ground conductor,the trench shall be backfilled with
earth or other low resistivity backfill material per IPC specification 95-116. Do not backfill
with sand, gravel, or crushed rock. The backfill shall be thoroughly compacted.
Communication sites shall have the first 4 inches of trench backfilled with
conductive concrete.
k. All equipment and all steel structures shall be connected to the ground system as shown on
the drawings. This includes,but is not limited to, all panels,junction boxes and auxiliary
equipment. Even though metallic junction boxes and yard aluminum boxes are mechanically
fastened to the steel or aluminum yard structures, a bonding cable shall be installed to
provide a supplemental electrical ground.
1. Paint, rust or other non-conducting materials shall be completely removed from the contact
surfaces and these surfaces coated with oxide-inhibiting compound(NO-OX-ID)before
making ground connections. Holes drilled in the structures to fasten ground cables shall be
regalvanized in accordance with specification 95-137, Structural Steel.All unpainted or
ungalvanized metal surfaces remaining after the ground connection has been made shall be
restored to its original finish.
in. The Contractor shall neatly train conductors to equipment along the face of the footing or
structural steel, following all surfaces closely to the point of connection. Conductors running
to equipment shall be supported and secured with cable fasteners at intervals no greater than
5 feet.
n. Exothermic molds shall be used in strict compliance with the manufacturer's instruction.
Exothermic molds shall not be used for more connections than recommended by the
manufacturer. Material, such as "duck putty," shall not be used on molds to prevent material
from flowing out.
Internal Use Only
95-179-4 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power 95-179 Station Grounding
3.2. Metallic Structures
a. Above ground connections to structures or equipment may be exothermic or mechanical.
3.3. Equipment
a. Circuit breakers, transformers, regulators, and reactor cases shall be grounded through their
ground pads with exothermic, swaged, or compression type lugs. Each equipment item shall
be attached to the main ground grid at a minimum of two locations from opposite sides or
corners of the equipment.
3.4. Metalclad Switchgear
a. Metalclad switchgear shall be grounded to the station ground grid at its ground pads with
exothermic, swaged,or compression type lugs.The switchgear shall be attached to the station
ground grid at a minimum of two locations.
b. If a frame-earth ground protective relay(64) is utilized to protect the metalclad switch-gear
from an internal fault the switchgear requires very precise grounding procedures as follows:
1. Connect insulated ground leads from the metalclad assembly ground bus through cur-
rent transformers to the station ground grid. Connection of an overcurrent relay on the
secondary of the current transformers to detect phase to ground faults shall be as shown.
2. All current transformer secondary neutrals in use shall be grounded at the Control
Building.
3. The primary and secondary neutrals of all local service transformers and all potential
transformers shall be grounded to the station ground bus and cannot be connected to the
metalclad frame. If distribution-type transformers are used and they are mounted with
their case making contact with the metalclad frame, care shall be taken to use a
transformer which does not have an internal neutral to case connection. If the neutral
cannot be disconnected from the case of the transformer,then the transformer case shall
be insulated from the metalclad frame.
4. The potheads for incoming cables shall be insulated from the metalclad frame. These
insulated potheads shall be grounded to the station ground bus.
5. The metal sheath of control cables shall be insulated from the metalclad frame. They
shall be grounded to the station ground bus.
6. Primary and secondary neutrals of other equipment shall be insulated from the
metalclad frame and grounded to the station ground bus.
7. The metalclad ground bus shall be grounded in two places to the station ground grid.
These connections to the station ground grid shall be made with 600 volt-insulated
conductors at each end of the metalclad.
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-179-5

95-179 Station Grounding Idaho Power
8. There shall be two and only two connections made to the metalclad frame, one
connection at each end. These two grounding cables shall go through a current trans-
former to the station ground bus. The CTs will be mounted in the metalclad cubicles.
9. Single conductor power cable sheaths shall be insulated from the metalclad frame and
the sheath grounded to the station ground. 3/C PILC/Neoprene covered and 3/CPILC/
Polyethylene covered power cable sheaths are automatically grounded through the
pothead ground.
3.5. Vault Grounding
a. Concrete vaults shall be grounded in 2 places by passing 2/0 stranded copper conductor
through openings in opposite walls.
b. Each copper ground shall be connected to either a station ground(if inside or within 50' of
the station ground) or to a ground rod installed as described above in 3.l.g.
c. Install a 2/0 stranded copper grounding conductor around the perimeter of the interior of the
vault within 24" of the top of the vault.
d. Connect all noncurrent-carrying metal parts and any metallic raceway grounding bushings to
the 2/0 stranded copper grounding conductor.
e. Connect concentric neutrals and shield grounding clamps to the stranded 2/0 copper
grounding conductor with#6 AWG bare copper grounding conductor.
f. Make connections of grounding conductors fully visible and accessible.
3.6. Cable Trench
a. All cable trenches shall be grounded regardless of station voltage.
b. Install 2/0 (minimum) stranded bare copper grounding conductor shall be installed as high as
possible on each wall of the trench. The cable trench ground conductor shall be supported at
least once in each section of trench.
c. Both trench grounds shall be connected to the main station ground grid at each location
where the trench crosses the main ground grid or every 50 feet maximum, whichever is less.
d. Connect all noncurrent-carrying metal parts, including cable trench lids, and any metallic
raceway grounding bushings to the grounding conductor with#2 AWG bare copper
(minimum) conductor.
3.7. Buildings
a. Provide a single looped 2/0 minimum copper ground conductor for grounding of the cable
tray, panels, load centers, battery charger, and other equipment in the building. Install the
grounding conductor in the building cableway, overhead cable tray, or floor trench.
The looped conductor shall be connected to the station ground grid in two locations.
Internal Use Only
95-179-6 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power 95-179 Station Grounding
b. Metal buildings shall be grounded in two places with 2/0 minimum copper ground conductor.
1
3.8. Control Relay Panels
a. Surge ground bars on the control panels shall be connected to the main ground cable with a
#2 (minimum) insulated copper cable. Surge protection devices (MOVs), cable shields,relay
case surge grounds, and panel 120-volt ac receptacle grounds shall terminate on the surge
ground bars.
3.9. Control and Instrumentation Cables
a. Control Cable Shielding: Ground the shields at both ends to reduce electric field and
magnetic field induced transients on the cables. Control cable shields shall be grounded at the
control panel surge ground bars and at the field equipment.
b. Instrumentation Cable Shielding: Ground the shields at one end, preferably where the signal
equipment is grounded to eliminate shield currents (control panel surge ground bars). Expose
the shield a minimum of 1 inch at termination to the field equipment (ungrounded end) and
apply heat shrink tubing.
3.10. Lightning Arresters
a. Station type arresters: Provide 2/0 (minimum)bare copper conductor leads. Leads for
lightning arresters that protect transformers shall be as short as practical and shall go directly
from each arrester to the transformer tank or manufacturer supplied ground bus. If a separate
neutral current transformer is used, the neutral conductor shall not be grounded between the
neutral bushing terminal and the current transformer.
b. Distribution type arresters: Connect arresters directly to the station ground with 2/0 stranded
(minimum) copper conductor.
3.11. Disconnects, Air Break Switch Frames, and Transformers
a. Install a 2/0 bare copper conductor from each piece of equipment and connect to the station
grid ground conductor bolted to the structure. Secure the grounding conductor with cable
fasteners at intervals no greater than 5 feet.
b. Instrument Transformers: Route the neutral conductor to follow the AC input cable routing as
close as possible to limit the impedance.
1. Current Transformers: Bond current transformer secondary circuit neutrals to the
ground grid at one point only, where the yard cables connect to the terminal blocks at
the control relay panel.
2. Potential Transformers: Bond the primary circuit neutral (with bare copper wire)
directly to the structure grounding conductor or the station ground grid conductor. Bond
the secondary circuit neutrals to the ground grid at one point only,where the yard cables
connect to the terminal blocks at the control relay panel.
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-179-7

95-179 Station Grounding Idaho Power
c. Local Service Transformers: Ground the primary circuit neutral directly to the structure
grounding conductor or the station ground grid conductor. When distribution type trans-
formers are used for AC local service and instrument potentials, ground the secondary circuit
neutral at the transformer location only. When distribution type transformers are used for
potential transformer service only, ground as specified for potential transformers.
3.12. Down Guy Anchors
a. Guy wire anchors inside the station fence shall be bonded to the station ground grid.
Guy wire anchors buried outside the station fence and ground grid shall be insulated from the
station ground by means of a fiberglass rod.
3.13. Distribution Neutrals and Static Wires for Overhead Feeder
Get-away Poles
a. Distribution neutrals and static wires for overhead feeder get-away poles at station sites shall
be grounded the station ground grid by a stranded copper conductor brought down the pole
and buried from the bottom of the pole to the station ground grid. These conductors shall be
connected to the station ground grid inside the fence (not the perimeter ground)with an
exothermic or swaged type connection. Install a 10-foot section of plastic molding to cover
the vertical portion of the ground conductor on the pole from 18 inches below grade level so
that personnel cannot directly touch these wires. Contact Station engineer to determine size
of conductor.
3.14. Fence
a. The station fence, including the gates in any position, shall be grounded to the perimeter
ground conductor buried three (3) feet outside the fence as shown on the drawings.
The following fence parts shall be bonded to the perimeter ground conductor with 7/16"DSA
copperweld ground conductor or soft-drawn bare copper as specified on the drawings:
1. Each corner post
2. Every fifth line post
3. Each gate post
b. The fence fabric, top rail and strands of barbed wire at the top shall be grounded. The 7/16"
DSA copperweld ground conductor shall be connected to the post with a U-bolt connector,
continued up the post, and terminated at the top rail with a U-bolt connector.A#6 soft drawn
copper conductor shall be connected to the end of the 7/16" DSA copperweld ground
conductor at the U-bolt connector and routed to each barbed wire strand.Attach the ground to
each of the barbed wire strands with split bolt connectors.
c. Gates are to be grounded to each gatepost with a 3/4" copper braid and Burndy type GAR or
equal fittings on the gate frame. The barbed wire strands above each gate shall be grounded
in the same manner as the barbed wire strands above the main fence. Personnel gates are to
be grounded to the supporting posts with a 3/4" copper braid.
Internal Use Only
95-179-8 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power 95-179 Station Grounding
d. All external fences shall be isolated from the station fence and main ground grid.
1
e. High strength nylon ties shall be used for fastening ground conductor to items listed in part A
above. Ties shall be UV resistant, have a tensile strength no less than 120 lbs, and be black
in color.
f. When the gate swings outside the yard, an additional 7/16" copperweld wire shall be
installed. This ground wire shall extend three feet beyond the extents of the opened gate and
shall be attached to the ground grid by exothermic or swage connections. This is a minimum
requirement.Additional ground wire may be shown on the grounding plan drawing and shall
be installed as indicated.
3.15. Dead End Foundations
a. The anchor bolt cages of dead end foundations shall be grounded to the rebar cages using 2/0
(minimum) soft drawn copper conductor.
3.16. Communications Microwave Towers
a. Grounding of communications towers is primarily utilized to mitigate lightning damage, and
divert lightning energy to ground before it travels into the building or the
communications electronics.
b. Install individually tinned copper conductor(2/0 minimum) as shown on the drawings for
work on a communication tower and its associated equipment.
1. Each conductor that terminates on a communication tower leg shall be exothermically
welded to the leg.
2. A special "Y" exothermic mold shall be used when splicing another conductor into the
existing communication ground grid.
3. Sharp bends in the grounding conductor add inductance and will cause lightning energy
to look for an easier path to get to ground. Therefore, the bending radius of any
grounding conductor shall be no less than 8 inches.
c. Conductive concrete shall be used as the first 4 inches of backfill once the ground conductor
has been laid into the trench and exothermically welded to the ground rods. The conductive
concrete shall be placed dry and then covered with backfill. Do not step on the ground
conductor near the exothermic connections to ground rods. This can introduce sharp bends
and, therefore, inductance to the conductor.
d. All tower foundation rebar and anchor bolts need to be electrically bonded together to create
a Ufer ground to prevent the risk of lightning flash-over inside the concrete, which could
cause cracks by turning moisture in the concrete to instant steam.All rebar shall have at least
4 inches of concrete around it to avoid hot spots where lightning current could spark directly
to ground causing cracks in the concrete. Tower foundation grounding shall be as follows:
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-179-9

95-179 Station Grounding Idaho Power
1. One 4-hole cast ground plate shall be utilized in the foundation for each tower leg. The
cast ground plate shall be cast flush with the top of concrete and exothermically welded
to the reinforcing steel using 2/0 individually tinned copper conductor. Install bolts in
unused ground plate holes.
2. As an alternative to connecting the anchor bolts to the reinforcing bars, interconnect
reinforcing bars in concrete tower foundations to other metallic structures to be cast in
the concrete utilizing#4 soft drawn black iron wire. Clamp wires to the anchor bolts
and to the rebar with high-tension bands.
3.17. Miscellaneous
a. Bond together system neutrals, service equipment enclosures, exposed noncurrent-carrying
metal parts of electrical equipment, metal raceways, ground conductor in raceways and
cables, receptacle ground connections, and metal piping systems in conformance with the
National Electrical Code.
b. Extend and connect ground conductors to ground bus in all equipment containing a ground
bus. Connect the enclosures of equipment containing a ground bus to the bus. Bolt
connections to the equipment ground bus. Grounding conductor sizes shall be as shown on
the drawings and as required by the National Electrical Code.
c. Medium Voltage Shielded Power Cables: Ground the shield at both ends of the cable with the
specified waterproof shield grounding kit.
d. Neutral conductors for underground feeder power cables shall be installed along with the
cables in the duct to prevent induction heating of steel sweeps and rebar generated by phase
imbalances.
Internal Use Only
95-179-10 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power
CHAPTER
95-180 Lighting TDMIK)
1. General
1.1. Summary
a. This section covers the work necessary for the installation of lighting systems.
b. Because this specification refers to indoor lighting specified by Stations Control Design and
outdoor/yard lighting specified and ordered by Stations Structural Design, this specification
is divided into two distinct sections.
c. Unless noted otherwise, all luminaires and accessories to be installed in or on the Control
Building shall be furnished by the Contractor.
d. Outdoor/yard lighting, support structures, anchor bolts (except for pre-cast concrete
foundations), conduit, wiring, and other items essential to the installation of a complete and
working system shall be furnished by the Owner,unless noted otherwise. Concrete and rebar
for cast-in-place foundations and gravel used for back-fill will be provided by the Contractor.
Miscellaneous hardware for mounting will be provided by the Contractor.
e. Refer to the design drawings for specific emergency yard lighting installation details.
1.2. Definitions
a. Luminaire—a complete lighting unit consisting of a lamp or lamps together with the parts
designed to distribute the light,to position and protect the lamps, and to connect the lamps to
the power.
2. Indoor Lighting
2.1. Submittals—N/A
2.2. UL Compliance
a. Materials manufactured within the scope of Underwriters Laboratories shall conform to UL
Standards and have an applied UL listing mark.
3. Indoor Lighting Products
3.1. Luminaires
a. Specific requirements relative to the execution of the work of this section are noted on
control building indoor lighting plan drawings or on emergency yard lighting drawings.
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-180-1

95-180 Lighting Idaho Power
4. Indoor Lighting Execution
4.1. Luminaires
a. General:
1. Install luminaires in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
2. Provide proper hangers,pendants, and canopies as necessary for a complete installation
that meets any specified seismic requirements.
3. Provide additional ceiling bracing, hanger supports, and other structural reinforcements
to the building that are required to safely mount the luminaires.
4. Install the luminaires plumb and level.
5. Mounting heights shown for wall mounted or pendant mounted luminaires are
measured from the bottom of the luminaires to the finished floor or finished grade,
whichever is applicable.
b. Pendant Mounted:
1. Provide swivel type hangers and canopies to match the luminaires, unless otherwise
noted.
2. Space single-stem hangers on continuous-row, fluorescent luminaires 48 inches
(nominal) apart.
3. Provide twin-stem hangers on single luminaires.
c. Control Building:
1. Install luminaires symmetrically where possible.
2. Locate luminaires so as to avoid conflict with other building systems or blockage of
luminaires light output.
d. Junction boxes:
1. Locate junction boxes a minimum of 1 foot from the luminaires.
2. In concealed locations, install junction boxes to be accessible by removing
the luminaires.
e. Wiring and Conduit:
1. Provide wiring of the temperature rating required by the luminaires.
Internal Use Only
95-180-2 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power 95-180 Lighting
2. Provide PVC, IMC (or EMT indoors) and liquidtight conduit as indicated by the
emergency yard lighting design drawings.
4.2. Cleaning Following Construction
a. Remove all labels and other markings, except UL listing marks.
b. Wipe the luminaires inside and out to remove construction dust.
c. Clean the luminaires'plastic lenses with anti-static cleaners only.
d. Touch up all painted surfaces of the luminaires and support with matching paint ordered
from manufacturer.
5. Outdoor/Yard Lighting
5.1. Submittals—N/A
5.2. UL Compliance
a. Materials manufactured within the scope of Underwriters Laboratories shall conform to UL
Standards and have an applied UL listing mark.
6. Outdoor/Yard Lighting Products
6.1. Outdoor/Yard Luminaires
a. Luminaires will be provided by the Owner.
b. New outdoor/yard luminaires shall be LED flood type and shall:
1. Comply with UL listing and be suitable for wet/outdoor locations.
2. Be Temperature rated for-40' C to +50' C (-40° F to 1220 F).
3. Comply with material restrictions of RoHS (Restriction of Hazardous Substances).
c. New LED outdoor/yard luminaires shall be supplied with knuckle slip-fitter type mounts
sized to attach to 2" (nominal) diameter steel pipe.
d. New LED outdoor/yard luminaires shall be supplied with a 3' long#14/3 power cable.
e. New LED outdoor/yard luminaires shall be mounted to new or existing poles or support
structures at an elevation of 25'unless directed otherwise by the construction drawings.
6.2. Support Structures
a. Steel support poles shall meet the requirements of IPC Construction Specification 95-137
and shall:
1. Be designed and engineered to meet the specific environmental and structural
requirements for the location of the Station.
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-180-3

95-180 Lighting Idaho Power
2. Be 25' in height.
3. Be supplied with a 2" nominal diameter tenon for attachment of luminaire or mounting
arm (bullhorn).
4. Be supplied with a handhole for access at the base of the support pole.
5. Be supplied with a 2-hole NEMA grounding lug.
b. Aluminum support poles shall:
1. Be designed and engineered to meet the specific environmental and structural
requirements for the location of the Station.
2. Be 25' in height.
3. Be supplied with a 2" nominal diameter tenon for attachment of luminaire or mounting
arm (bullhorn).
4. Be supplied with a handhole for access at the base of the support pole.
5. Be supplied with a 2-hole NEMA grounding lug.
c. Mounting plates or attachments shall be designed and constructed with a 2"nominal diameter
vertical tenon or pipe to support the knuckle slip-fitter supplied with the LED luminaire.
6.3. Foundations
a. Cast-in-place concrete foundations shall be constructed as directed in the construction
drawings and shall meet the requirements of IPC Construction Specification 95-125
and shall:
1. Be provided with two 2" conduits to direct cables to the center of the support pole
unless directed otherwise by the construction drawings.
b. Precast concrete foundations shall be constructed as directed in the construction drawings
and shall meet the requirements of IPC Construction Specification 95-126 and shall:
1. Be provided with two 2" conduits (minimum) to direct cables to the center of the
support pole unless directed otherwise by the construction drawings.
2. Be provided with anchor bolts as required to securely mount the support pole per the
pole manufacturer's drawings and specifications.
Internal Use Only
95-180-4 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power 95-180 Lighting
7. OutdoorNard Lighting Execution
7.1. Luminaires
a. General:
1. Install luminaires in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications and the
construction drawings.
2. New LED outdoor/yard luminaires shall be mounted to new or existing poles or support
structures at an elevation of 25'unless directed otherwise by the construction drawings.
b. Light switches:
I. Locate light switch for outdoor/yard luminaires as close as possible to the main gate
support post in a weatherproof box at a minimum height of 4' or as directed by the
construction drawings.
2. Locate light switch for outdoor/yard luminaires inside control building as directed by
the construction drawings.
c. Junction boxes:
I. Locate junction boxes as directed by the construction drawings.
d. Conduit:
I. Provide and install electrical rigid steel conduit(ERSC), electrical metal tubing (EMT)
poly-vinyl chloride (PVC) conduit, flexible metal liquid-tight conduit, and flexible
metal non-liquid tight conduit as indicated by the Station Cable and Conduit Plan
drawings and to meet the requirements of IPC Construction Specification 95-171.
2. Install lighting conduits at the depths required by IPC Construction
Specification 95-171.
e. Replacement of existing luminaires:
I. When required, replace existing luminaires with LED luminaires specific to the
luminaire being replaced.
2. Remove existing ballast mechanisms.
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-180-5

95-180 Lighting Idaho Power
Internal Use Only
95-180-6 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power
CHAPTER
95-181 Electrical Testing 9514%
1. General
1.1. General
a. The Contractor shall perform the testing specified herein in accordance with NETA
acceptance testing specifications.All other testing will be performed by the Owner, unless
noted otherwise.
b. The tests and inspection shall establish that:
1. The equipment is operational within industry and manufacturer's tolerances.
2. All installations operate properly.
3. The equipment is suitable for energization.
4. The installation conforms to the requirements of the Contract Documents.
c. Perform all inspection and electrical tests after the equipment has been installed.
d. Perform tests with the apparatus de-energized whenever feasible.
1.2. Submittals—N/A
2. Products (Not Used)
3. Execution
3.1. General
a. Perform inspections and testing in accordance with industry standards and manufacturer's
recommendations.
b. Adjust mechanisms and moving parts for free mechanical movement.
c. Realign equipment not properly aligned and correct for a level installation.
d. Properly anchor electrical equipment found to be inadequately anchored.
e. Tighten accessible bolted connections, including wiring connections, with calibrated torque
wrench to the manufacturer's recommendations, or as otherwise specified.
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-181-1

95-181 Electrical Testing Idaho Power
f. Clean contaminated surfaces with cleaning solvents as recommended by manufacturer.
1
g. Provide proper lubrication of applicable moving parts.
h. Investigate and repair or replace:
1. Electrical items that fail the tests
2. Active components not operating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions
3. Damaged electrical equipment
i. Electrical Enclosures:
1. Remove foreign material and moisture from the enclosure interior.
2. Vacuum and wipe clean the enclosure interior.
3. Remove any corrosion found on metal surfaces.
4. Repair or replace, as determined by the Owner, door and panel sections with dented
surfaces.
5. Repair or replace, as determined by the Owner, poor fitting doors and panel sections.
6. Repair or replace improperly operating latching, locking, or interlocking devices.
7. Replace missing or damaged hardware.
8. Finish:
a. Provide matching paint and touch up scratches and mars.
b. If required due to excessive damage, as determined by the Owner, refinish the
en-tire assembly.
j. In addition to the requirements specified herein, all Owner-furnished products shall be
inspected by the Contractor for physical damage and proper electrical connection in
accordance with the drawings.
3.2. Metalclad Switchgear
a. Perform a visual and mechanical Inspection for:
1. Insulator damage and contaminated surfaces
2. Proper barrier and shutter installation and operation
3. Proper operation of indicating devices
Internal Use Only
95-181-2 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power 95-181 Electrical Testing
4. Improper blockage of air-cooling passages
5. Proper operation of drawout elements
6. Integrity and contamination of bus insulation systems
7. Check door and device interlocking systems by:
a. Attempting to close the device when the door is in the OPEN position
b. Attempting to open the door when device is in the ON or CLOSED position
8. Check nameplates for proper identification of the equipment title and tag number as
recorded on the latest one-line diagram.
9. Check bus and cable connections for high resistance using a calibrated torque wrench to
check the bolted joints.
10. Check the Control Wiring for:
a. Proper wiring to the local and remote control and protective devices
b. Proper conductor lacing and bundling
C. Proper conductor identification
d. Proper conductor lugs and connections
11. Proper bus phasing from each source, perform phasing check on double-ended
equipment.
3.3. Transformers
a. Make Visual and Mechanical Inspection for:
1. Agreement between the equipment nameplate information and the physical connections
as well as that on the single-line diagram
2. Physical and insulator damage
3. Proper winding connections
4. Defective wiring
5. Bolt torque levels specified by the manufacturer
6. Effective core and equipment grounding
7. Removal of shipping brackets, fixtures, or bracing
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-181-3

95-181 Electrical Testing Idaho Power
8. Tank leaks and proper liquid levels
9. Integrity and contamination of the bus insulation system
10. Verification that the tap-changer is set at the correct ratio for the rated voltage under
normal operating conditions
11. Verification that proper secondary phase-phase and phase-ground voltages are present
after energization and prior to loading
3.4. Low-Voltage Cables, 600 Volts Maximum
a. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
1. Inspect each individual exposed power cable for:
a. Physical damage
b. Proper connection in accordance with the drawings
C. Cable bends not in conformance with the manufacturer's minimum allowable
bending radius where applicable
d. Color coding conforming with the specifications
e. Proper circuit identification
2. Mechanical Connections For:
a. Proper lug type for conductor material
b. Proper lug installation
C. Proper bolt torque levels
3. Shielded Cables For:
a. Proper shield grounding
b. Proper terminations
C. Proper circuit identification
4. Control Cables For:
a. Proper termination
b. Proper circuit identification
Internal Use Only
95-181-4 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power 95-181 Electrical Testing
5. Verify that neutrals and grounds are terminated for the correct operation of protective
devices on cables terminated through window type CTs.
b. Electrical Tests:
1. Insulation Resistance Tests:
a. Use a 1,000-volt do megohm-meter for 600-volt insulated conductors.
b. Test each conductor with respect to ground and to adjacent conductors per the
IEEE 118 procedures for 1 minute.
C. Evaluate ohmic values by comparing results with the results for conductors of
same length and type.
d. Investigate values less than 50 megohms.
2. Use a continuity test with an ohmmeter to ensure proper cable connections.
3.5. Medium-Voltage Cables, 69-kV Maximum
a. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
1. Inspect Each Individual Exposed Cable For:
a. Physical damage plus proper jacket and insulation condition
b. Proper connections in accordance with the single-line diagram
C. Proper shield grounding
d. Proper cable support
e. Proper cable termination
f. Cable bends not in conformance with the manufacturer's minimum allowable
bending radius
g. Proper arc and fireproofing in common cable areas
h. Proper circuit and phase identification
2. Mechanical Connections For:
a. Proper lug types for the conductor materials used
b. Proper lug installation
C. Proper bolt torque in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-181-5

95-181 Electrical Testing Idaho Power
d. Verify that neutrals and grounds are terminated for correct operation of
protective devices on cables terminated through window type CTs
b. Electrical Tests:
1. Insulation Resistance Tests:
a. Perform tests in the presence of the Owner. Test each length of each phase cable
in the system, after installation, with splices and terminations in place but
disconnected from the equipment.
b. Use a megohmmeter of 2,500-volt rating, minimum.
C. Test each cable individually with the remaining cables and shields grounded.
d. Test each conductor with respect to ground and the adjacent conductors in
accordance with the IEEE 118 procedures for 1 minute.
e. Evaluate the ohmic values by comparing them with other conductors of the same
length and type.
f. Investigate values less than 50 megohms.
2. Shield Continuity Tests:
a. Perform a shield continuity test on each power cable by the ohmmeter method.
Record the ohmic value.
b. Investigate values in excess of 10 ohms per 1,000 feet of conductor.
3. High Potential do Tests:
a. Perform the tests in accordance with NEMA WC8 for EPR insulated conductors.
b. Each conductor section is tested with:
Splices and terminations in-place but disconnected from the equipment.
All remaining conductors and shields are grounded in accordance with
IEEE 400.
C. Test each section of the cable individually.
d. Test voltages shall not exceed 80 percent of the cable manufacturer's factory test
value or the maximum test voltage listed below.
Internal Use Only
95-181-6 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power 95-181 Electrical Testing
Insulation Level Rated Cable Voltage (kV) Test Voltage (kV dc)
133% 5 25
133% 15 65
133% 35 100
e. Measurements shall include only the leakage current associated with the
conductor under test and shall not include internal leakage of the test equipment.
f. Record wet and dry bulb temperatures or the relative humidity and temperature.
g. Use a guard-ring or field reduction sphere to suppress corona at disconnected
terminations.
h. Maximum test voltages shall not exceed the limits for terminators specified in
IEEE 48 or the manufacturer's specifications.
i. Apply the test voltage in a minimum of five equal increments until the maximum
acceptable test voltage is reached.
• Increments must not exceed the ac voltage rating of the conductor.
• Record the do leakage current at each step after a constant stabilization time
consistent with system charging current.
j. Raise the conductor to the specified maximum test voltage and hold for 15
minutes or as specified by the conductor manufacturer. Record the do leakage
current at 30 seconds and 1 minute and at 1-minute intervals thereafter.
k. Immediately following the test, ground the conductor for an adequate time
period to drain the insulation stored charge.
1. Test results are evaluated on a pass/fail basis.
3.6. Safety Switches, 600 Volts Maximum
a. Visual and Mechanical Inspection for:
1. Proper blade pressure and alignment
2. Proper operation of the switch operating handle
3. Adequate mechanical support
4. A satisfactory mechanical, operational test verifying that the mechanical interlocking
system operates and sequences properly
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-181-7

95-181 Electrical Testing Idaho Power
3.7. Molded Case Circuit Breakers
a. General: Inspection and testing limited to circuit breakers rated 100 amperes and larger.
b. Visual and Mechanical Inspection for:
I. Proper mounting
2. Proper conductor size
3. Cracked casings
4. Smooth operation
5. Terminals rated for 75 °C insulated conductors
3.8. Vacuum Circuit Breakers, Medium Voltage
a. Visual and Mechanical Inspection
1. Inspect for physical damage and compare the nameplate data with the drawings and
specifications.
2. Inspect the anchorage, alignment, and grounding.
3. Perform all mechanical operational tests on both the circuit breaker and its operating
mechanism.
4. Measure critical dimensions such as the contact gap and wipe as recommended by the
manufacturer. Make adjustments as needed.
5. Check the tightness of bolted connections with a calibrated torque wrench.
3.9. Air Break Switches
a. Visual and Mechanical Inspection
1. Inspect for physical and mechanical condition.
2. Check for proper anchorage and required area clearances.
3. Perform mechanical operator tests in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
4. Check the blade alignment.
5. Inspect all bus connections for proper tightness of bolted bus joints using a calibrated
torque wrench.
Internal Use Only
95-181-8 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power 95-181 Electrical Testing
6. Clean the entire switch using approved methods and materials.
7. Lubricate as required.
3.10. Instrument Transformers
a. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
1. Visually check current and potential transformers for:
a. Cracked insulation
b. Broken leads or defective wiring
C. Proper connections and ratios
d. Adequate clearances
2. Verify Mechanically That:
a. Grounding and shorting connections make good contact.
b. Withdrawal mechanisms and grounding operation,when applicable, operate
properly.
3. Proper primary and secondary fuse sizes for potential transformers have been installed.
4. The proper polarity for proper operation of protective relays has been accomplished.
3.11. Control Panels
a. Visual and Mechanical Inspection for:
1. Proper Contractor-installed interconnections in accordance with the drawings.
2. Proper physical, electrical, and mechanical condition.
3. Proper anchorage, required area clearances,physical damage, and proper alignment.
4. Verifying that all panels and sections are properly painted and free of dents, scratches,
improper fit, and missing hardware.
3.12. Grounding Systems
a. Visual and Mechanical Inspection for:
1. Proper connection and tightness of equipment and circuit grounds in all equipment.
2. Effective transformer core and equipment grounding.
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-181-9

95-181 Electrical Testing Idaho Power
3. Accessible connections to grounding electrodes and for proper fit and tightness.
4. Accessible exothermic-weld grounding connections to verify that molds were fully
filled and proper bonding was obtained.
3.13. Battery Systems
a. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
1. Inspect for physical damage and evidence of corrosion.
2. Check intercell bus link integrity.
3. Confirm that installation complies with drawings and specifications.
3.14. Surge Arresters
a. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
1. Inspect for physical damage and compare nameplate data with the drawings and
specifications.
2. Inspect for proper mounting, adequate clearances, and short lead lengths.
3. Check the tightness of the connections.
4. Check the ground lead on each device for individual attachment to the ground bus or
ground electrode.
3.15. Capacitors
a. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
1. Inspect for physical damage,proper mounting, and required clearances.
2. Compare the nameplate information with the drawings and specifications.
3. Verify that capacitors are electrically connected in the proper configuration.
4. Inspect all bus connections for tightness with a calibrated torque wrench.
3.16. Bus Structures
a. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
1. Inspect bus arrangement for compliance with the drawings.
2. Examine the bus and supports for defects, such as cracked welds, chipped porcelains,
etc.
3. Check the tightness of accessible bolted bus joints with a calibrated torque wrench.
Internal Use Only
95-181-10 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power
CHAPTER
95-182 Antenna, Waveguide,
and Pressurization System 951le
1. General
1.1. Summary
a. This specification covers requirements for a complete antenna,transmission line(wave-guide
and coaxial cable), and pressurization system installation at Owner's communications
facilities.
b. The Owner will provide all major antenna, transmission line, and pressurization system
components, unless noted otherwise. Contractor shall provide all additional incidental
components not listed in the bill of materials.
c. All Contractors performing installation work on antenna,transmission line and pressurization
equipment and(or) systems will test the final assembly and complete an Antenna/
Waveguide/Pressurization checklist and Microwave Path Acceptance Datasheet included in
this section. The Contractor shall complete the form at job completion, and present it to the
Owner at the final inspection.
1.2. General Precautions
a. Only personnel who are skilled and knowledgeable in the removal, installation and
maintenance of antenna supporting structures, antennas, coaxial cable, and waveguide shall
perform work on these systems.
b. When antenna or transmission line work is performed at an existing station, working
equipment may be affected. Every precaution shall be taken to ensure that working
equipment is protected from physical damage, misalignment, movement or interruption.
c. Special care shall be taken when hoisting materials to ensure that material is not raised in
front of working antennas. The Owner shall be advised prior to the start of any work at an
existing station and again advised at the completion of each day's work and at the completion
of the job.An "all-clear" shall be obtained from the Owner before leaving the station in each
case.
d. Extreme care shall be taken during transporting, unpacking, and installation of antennas and
waveguide to prevent damage to the new components. Even minor dents and other
deformations in antennas, rigid or elliptical waveguide, coax, and the flanges or connectors
thereof, as well as in the walls and flanges of the transducers or combining networks will
seriously impair transmission and require replacement.
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-182-1

95-182 Antenna, Waveguide, and Pressurization System Idaho Power
e. The following activities have historically caused damage to existing systems with resulting
degradation of transmission:
1. Workers pulling up containers on hand lines that rub against transmission lines.
2. Workers pulling on transmission line networks while drilling in or around networks.
3. Removing and replacing the antenna feed horn.
4. Loose bolts in waveguide flange.All flanges must be tight to maintain adequate, return
loss and pressure.
1.3. Radiation Hazard on Working Systems
a. Before beginning any work on a working antenna,waveguide system or structure supporting
such a system, the Contractor shall review with the Owner all proposed methods and safety
precautions that the Contractor will take.
b. The Owner shall make available to the Contractor all system power and radiation data along
with various practices which outline precautions and protection for working personnel
involved. These requirements are necessary because all working microwave systems may
present a health hazard from Radio Frequency(RF)radiation. Final responsibility for the
working safety of personnel from these hazards shall rest with the Contractor.
1.4. Selective Removals
a. Selective removals and demolition shall be in accordance with specification 95-115,
Selective Demolition.
b. Antennas and antenna mounting provisions (e.g. 4-1/2" and 2-3/8" vertical mounting pipes
and associated hardware) shall not be removed from the tower unless stated otherwise. This
includes vertical pipe mounts installed on other vertical pipes.
1.5. Documentation
a. The Contractor shall keep all manufacturers' installation/operation information, radio
frequency band sweep results,waveguide and path loss results,Antenna/Waveguide/
Pressurization checklist and other documentation in an orderly manner and shall turn this
information over to Owner after inspection of the completed work. Deviations from
manufacturer's instructions shall be either corrected by the Contractor or accepted by the
Owner prior to final acceptance.
2. Products
2.1. Antenna
a. Several different types of antennas are in use throughout the Owner's system. These include,
but are not limited to, grid dishes, solid dishes, solid dishes with radomes, corner reflectors,
Yagis, arrays, omni-directional and panel antennas. Refer to the Bill of Materials.
Internal Use Only
95-182-2 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power 95-182 Antenna, Waveguide, and Pressurization System
2.2. Transmission Lines
a. The types of communications transmission lines found in the Owner's system include,but are
not limited to; flexible waveguide, elliptical waveguide,rectangular waveguide,rigid coaxial
and flexible coax. These transmission lines can be either pressurized or non-pressurized.
b. Rectangular waveguide, elliptical waveguide and coaxial transmission lines are available for
connecting the antenna to the radio equipment. Rectangular and elliptical waveguides carry
only one polarization of a frequency band and a different size waveguide may be required for
each frequency band.A combination of networks and/or transducers is installed when
required to separate the frequency bands and polarization with the frequency band.
c. Elliptical waveguide is similar to rectangular waveguide in that it is made in different sizes
for each frequency band, and each waveguide can transmit and receive only one polarization
of a frequency band. Elliptical waveguide is usually shipped on a reel, and may be shipped
with or without factory-installed flanges or connectors.
d. Coaxial cable is typically used for microwave systems operating in the 3 GHz and lower
bands. Coaxial cable is shipped on a reel or in a box.
e. Refer to the Bill of Materials.
2.3. Pressurization Systems
a. Air pressure systems consist of three major subsystems:
1. Air dehydrator or compressed nitrogen bottle.
2. Air/gas distribution system.
3. Pressure monitor/alarm system.
b. The Owner typically uses low volume pressurization systems for use with parabolic dish or
UHFNHF systems.
c. Refer to the Bill of Materials.
2.4. Miscellaneous Materials
a. Refer to the Bill of Materials for grounding kits, support elements, and other miscellaneous
components necessary for a complete and functional system.
3. Execution
3.1. Antenna
a. All antennas shall be inspected inside and outside for correct assembly and any possible
damage immediately upon uncrating and before any further work is performed.Any damage
or shortages shall be reported to the Owner. The color of the antenna and antenna radome
cover received shall be verified against the bill of material.
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-182-3

95-182 Antenna, Waveguide, and Pressurization System Idaho Power
b. Care shall be taken at all times to avoid denting or otherwise deforming any parts, as this will
impair the operations of the antenna.All metal antenna surfaces and metal shrouds shall be
free from scratches and impressions. If scratches are minor in nature, they shall be touched-
up according to manufacturer's instructions. Major scratches, denting or other deformations
shall be repaired or replaced at the direction of the Owner.
c. All tools and materials required for the installation of the antennas shall be as specified in the
individual installation instructions or equivalent.
d. If mounts and antennas are being added to an existing guyed tower, the Contractor shall
record vertical tower alignment using a transit prior to installing mounts and antennas,record
findings, and double check alignment to be the same as the start at the completion of the
installation. The Contractor shall forward these readings to the Owner.A copy shall be kept
on site in the job package.
e. All antenna mounts shall be installed plumb.
f. Antennas shall not be stored at the site, either assembled or disassembled, for an extended
period of time to avoid possible damage.
g. The Contractor shall provide a skid or platform to form a sound working area for the
assembly of parabolic and yagi antennas. Flat or gently sloping terrain near the antenna
structure may also be used if precautions are taken to ensure dirt, debris, or moisture does not
accumulate in or on the antenna.
h. The skid on which the dish antenna was shipped and all associated parts shall be unloaded in
an area where the terrain is relatively smooth and level, and as close to the base of the
supporting structure as is practicable. Consideration shall be given to hazards from objects
that may fall or be dropped from the tower,possible interference with construction
operations, etc. In no case will the dish antenna assembly be allowed directly on the ground.
i. Before starting the antenna installation, inspect the interior of the antenna and feed horn, if so
equipped, for the presence of water or, in cold weather, ice or frost. If moisture in any form is
present, it must be removed before the antenna is installed.
j. The antenna,the antenna feed horn, and the antenna feed shall be assembled according to the
antenna manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Inspect the inside of the antenna
and feed horn mounting area for foreign material and remove before attaching the feed horn.
Appropriate care shall be exercised to avoid any damage to the antenna during assembly.
k. Do not shorten any factory cabling harness on antennas. The Owner will supply element
positions for directional antennas, as applicable.
1. The manufacturer's specifications shall be used to determine the correct rigging for hoisting
the antenna. The hoisting procedures shall be reviewed with the Owner to ensure adequate
precautions are taken to protect working service, and the antenna is rigged and hoisted safely.
Internal Use Only
95-182-4 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power 95-182 Antenna, Waveguide, and Pressurization System
Lines used for hoisting the antenna shall be in good repair and of sufficient size to adequately
support the load with a reasonable safety margin.
in. Deploy personnel on the ground to handle the tag lines in the manner best suited to minimize
erratic motion and prevent collision with the tower, other antennas, or other obstacles.
Exercise extreme care to avoid contact with the guy wires when installing antennas on guyed
towers. Wind loading on the antenna can make control while hoisting the antenna difficult,
especially when winds are gusting. Installation of an antenna shall not be attempted unless
wind velocities are calm and weather conditions are expected to remain stable.
n. Ensure that the antenna is installed at the correct transmission center line, azimuth and
polarity as requested by the Owner and/or FCC documentation.Any deviation shall be
reported and cleared with the Owner. The Contractor shall follow manufacturer's instructions
for orienting the antenna and shall have necessary tools available for that purpose.
UHX Red Left U14X Red Right
•M.�. wa u. / rasawess wac.awan...
1 /-- l w...�r1
WSWO&Adv be"
Inew VMW N Ma Iwo) _ AY►VNM N to"nub)
�ra�svrw a w.s.ewq
Figure S:Examples of Dual Polar)ssd Feed Positions with
Wava9uids Hands in Horizontal Plan(applies to UHX and
most other antennas).
o. Do not leave the antenna elevation held solely by either the tubular shipping support or the
tilt adjustment tool.Neither of these is designed to withstand the force created by even
moderate winds blowing against the antenna. The antenna elevation must be locked in place
as specified by the manufacturer for overnight or longer periods.
p. Ensure that anti-seize or locking compound is applied to threads of bolts per the
manufacturer's specifications.
q. If antennas are to be reused, ensure that the covers and cover hardware, shroud,radome, feed,
and all support hardware are available and in good condition. If the antenna has been
in-service at another location and uses stainless steel cover hardware, new cover hardware
shall be used when the cover is installed(stainless steel hardware threads will bind and gall,
preventing the nuts from being loosened or tightened correctly).
r. Antenna covers and radomes shall be installed according to the manufacturer's specifications,
and shall be assembled aligning marking tape or spots where provided by the manufacturer.
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-182-5

95-182 Antenna, Waveguide, and Pressurization System Idaho Power
s. Drawing details of the antenna mounting are general in nature. The Contractor shall be
responsible for providing appropriate offset between the waveguide and the tower structure,
and may need to invert the antenna as required to provide the offset.
3.2. Transmission Line—General
a. The transmission line connects the antenna to the radio transmitter/receiver, is to be
supported at correct intervals, and may have additional protection from ice or falling objects.
Working transmission lines shall not be moved or opened without approval of the Owner.
Thorough knowledge of the radio system, type of transmission line, and manufacturer
specifications is required before performing any work on transmission lines.
b. Waveguide shall not be stored at the site for any extended period of time. The Contractor
shall provide a storage area,which will protect the waveguide from the weather. In no case
will the waveguide be allowed to be stored directly on the ground, or in areas where standing
water is present.
c. Ensure the transmission line is of the type and quantity ordered. Waveguide reel/order labels
shall be removed and given to the Owner at the completion of the installation if the
waveguide is provided by the Contractor.
d. Extreme care shall be taken during transporting, unpacking, and installation of the Wave-
guide to prevent damage to the new waveguide components. Minor dents and other
deformations of both rigid and flexible waveguide, and the flanges thereof, as well as in the
walls and flanges of the transducers or combining networks will seriously impair trans-
mission and require replacement. Each piece shall be examined closely for dents or other
deformations on both the waveguide and flanges.Any piece that has been damaged or has
defects shall be reported to the Owner, and repaired or replaced upon Owner's authorization.
Under no circumstance shall waveguide ever be walked on, stood on, sat on or used as a
support.
e. Contractor shall ensure that all coaxial or waveguide connections meet manufacturer
specifications and that all hardware, including gaskets, are installed correctly and weather
tight.
f. Contractor shall ensure that no foreign material is introduced into, or remains inside the
waveguide system when the installation is complete. Serious impedance discontinuity may
result if this condition is not scrupulously observed. This includes, but not limited to nuts,
bolts,putty,metallic filings, solder runs, dirt or water. Filings from cutting operations shall be
kept out of the waveguide system. If filings do get inside the waveguide they shall be
removed entirely. Tools and hardware shall never be allowed to enter the waveguide. If
required, the waveguide system shall be cleaned with solvent applied with cloth, drawn
through the waveguide with a string or rope, being careful not to scratch the inner surface.
g. Protective covers shall be kept on the waveguide flanges until that particular flange is to be
assembled to an adjoining flange. The hardware furnished with the protective covers shall be
used in the waveguide installation,unless otherwise specified.
Internal Use Only
95-182-6 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power 95-182 Antenna, Waveguide, and Pressurization System
h. All cap screws and nuts shall be tightened securely, with the lock washers adjacent to the
nuts, in such a manner as to be drawn up evenly. Care shall be taken to ensure that there is no
undue stress or strain placed upon the waveguide flange joint. In vertical runs of waveguide,
all bolts shall be installed with the nuts in the up position. Waveguide flange screws shall be
tightened to the following torques:
Screw Size Threads Per Inch Recommended Torque (in-lb)
No. 4 40 4.5
80 5.5
No. 6 32 8.5
40 10
No. 8 32 18
36 20
No. 10 24 23
32 32
'/4-inch 20 80
28 100
5/16-inch 18 140
24 150
3/8-inch 16 250
24 275
7/16-inch 14 400
20 425
'/z-inch 13 550
20 575
i. Waveguide shall be properly aligned and never forced to make flanges meet, as the flange
faces may not be parallel, resulting in distortion or damage to the waveguide. Rectangular
waveguide sections shall be loosely assembled in attaching hardware (hangers)before
waveguide flanges are screwed together allowing for 100%metal-metal con-tact of the
flanges.
j. In the pressurized runs, gaskets are furnished for each connection. Follow the manufacturer's
instructions for installation. The flange face must be free of any foreign matter both internally
and externally, at all times.
k. Flexible waveguide must never be positioned in such a manner as to violate the
manufacturer's bend and twist requirements of each individual section of waveguide.
1. Flexible waveguide must never be stretched. Stretching the flexible waveguide may cause
serious damage both internally to the metal tubing, and at the junction of the tubing and the
flanges.
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-182-7

95-182 Antenna, Waveguide, and Pressurization System Idaho Power
in. When an entire installation cannot be completed, care must be taken to ensure that there are
no waveguide flanges without protective covers. Protective covers must be assembled on the
open flanges in the run and on the piece of waveguide removed from the run.
n. Kits are available for field flanging of rectangular waveguide. Tests of the completed
waveguide shall be performed. If any field flanges are found to be below standards, the
waveguide section shall be replaced.A field-applied flange in a vertical run shall be in-
stalled at the lowest point in the run.A modification shall not be made without the prior
approval of the Owner.
o. When installing waveguide on towers, follow the manufacturer's guidelines to ensure proper
alignment and mating of the waveguide sections and to avoid damage to the waveguide
sections. Long sections of horizontal waveguide shall be adequately supported or restrained.
The flanges shall not be expected to carry a twist load.
p. Adequate protection shall be provided to avert damage that could occur due to falling ice or
other debris, particularly where the waveguide is run in a horizontal path.
q. When flexible waveguide is used, it shall be run straight or in a smooth bend, avoiding low
spots where condensation could collect. Grounding across outdoor flexible waveguide
sections shall be as specified herein.
r. The Contractor shall pressure test each waveguide run for leakage by applying a dry gas
under pressure to each run. If leaking is encountered, check each flange by using a soap
solution. The pressure shall not exceed the manufacturer's specifications nor the Owner's
pressurization specifications.
s. To minimize the flow of water on transmission lines to the building, the transmission lines
should be installed with a slight upward incline as they approach the shelter. Transmission
lines shall be installed without drip loops.
t. Transmission lines shall be installed in a way that does not impede climbing or safety devices
and shall not be mounted to climbing ladder rungs or climbing pegs.
u. Excess transmission line shall not be stored(coiled or looped) on the tower.
v. All transmission line connectors, splices, terminations, grounding kits, and jumpers shall be
weatherproofed.
3.3. Rectangular Waveguide
a. Rigid Rectangular Waveguide: Rectangular waveguide is used between either a parabolic
antenna or system combining network and the radio equipment inside the building. Since
rectangular waveguide is capable of carrying only one polarization of a frequency band, a
different size guide may be required for each frequency band and a separate guide is required
for each polarization.
Internal Use Only
95-182-8 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power 95-182 Antenna, Waveguide, and Pressurization System
b. Flexible Rectangular Waveguide: This assembly consists of convoluted interlocking flexible
metal hose of essentially rectangular cross-section covered with a rubber protective jacket.
This assembly mates mechanically with the gasket equipped flanges attached to the rigid
waveguide. The flexible waveguide must be handled carefully,as dents or other deformations
may greatly impair transmission. The bending radius and twist specifications shall not be
exceeded.
3.4. Elliptical Waveguide and Coaxial Cable
a. Elliptical waveguide and coaxial cable shall be installed in one continuous length from the
antenna to the radio equipment.
b. The transmitting equipment and antenna shall be installed prior to the waveguide. Inspect the
waveguide for possible shipping damage and pressure loss. If the waveguide or coax is of the
pressurizable type and cannot hold pressure,check all joints for possible leaks.All leaks must
be eliminated.
c. Factory attached connectors are shipped with a blank flange (protector) attached to maintain
pressure during shipment. Do not remove the blank flange until after the waveguide is
installed, as it also affords protection to the connector face and prevents accidental entry of
foreign matter.
d. When bulk waveguide is used, field attachment of the connector at the antenna end must be
completed before hoisting. Remove the pressurizing cap from the waveguide reel just prior to
use.Attach the connector to the end of the bulk waveguide in accordance with the connector
instructions received. Be very careful to keep all connector parts perfectly clean. Pressure test
the assembly. Reinstall the pressurizing cap on the unused wave-guide balance on the reel as
soon as operations on the reel are complete.
e. Provide a strong pulley high enough on the tower to allow the waveguide to be raised
sufficiently to make a proper antenna connection. The pulley shall be positioned on the tower
where the weight being hoisted will not damage,bend or deform the tower horizontal or
diagonal cross members. Most lengths can be hoisted manually; however, a winch is
recommended for lifting several hundred feet of the larger waveguides.Additional tying is
done above and below the cable grips to keep the weight on the hoist line and to avoid
unnecessary stresses on the waveguide.
f. Make certain to allow slack in the waveguide when tying, and that slack is maintained during
hoisting. Tying is accomplished with a strong, fiber-reinforced tape or similar material
applied generously at 15 or 20 foot intervals as the waveguide is raised. Follow the
manufacturer's instructions to ensure that the waveguide is not damaged as it is pulled from
the reel.
g. Hoist the waveguide slowly. To prevent kinking, rotation of the reel must be retarded to
control payout of the waveguide as required.
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-182-9

95-182 Antenna, Waveguide, and Pressurization System Idaho Power
h. During installation of the waveguide, no bend of the waveguide shall exceed that
recommended by the manufacturer. The waveguide shall only be bent with bending tools
obtained from the manufacturer or Owner. Compound bends (i.e. those types of bends where
the elliptical waveguide is simultaneously bending in both the axes of the waveguide)
introduce twist to the waveguide run and are prohibited.
i. After the waveguide has been raised to the correct height, use the cable grip as a temporary
anchor to support the waveguide until the connector has been properly mated with the
antenna input. Provide sufficient slack to permit an easy flange alignment. Remove the
protective covering and blank flange from the connector and connect the waveguide to the
antenna. Maintain hoist line tension until anchoring is completed. Waveguide grips, used to
hoist elliptical waveguide, shall be utilized adjacent to all waveguide grounding kit locations
(except at the grounding kit location at the bottom of the vertical run), and shall be left in
place on the waveguide and secured to the tower structure.
j. All waveguide is subject to vibration from wind and shall not be left unsupported.
k. Hot dipped galvanized square support rails or leg clamps are approved for elliptical or
coaxial line support and shall be attached uniformly at five-foot intervals to the vertical angle
iron runs or diagonal cross members.A minimum of three attachments in a 20 foot section of
square support rail is allowed only where the square support rail is being attached to diagonal
cross members and the five foot spacing cannot be maintained. Galvanized square support
rail that is cut shall be coated with Galvanox, a high-zinc-dust-content paint for repair
painting of galvanized steel.
1. Waveguide and coaxial line supports shall be installed per the manufacturer's instructions
unless local conditions dictate more stringent requirements. Position the hangers to hold the
waveguide away from tower members. Rubbing against edges could cause eventual damage.
If adding or changing waveguide clamps, the Owner shall specify the type of clamps to be
used. In most cases, the new clamps shall match those being used on existing waveguide
runs.
m. Be very careful not to tighten the hangers excessively to avoid deforming the waveguide.
n. Follow the hanger instructions included with the hangers.As the hangers are attached, the
entire length of waveguide shall be inspected for possible damage.
o. Exposed horizontal runs must be protected from the weight of accumulated ice and damage
from falling ice or other objects.
p. Coaxial Cable:
1. Coaxial cables may be supported on cable ladders,buried, or suspended from the ice
bridge from the tower to the transmitter building. Jacketed coaxial cables can be buried
if approved by the manufacturer.The minimum bending radius of the coaxial cable shall
never be exceeded.
Internal Use Only
95-182-10 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power 95-182 Antenna, Waveguide, and Pressurization System
2. Do not trim off any cable from an antenna or array feed harness.
1
3. When installing land mobile radio antennas, the cable harness must be assembled ac-
cording to the manufacturer's specifications, with radiating elements in proper phase.
q. Overall pressurization leakage tests shall be performed to ensure the integrity of the complete
antenna system, including the antenna, waveguide and connectors. These tests shall be made
in accordance with the manufacturer specifications and shall be made from the pressure
window. The test results shall be recorded on the Antenna/Waveguide/Pressurization
Checklist included herein.
r. All antenna and transmission line systems are to be tested for loss, return loss, and cross-
polarization discrimination (where appropriate) from the radio bay to the antenna.
3.5. Weather Seals
a. A weather seal arrangement is required for waveguide entering a building through the roof or
a sidewall. Where waveguide or coaxial transmission line enters through the roof, a
galvanized steel hatch cover plate is used to seal the roof opening.
b. Where waveguide or coaxial transmission line enters the building through a side wall, a
weatherproof, commercially made port assembly specifically designed for this purpose shall
be utilized. These assemblies typically consist of a transmission line entry plate and boot
assembly.A boot shall be used even if the cable is run through conduit. Cable boots
corresponding to the cable or conduit diameter(s) shall be used. Boots shall be made of a
material unaffected by ozone, sunlight, extreme heat, and cold.
c. Transmission line entry ports shall not be used to feed through tower light power, building
ground, or control cables.
3.6. Pressurization Systems
a. The indoor portion of elliptical waveguide runs and coaxial transmission lines will be
pressurized because the pressure window is located at or near the radio equipment.All
systems will operate at low pressure approximately equal to 4 Pounds per Square Inch(PSI)
b. The air dehydrator or nitrogen system is to be mounted on the wall, floor or stand inside the
building under the waveguide entry panel per manufacturer instructions.A mounting board
for manifolds is to be mounted on the inside wall above the air dehydrator or nitrogen system.
Large manifolds are to be mounted on the wall beside or beneath the waveguide entry panel.
Small manifolds for low volume systems may be mounted on the mounting board.
c. Supply lines from the manifold to the individual transmission lines are to be equipped with
shut off valves at the manifold. Parabolic and VHF/MF antenna systems are to be fed with
0.25-inch (minimum) tubing. Dish antenna systems are to be fed with one 3/8-inch
(minimum)tubing.
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-182-11

95-182 Antenna, Waveguide, and Pressurization System Idaho Power
d. Manifolds are to be mounted on the board and valves labeled,per the Owner, as "transmit to"
or "receive from" the next site including polarity.
e. Plastic tubing is to be used on all new installations. Plastic tubing comes in flexible and
semi-rigid types. UV resistant tubing is also available for the rare occasions where air lines
need to be run outdoors. The type used is to be specified by the Owner.
f. Push-on type connectors are available for the flexible tubing, and compression connectors are
available for the semi-rigid tubing. The proper size and type of connectors are to be used in
all installations. The use of adapters is acceptable only to change the size of the pipe threads
at the manifold or pressure windows. The use of these adapters is to be kept to a minimum.
g. All pipe threads are to be coated with pipe dope or teflon pipe sealing tape wrapped in the
proper direction.
h. Turn up of the dry air system must be coordinated with the turn up of the antenna systems on
new installations. The following turn up procedure shall be used:
1. Turn off all supply line valves.
2. Turn on and test dehydrator operation per manufacturer's instructions.
3. Check operation of remote alarms.
4. Check manifold pressure and adjust if necessary.
5. Turn up and purge antenna systems one at a time. Purge antenna systems by loosening a
flange or monitor at the farthest possible point from the supply fitting. For coaxial and/
or single transmission line antenna systems, this point will be at the antenna.
6. Open the supply valve and allow dry air to blow through the system for 15 minutes.
Close the opened connection after purging.
7. Check and set the pressure alarm point by placing a pressure gauge on the monitor fit-
ting and turning off the valve on the pressure monitor line. Pressure will fall rapidly.
Note and set, if necessary,the alarm point.Newer systems operate at 4 PSI and alarm at
1 PSI. Check the antenna/transmission line system for leaks per the
suppliers instructions.
3.7. Grounding
a. The waveguide or transmission line shall be grounded to the tower within 5 feet of the
antenna(between the antenna and the first bend)and at the bottom of the vertical run(before
the bend)using approved grounding kits and low impedance conductors. In addition, the
waveguide or transmission line shall be grounded at intermediate points of the vertical run at
no more than 50 foot intervals, and no less than 30 foot intervals (i.e. nominal distance
between grounds of 40 feet). Grounding kits shall not be placed in a bend of waveguide. In
addition, the waveguide shall be grounded at a point where it enters the building, using
Internal Use Only
95-182-12 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power 95-182 Antenna, Waveguide, and Pressurization System
approved grounding kits, 2-hole#2 American Wire Gauge (AWG) crimp connectors and
bolting directly to ground buss at the entry panel.
b. Attach all ground wire connections on elliptical waveguide and coaxial cable to down-ward
slanting tower structural support members using the same type ground kits, specifications,
and intervals as in the vertical run.
c. Install Owner-provided mylar electrical isolator and associated nylon hardware inside the
equipment shelter on the radio side of the flexible rectangular waveguide to electrical isolate
the transmission line from the radio equipment.
d. Refer to specification 95-179, Station Grounding for additional grounding requirements at
communications facilities.
3.8. Transmission Line Testing
a. General:
1. Hardware or equipment that is not part of the required final completed assembly shall
be removed prior to testing.
2. Test equipment shall be approved by Owner prior to testing. Test equipment shall be in
good working order, and shall be calibrated within industry and manufacturer's
tolerances.
3. Contractor shall provide the Owner the measurement uncertainties (across the specified
frequency bands) of the utilized test equipment.
4. In addition to filling out the Microwave Path Acceptance Datasheet, the Contractor
shall provide all measurement results to the Owner in electronic format.All
measurement traces shall include frequency spans and amplitude levels.
5. All waveguide tests shall be performed with waveguide flange screws in place and
properly tightened. This includes any coaxial to waveguide adapters, terminations, or
shorting plates.
6. All tests shall use a precision waveguide termination at opposite end of waveguide from
the test set.
7. Insertion loss tests shall be performed using two-port testing.
8. The specific objective values for each parameter will be specified by the design
engineer. If any test value cannot be met as specified, the Contractor shall immediately
notify the Owner for further direction.
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-182-13

95-182 Antenna, Waveguide, and Pressurization System Idaho Power
b. Waveguide Loss:
1. Test elliptical waveguide section as a whole for return loss across the specified
frequency band after work is completed. Return loss at any given point in the frequency
band shall be better than 25 dB.
2. Test rectangular waveguide section as a whole for return loss across specified frequency
band after work is completed. This test shall be performed without any flexible
rectangular sections, without mylar electrical isolator, and without pressurization
window. Return loss at any given point in the band shall be better than 25 dB.
3. Test the entire waveguide system including elliptical, rectangular, mylar electrical
isolator,pressure window and flexible rectangular sections without the dish connected.
Return loss at any given point in the band shall be better than 15 dB considering worst
case test equipment measurement uncertainty.
4. The waveguide termination shall then be removed and the antenna shall be included in
the measurement of return loss and record the results.
c. Path Loss/Dish Alignment:
1. Antennas shall be installed at both ends of the path prior to performing path loss testing.
Path loss test shall be between feed horn waveguide flanges on the antenna at both ends
of the path.
2. Owner will provide the Contractor with path loss goal and antenna azimuth and tilt in-
formation prior to antenna installation. The Contractor shall meet or exceed the path
loss goal provided by the Owner.
3. Once the path loss goal has been achieved, the Contractor shall up-tilt the dishes (one
dish at a time) to increase path loss by 1 dB without adjusting azimuth.
3.9. Supplement
a. Antenna/Waveguide/Pressurization Checklist
b. Microwave Path Acceptance Datasheet
Internal Use Only
95-182-14 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power Ante n na/Waveg u ide/Press u rization Checklist
Ante nna/Wavegui de/Press urization Checklist
Date of Inspection:
Project Name:
Site Name:
Job Number:
Contractor:
Before performing the inspection, obtain all manufacture documentation and instruction sheets,
waveguide tags attached to the reel, and drawings associated with this job.
Add explanation as required for an item if it is necessary to identify a specific antenna or Wave-
guide run, or general comments concerning the job or installation. Write NA if an item does not
apply. Sign the last page after the inspection is complete.
Antenna Mount Pipe
I. Is pipe mount on tower mounted to allow correct position of antenna(per installation
drawing,pipe plumb with respect to tower leg or face, allows antenna mount to be
clamped correctly, allows correct center line position of antenna, antenna position does
not interfere with ladders, other antennas, etc.)?
2. Were drilled holes cold galvanized? (Remove one bolt from upper and lower mount
bracket to tower leg or face and inspect/replace and tighten)
Antenna (Horn/Parabolic/Collinear)
I. Is this the correct antenna(by model and manufacture) for this location?
2. Is the exterior of antenna parabola/horn dented or scrapped?
3. Is the radome mounted with correct hardware?
4. Is the radome damaged, dented or scratched?
5. Is radome installed with TOP up?
6. Radome (if equipped)torn or damaged?
7. Radome bolts(on radome)in place and locked(lock washers or lock tight depending on
manufacture of antenna)?
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-182-15

Antenna/Waveguide/Pressurization Checklist Idaho Power
8. Radome J-Bolts and springs in place and at correct tension?
1 -
9. Radome J-Bolts double nuted if required?
10. Was anti-seize used on Stainless J-Bolts?
11. Conical radome mounting hardware in place and tight?
12. U bolts at tight, locked?
-Vertical Clamps?
-Azimuth Clamps?
-Azimuth adjustment rod(at antenna and tower)?
13. Stiff Arm(s) and Azimuth Rods (struts) in place with correct hardware, hardware tight
and locked? (Nuts DOWN on Stiff Arm(s) and Azimuth Rods only)
14. Is antenna feed positioned correctly in vertex place and locked down?
15. Is the antenna feed positioned in the antenna parabola with the correct hook(Left or
Right per design document)?
16. Are antenna feed bolts missing, locked, and tightened to correct torque?
17. Are antenna feed support wires in place and tensioned correctly?
18. Are unused ports on the antenna feed terminated? (Shorting plates are not allowed).
19. Is correct hardware used on antenna feed port terminations.
20. Is antenna installed at correct center line per FCC license (+/- 1 ft)?
21. Is antenna center line height in reference to Above Ground Level (AGL) or Above
Tower Base (ATB)?AGL ATB
22. Were cross polarity tests made, documented, and acceptable? (Provide documentation)
23. Is antenna polarization installed correctly per FCC license? Remember vertically
polarized means the small dimension of the waveguide is vertical and vice versa for
horizontal.
Waveguide/Coax
1. Is the waveguide installed the same as what was ordered?
2. Is the waveguide supported per specification or local conditions? (Local conditions
would require closer support spacing)
Internal Use Only
95-182-16 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power Ante n na/Waveg u ide/Press u rization Checklist
3. Are waveguide supports installed correctly (correct hardware and locked)?
1
4. Are there any kinks or sharp bends in each waveguide run?
5. Is the waveguide damaged(scrapped, outside cover cut, or deformed)?
6. Are waveguide grounds installed correctly and at the correct locations?
7. Are waveguide connectors installed correctly (correct hardware, gaskets, hardware
tight, heat shrink if provided, tuning screws sealed)?
8. Are flex sections installed with minimum twist and no sharp bends?
9. Is the correct hardware used at flex section flanges?
10. Are the flex section flanges bolt and nuts installed correctly?
11. Was the waveguide tested on the reel and is the sweep document available and
acceptable?
12. Was the waveguide and antenna tested together and is the sweep document available
and acceptable (return loss with the antenna feed)?
Pressurization
1. If a new dehydrator was installed:
a. Is it the correct model?
b. Is it installed in the correct location?
C. Is AC Power run correctly, and unit grounded to shelter internal ground system?
d. Are the high/low pressure values of the dehydrator set correctly?
e. Are the alarm leads connected and function correctly?
2. If a new pressure alarm switch was installed for the waveguide:
a. Is it installed in the correct location and grounded to shelter internal ground
system?
b. Is the low-pressure alarm value set correctly?
3. Does the pressure system have the correct shut off valves, nipples, etc. per
specification?
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-182-17

Antenna/Waveguide/Pressurization Checklist Idaho Power
4. If a single waveguide was installed, is there a separate port at the connector for
pressurization?
5. Is the pressure tubing supported correctly with the correct hardware, connectors, and
was Teflon tape used?
6. Perform a pressure leak down test on the antenna/waveguide system and record the
results below:
a. Initial Pressure of 4 PSI, less than 1 PSI loss in 15 minutes.
7. Ensure that the system(manifold)pressure is set to its normal value after the test is
performed.
Drawings
l. Were the drawings corrected to show this equipment addition/removal?
Additional Remarks or Comments
Initial Inspection
Company Name:
Date:
Signed(Contractor):
Final Inspection
Owner:
Date:
Internal Use Only
95-182-18 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power Microwave Path Acceptance Datasheet
Microwave Path Acceptance Datasheet
Antenna/Transmission Line Loss Data (by Idaho Power
Communications Engineering):
Path Frequency Coordination Number: (attach copy)
Comm Engineer: Phone Number:
Table 95-1.
SITE A SITE B
Site Designator
Max Insertion Loss,wave-guide,
from radio bay to antenna
flange, at TX frequency(s)
Target Net Path Loss at TX
frequency(s),Antenna-Antenna
Rated waveguide/antenna
frequencies for measuring
return loss
Measured and Inspected Values (by Contractor):
Brand and Model of utilized test equipment:
Measurement uncertainties (across the specified frequency bands) of the utilized test equipment:
Table 95-2.
Site A Site B
Site A Diversity Site B Diversity
Primary (if present) Primary (if present)
Verify Unused Antenna Feed
Terminated with 50 OHM Load at
antenna
Record Antenna and Radome Model,
Color, Condition
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-182-19

Microwave Path Acceptance Datasheet Idaho Power
Table 95-2.
Site A Site B
Site A Diversity Site B Diversity
Primary (if present) Primary (if present)
Record Wavguide or Coaxial Cable
manufacturer part number
Record Pre-install tower alignment & — N/A — N/A
Post-Install tower alignment, for new
Antennas
Verify Antenna Feed Configurations
and Polarity, Primary Antenna and
Diversity Antenna (UHX Red Right/
Left, Vertical/Horizontal Polarization)
Verify Antenna Mounting Height
Measure Net Path Loss at Transmit
Frequency(s), Primary-Primary
Antenna and Primary- Diversity
Antenna
Measured waveguide insertion loss N/A N/A
from radio bay to antenna flange, TX
wave-guide.
Measured waveguide insertion loss
from radio bay to antenna flange, RX
wave-guide (if separate from TX
waveguide).
Measured waveguide return loss
from radio bay toward antenna,
Minimum over rated Antenna/
Waveguide Frequencies (using
termination plate).
Measured waveguide return loss,
radio bay toward antenna, Minimum
at Transmit and Receive Frequencies
(using Antenna as load)
Verify waveguide pressure window
in-stalled at elliptical/rigid waveguide
connector, all waveguides per radio.
Verify insulating gasket installed just
after elliptical/rigid waveguide
connector with insulating hardware,
all waveguides per radio path.
Internal Use Only
95-182-20 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power Microwave Path Acceptance Datasheet
Table 95-2.
Site A Site B
Site A Diversity Site B Diversity
Primary (if present) Primary (if present)
Verify rigid waveguide section,
provisional for test apparatus (27.6"
for 6GHz, 20.0"for 11 GHz), clear of
waveguide hangers, all new
waveguides per radio path.
Contractor Test Equipment Record:
Manufacturer/Models/Calibration
Dates
Additional Remarks or Comments
Initial Inspection
Company Name:
Date:
Signed(Contractor):
Final Inspection
Owner:
Date:
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-182-21

Microwave Path Acceptance Datasheet Idaho Power
Internal Use Only
95-182-22 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power
CHAPTER
95-183 Single-Mode Fiber
Optic Cable
1. General
1.1. Summary
• General Information: see Overhead Manual Section 04-06 and Underground Manual
Sections 62, 64, and 65.
• This specification covers requirements for a complete single-mode fiber optic cable
installation on power transmission lines,power distribution lines, or underground inside
stations. Typical cables include All Dielectric Self-Supporting (ADSS) cable, Optical
Ground Wire (OPGW), and All Dielectric (AD) cable.
• Owner will provide all OPGW. Contractor shall provide all ADSS and AD cable; splice
closures for OPGW,ADSS,AD and tactical fiber installations, and applicable splice
point hardware. Other cable types will be specified and furnished either by the Owner or
the Contractor as called out in the Contract Documents.
• Outside of Substations: Install fiber optic cables in accordance with the Idaho Power
Overhead Manual Section 04-06 and Underground Manual Sections 64 and 65.
• Contact the project engineer or designer to verify deviations between construction
documents and the guidelines in this section prior to proceeding with backbone
fiber installation.
2. Products
2.1. Fiber Optic Cable and Components
a. All Dielectric Self-Supporting (ADSS)—Contractor Furnished: shall meet the requirements
in Overhead Manual Section 04-06.
b. Innerduct: shall meet the requirements in Overhead Manual Section 04-06.
1. Smooth walled polyethylene tube to protect fiber optic cable.
2. All conduits and innerduct shall be plugged to prevent rodents from nesting in them.
3. Split Duct: If required, at underground pull boxes use corrugated split innerduct to
bridge the gap between the conduit ends.
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-183-1

95-183 Single-Mode Fiber Optic Cable Idaho Power
4. Install fiber optic cable in innerduct for all underground installations utilizing
PVC conduit. (Exception: single cable in a 2" conduit. See Section 3.3.a.La. below.)
5. Couplers: Split-Lock or Shur-Lock, as required for the installation.
2.2. Conduit
a. PVC Schedule 40 or PVC Schedule 80 as required by the application, and shall be UL listed
for concrete encasement,underground direct burial, concealed or direct sunlight exposure,
and 90' C insulated conductors. See Overhead Manual Section 04-06 and Underground
Manual Section 62.
2.3. Fittings
a. PVC Conduit: Use PVC, slip-on fittings, meeting the requirements of NEMA TC-3.
See Underground Manual Section 62.
b. Cable Sealing Fittings:
1. Use cable sealing fittings such as Jack Moon or equivalent to form watertight, nonslip,
cord or cable connection with the conduit or duct. Use duct sealing fittings such as Jack
Moon or equivalent to seal duct to conduit.
2.4. Precast Handholes
a. Application: see Overhead Manual Section 04-06 and Underground Manual Section 62.
2.5. Identification of Facilities
a. Application: shall meet the requirements in Overhead Manual Section 04-02.
• ADS Sand AD installations: Utilize sunlight resistant laminated plastic plates with legible
designation of"Idaho Power Communications"permanently hot stamped on plate.
Color shall be black engraved to a white core. Products relying on tape or adhesives are
not acceptable.
2.6. Splices and Closures
a. Splices and closures shall meet the requirements in Overhead Manual Section 04-06.
b. Contractor shall provide splice closure mount.
3. Execution
3.1. Overhead Installation
a. All Dielectric Self-Supporting (ADSS): shall meet the requirements in Overhead Manual
Section 04-06. Follow cable manufacturer's installation practices and specifications.
b. Optical Ground Wire (OPGW): shall meet the requirements in Overhead Manual Section
04-06. Follow cable manufacturer's installation practices and specifications.
Internal Use Only
95-183-2 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power 95-183 Single-Mode Fiber Optic Cable
3.2. Underground Installation
a. All Dielectric (AD): see Overhead Manual Section 04-06.
3.3. Buried PVC Conduit and Cable Trench
a. Backbone fiber in conduit.
1. Application: Backbone fiber cable must be installed in dedicated, concrete-encased
conduits when routed outside the surface trench.
a. For single cables/runs, 2-inch conduit(no innerduct) shall be used.
b. 4-inch conduit with three innerducts shall be used for up to three fiber cables.
C. Backbone fiber runs shall be kept at a minimum distance of 10 feet from each
other until final approach, defined as 8 feet or less from the dead-end structure,
or ODE Exception: if multiple backbone fiber runs are in four-inch conduit as
described in section b above.
d. Conduit routes may never be closer than 10 feet to each other, except at the ODF
and/or dead-end structure.
e. All efforts should be made to provide reasonable physical separation and path
diversity from the transmission dead-end structures into the station building.
f. Enter into the building using separate routes/walls. First conduit shall not enter
on the same wall as the cable riser.All changes must be approved by a
communications engineer.
g. Install conduit as directed by the construction documents.
h. Outside of stations: install in accordance with the Idaho Power Underground
Manual Section 64 and Overhead Manual Section 04-06.
b. Backbone fiber in surface trench.
1. Application: after the first route in the station is established a second backbone fiber
may be installed in surface trench.
a. From dead end to trench conduit must run as outlined in 3.3 a.
b. Within the surface trench, an all-dielectric tactical cable type must be utilized
and installed in orange innerduct that is securely fastened to the
ground conductor.
C. Only one backbone fiber may be installed in each trench.
d. Backbone fiber in trench must maintain the separation rule outlined in 3.3 a.
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-183-3

95-183 Single-Mode Fiber Optic Cable Idaho Power
3.4. Splicing
a. See Overhead Manual Section 04-06.
• All splices shall be located along roads or easements that allow for easy access with a
work trailer or van.
• All underground splices shall be installed in an underground handhole.
• All fibers shall be spliced by the fusion method. The contractor shall use a fusion splice
machine for this purpose. The splice machine shall be equipped with a method for
estimating the achieved splice loss. Either the "Local Injection Detection" or the
"Core Alignment Loss Estimation" system is acceptable. The machine used shall be new
from the factory or serviced and certified by the factory, or its authorized representative,
within the previous six months from the commencement of its use on the project.
• For overhead installations, the fiber optic cable shall be trained down the tower/pole and
to the ground for splicing.
• Extend fiber cable a minimum of 75 feet beyond the bottom of the tower/pole or from the
underground handhole to facilitate splicing.
• All fiber optic cable splicing shall be performed in a clean and air-conditioned
environment such as a work trailer or van specifically equipped for fiber optic splicing.
• Each splice shall be completed to provide a minimum of 50 feet of fiber slack on each
side of the splice allowing the splice box to be removed and lowered to the ground if it is
ever necessary for maintenance.All fiber cable slack shall be bundled and coiled together
in a neat and organized manner, and properly secured at each splice point.
b. Contractor shall provide location of each splice to Idaho Power.
3.5. Overhead and Underground Splice Closure
a. See Overhead Manual Section 04-06.
1. Substation Dead-End Structures: mount splice closure 60 inches above finish grade to
centerline of closure.
3.6. Fiber Performance
a. Single Mode Fiber: see Overhead Manual Section 04-06.
Wavelength (nm) Maximum Attenuation (dB/km)
1,310 0.40
1,550 0.30
Internal Use Only
95-183-4 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power 95-183 Single-Mode Fiber Optic Cable
b. Splice: see Overhead Manual Section 04-06.
1. Splice Loss: 0.03 dB or less (typical); 0.15 dB (maximum acceptable).
2. Return Loss: 26 dB or greater.
c. Connector: see Overhead Manual Section 04-06.
1. Connector Loss: 0.30 dB or less (typical); 0.75 dB (maximum acceptable).
3.7. Identification Devices
a. Overhead: see Overhead Manual Section 04-06.
b. Underground: see Overhead Manual Section 04-06.
c. Document splice points and splice box locations on construction documents, changes of
locations of splices must be approved by a communication engineer.
3.8. Field Quality Control
a. Pre-Installation Testing: see Overhead Manual Section 04-06.
a. Post-Installation Testing: see Overhead Manual Section 04-06.
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-183-5

95-183 Single-Mode Fiber Optic Cable Idaho Power
Internal Use Only
95-183-6 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power
CHAPTER
95-184 Furnish and Deliver
Pre-Manufactured TDMIM
Communications Shelter
1. Instructions to Bidders
1.1. Request For Proposal
a. Proposals are requested in accordance with the following specifications for one (1)
pre-manufactured communications shelter.
b. The proposals shall be submitted on the following proposal forms not later than the day
of 20XX. Proposals received after this date will not be considered.
c. Proposals shall be delivered to the following:
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Idaho Power Company
1221 West Idaho Street
Boise, Idaho 83702
Ph: 208-388-XXXX
d. Exceptions and Clarifications to Specifications:
1. Bidder proposes to furnish the pre-manufactured communications shelter in accordance
with Idaho Power Company specifications, unless exceptions and clarifications are
noted.
1.2. Equipment Pricing
Quantity Description Price
One Pre-manufactured communications shelter $
Lot Anti-static floor tiling $
Two Adder for bullet resistant doors $
Lot Adder for bullet resistant walls $
Two Adder for generator goose neck vent louvers $
One Snow entry ladder fall protection $
Lot Freight- FOB Idaho Power Company's Site. $
Freight is to be invoiced as a separate line item, so as not to be taxed.
Total Price $
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-184-1

95-184 Furnish and Deliver Pre-Manufactured Communications Shelter Idaho Power
1.3. Schedule
a. The Bidder shall complete the following schedule and submit with its proposal.
Event/Task Weeks From Date Of Order
Submit Bill of Material
Submit Shelter Plans and Elevations
Start of Shelter Fabrication
Completion of Shelter
Production Testing
Inspection (if required)
Shipment
Delivery
b. This equipment is required to be in receipt at the Idaho Power Company designated facility
between , 20XX, and , 20XX.Any adjustment to this delivery date by the
supplier must be requested in writing and if changes are acceptable to Idaho Power Company,
a written response will be given to the supplier.
c. If the shelter is late, a penalty of 1% of the total invoice each week will be paid by the
supplier, limited to a 5% late payment. Shelter is considered late if a set of FINAL hard copy
and electronic format drawings are not mailed within 10 days after the equipment is shipped.
Idaho Power Company is to be notified at least two weeks prior to shipment of the
equipment.
1.4. Freight Terms
a. The shelter shall be delivered F.O.B. trucks to:
b. The purchase order number shall be referenced on the outside of each shipping package.
c. Special tools and spare parts shall be packaged separately and marked as to the contents.
d. Idaho Power Company will arrange for cranes to unload the shelter at the delivery point.
1.5. Terms of Payment
e. Idaho Power Company will pay ninety percent(90%) of the proposal and invoiced amount(s)
for items shipped within thirty (30) days of shipment.
f. The remaining ten percent(10%)will be paid within thirty(30) days of the final shipment of
the equipment, material, and documentation purchased in accordance with this specification
if there are no deficiencies and defects. During this thirty (30) day period, Idaho Power
Company will fully inspect and report all deficiencies and defects to the Manufacturer, if any.
Internal Use Only
95-184-2 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power 95-184 Furnish and Deliver Pre-Manufactured Communications Shelter
In the event that deficiencies and defects exist, the final ten percent(10%)payment will be
due within ten (10) days of the deficiencies and defects being corrected by the Manufacturer.
1.6. Proposal Validity
a. The Bidder's proposal shall remain valid for not less than thirty (30) days from the date the
proposals are due. Idaho Power Company may request an extension of the proposal validity
when required for evaluation purposes.
1.7. Evaluation of Proposals
b. Idaho Power Company shall evaluate the proposals and award the contract to the Bidder that,
in its sole determination, has made the best proposal. In evaluating the proposals, Idaho
Power Company may take into consideration the following factors:
1. Resource requirements for the unloading,placement and assembly of the equipment
2. Exceptions to the specifications
3. Amount of work required to commission Manufacturer provided equipment upon
delivery.
4. Project schedule
5. Idaho Power Company's previous experience with the Manufacturer
6. Idaho Power Company will also take into consideration the production schedule and the
impact of the equipment delivery on Idaho Power Company's overall project schedule
and resource requirements for the total project.A Manufacturer's delivery schedule
which results in Idaho Power Company's crews working over-time to meet the overall
project schedule will have the cost of the overtime added to the Manufacturer's quoted
price for purposes of the evaluation.
2. General Requirements
2.1. General
a. These specifications cover the requirements for the design and manufacture of a pre-
manufactured communications shelter for Idaho Power Company's (project) located in
, Idaho. The shelter shall be as detailed in these specifications.
b. The Manufacturer shall furnish the equipment and material specified herein as a complete
and functional system.All standard accessories that are required to safely operate and
maintain the equipment shall be provided as part of the material supplied.Accessories that
enhance the operation and maintenance of the equipment shall be provided only if specified.
c. All work shall be performed and completed in a thorough workmanlike manner and in
accordance with the best modern practices in fabrication and manufacturing.
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-184-3

95-184 Furnish and Deliver Pre-Manufactured Communications Shelter Idaho Power
d. All materials used in the construction of the shelter shall be selected as the best available for
the intended purpose, considering strength, durability, insulation, and best engineering
practice. Conservative safety factors shall be employed throughout the design.
2.2. Scope
a. Work Included:
1. The Manufacturer shall furnish a pre-manufactured communications shelter as detailed
in these specifications. Drawings, material lists, arrangement drawings, and other data
attached to these specifications shall be considered part of this specification. Where
conflicts exist between the written specifications and the drawings or other data
provided, the drawings shall govern.
2. Complete production tests and inspections as detailed in these specifications shall be
included.
3. It shall be the responsibility of the Manufacturer to furnish all material, special tools,
and information required to completely reassemble the shelter and associated
components in the destination location.
4. Equipment drawings and documentation shall be provided in accordance with these
specifications.
b. Work Not Included(unless requested otherwise by manufacture):
1. Field supervision and or installation of the shelter.
2. Connection of exterior power cables, grounding cables, communications wave guide/
cables, and generator LP fuel.
3. Tools, rigging, and equipment required for unloading of the shelter.
2.3. Codes and Standards
a. The Applicable codes and standards listed below should be considered part of this
specification. The latest revision in effect at the time of this inquiry shall apply for all
standards referenced.
1. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
2. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3. National Electric Code (NEC)
4. American National Standards Institute, Inc. (ANSI)
5. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)
Internal Use Only
95-184-4 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power 95-184 Furnish and Deliver Pre-Manufactured Communications Shelter
6. American Welding Society (AWS)
1
7. International Building Code (IBC)
8. Local Basic Building Codes
9. Underwriters Laboratory(UL)
10. Illuminating Engineering Society(IES)
b. It is the Manufacturer's responsibility to be knowledgeable and employ designs and
manufacturing practices that incorporate the latest revisions of these standards where and
when applicable.
2.4. Certifications
a. The shelter shall meet Idaho State Statutes for pre-manufactured buildings, and have the State
of Idaho insignia attached to the shelter prior to the shelter being shipped. It is the
manufacturer's responsibility to provide any necessary third party inspection, approval, or
state certification that may be required. Up to six(6) sets of drawings stamped by a
Professional Engineer(PE)may also be requested.
2.5. Drawings
a. In accordance with the project schedule submitted with the proposal, the following drawings
shall be submitted for approval.
1. Shelter footprint, including mounting (anchor bolt locations) details, layout and
structural dimensions, cable entrances, weights, shipping splits, door swing
requirements, and applicable data on equipment included as part of the shelter.
2. Cross-section of shelter showing equipment arrangements.
3. Suggested foundation plan for the proposed shelter.
4. Bill of material, including quantity, item description, manufacturer, and catalog or
reference numbers.
b. Idaho Power Company will review and return all approval drawings within 10 days of receipt
and return one signed copy with one of the following:
1. Approved: Prints so marked will authorize the manufacturer to proceed with fabrication
of the shelter.
2. Approved as noted: Prints so marked will authorize the manufacturer to proceed with
the fabrication of the shelter only after the necessary corrections to drawing have been
completed.
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-184-5

95-184 Furnish and Deliver Pre-Manufactured Communications Shelter Idaho Power
3. Not approved: The manufacturer shall make the corrections on the drawings and will be
required to resubmit for customer approval. The time required for such resubmittals of
drawings does not entitle the manufacturer to any extension of time. However,customer
may grant extension upon request if time permits.
c. Changes made to previously approved drawings shall be submitted for record.All revisions
shall be identified on the drawings.
d. Drawings shall show clearly all connections to be made by Idaho Power Company when
installing the shelter.
e. Drawings shall allow for adequate space for Idaho Power Company to add their external
connections.
f. Following the completion and testing of the shelter assembly, the Manufacturer shall submit
3 complete set(s) of"as-built" drawings. The "as-built" drawings shall include all of the
approval drawings listed above,wiring diagrams, and section view and detailed dimensioned
drawings.
g. Each drawing provided shall include the Idaho Power Company drawing border, the name,
job site location, purchase order or contract number, and such additional information as
required by the Manufacturer. Drawing numbers will be assigned by Idaho Power Company;
the manufacturer will assign drawing sheet numbers.
h. Drawings size shall be 34" X 22" (Size D).
i. One copy of all "as-built"drawings shall be provided to Idaho Power Company in AutoCAD
format.
2.6. Instructional Material
a. Within 2 weeks before the shelter shipment, the Manufacturer shall provide the following:
1. 3 copies of the operating and instructional manuals for all major components contained
in the shelter assembly. The manuals shall include a table of contents, manufacturer's
data and warranty information on all available systems and supplied equipment.
2. Shelter start-up information and maintenance procedures.
3. Generator Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation.
2.7. Unloading and Assembly Instructions
a. Approximately two (2) weeks prior to shipment, the Manufacturer shall provide 3 sets of
complete unloading and reassembly information for the shelter including suggested rigging
configurations. The Manufacturer shall provide one set of complete unloading and
reassembly information included with the shipment.
Internal Use Only
95-184-6 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power 95-184 Furnish and Deliver Pre-Manufactured Communications Shelter
2.8. Tests
1
a. Each shelter assembly shall include,but not be limited to, the following:
1. Mechanical and Electrical Operation Tests
2. Functional and Sequence Tests (Wiring Continuity)
2.9. Inspection and Witness Testing
a. Idaho Power Company reserves the right to inspect the shelter/equipment during manufacture
and prior to shipment. The Manufacturer shall notify Idaho Power Company, in writing, not
less than two (2)weeks prior to the intended production testing and shipment dates.
b. Equipment, apparatus, and material furnished shall be subject to factory tests and inspections
by Idaho Power Company's authorized representative. Such tests and inspections may be
made during any stage of the manufacturing process.
c. Any equipment, apparatus or material found unsatisfactory as to quality of workmanship will
be rejected. Tests shall be in accordance with applicable standards as noted above.
d. Acceptance of tests, or the waiving of witness tests, shall not relieve the Manufacturer from
the responsibility of furnishing equipment and material in accordance with these
specifications.
e. Idaho Power Company shall bear all costs associated with their inspections. The
Manufacturer shall make reasonable accommodation within the facility to allow the
inspection to proceed smoothly without impeding the manufacturing and assembly process.
2.10. Warranty
a. Unless specified otherwise, all equipment,materials, and workmanship furnished in
accordance with this specification shall be guaranteed for a period of thirty two (32) months
from date of shipment or twenty four(24)months from the date the shelter is installed,
whichever is longer.
b. The manufacturer will guarantee the shelter construction for a period of five (5)years from
the date the shelter is installed.
c. The shelter manufacturer shall be responsible for the warranty of all equipment regardless of
who the manufacturer of component material or equipment may be. The warranty shall
provide for correction, or at the option of Idaho Power, removal and replacement of
equipment specified in this specification found to be defective during the warranty period.
d. Damage that occurs as a result of misuse or improper operation shall not be covered under the
warranty. Damage as a result of an act of God shall not be covered under the warranty.
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-184-7

95-184 Furnish and Deliver Pre-Manufactured Communications Shelter Idaho Power
3. Shelter Requirements
3.1. General
a. The specifications contained herein encompass the labor, equipment and materials for a
prefabricated concrete communications shelter. The shelter structure shall provide a 2-hour
fire rating as defined by the Uniform Building Code and meet seismic requirements. The
shelter shall be designed for the explicit use of housing electronic equipment within a
controlled atmosphere required for the proper conditions for transmitting and receiving
equipment.
b. Bullet resistant option(if applicable): When requested, the shelter structure shall be bullet
resistant withstanding 30/06 rifle fire at a distance of 15 feet per UL 752 standards.
c. All equipment and materials furnished and installed shall be new and of the highest quality,
and shall be standard products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such
equipment and materials. Materials shall also be of the latest standard design, and shall be
Underwriters Laboratories (UL) listed where applicable. Installation of equipment and
materials shall be in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
d. AC power will be provided from a remote source and connected to the meter base by others.
All electrical service entrance equipment, standby generation equipment, automatic transfer
switch,AC panelboard, and electrical loads shall be wired as a complete and functional
system. Route all wiring in code-size conduit, and provide equipment grounding conductors
in all circuits.All electrical work for lighting, HVAC, and power located within the shelter
shall conform to the NEC.
e. The design and construction of the shelter shall be rodent-proof and completely weatherproof
against all elements of weather. The shelter shall be suitable for the following conditions:
I. Temperature Range: -40 deg. C to 45 deg. C
2. Relative Humidity: 0% low to 95%high
3. Wind Velocity: 90 mph
4. Roof Load(Snow/Ice): 100 psf
5. Floor Live Load: 200 psf.
6. Average Yearly Rainfall: 12 inches
7. Altitude (above sea level): 5827 feet
8. Seismic Requirements: Zone 3
Internal Use Only
95-184-8 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power 95-184 Furnish and Deliver Pre-Manufactured Communications Shelter
3.2. Shelter
a. General:
1. The shelter shall be configured in an arrangement as shown in the shelter plan in
Appendix A.
2. The shelter shall consist of vandal resistant, precast,preassembled concrete panels
constructed with either glass fiber reinforced concrete or steel reinforced concrete.
Manufacture of the precast concrete elements shall occur in a suitable environment
(enclosed building preferred).Manufacturer must have a minimum of one ACI Certified
Level 1 Concrete Technician supervising the placing of concrete in the forms.
Reinforcing to be as per manufacturer's engineered structural analysis.
3. Shelters shall incorporate non-porous wall and roof sections, to preclude capillary
action, and shall be so designed.
4. Panel to panel connections shall be welded.
5. All exterior fasteners and hardware shall be stainless steel.
6. Steel structural wall framing(rectangular steel tubing)may be utilized for connection of
plywood paneling on the interior walls of the building.
7. The shelter shall have a minimum interior ceiling height of 10 feet.A minimum
clearance of 2'-0" above all cable trays within the shelter shall be provided.All cable
trays are to be installed at a height 8'-0" above the finished floor to the bottom of the
cable tray.
8. The design and construction of the shelter shall minimize the use of gaskets to prevent
the entrance of moisture and dust. The use of gaskets shall be limited to doors.
Caulking shall be utilized between flooring and walls. There shall be no exposed roof to
wall or wall to floor exterior joint sealants. Wall to wall,wall to roof, and wall to floor
seals shall be internal.
9. Length and width tolerances of the formed panels shall be+0" and-1/32". The diagonal
tolerance of the formed panels shall be± 1/16". These tolerances are specified to insure
a uniform fit and reduce the potential for weather intrusion.
10. Exterior walls are to be earth tone exposed aggregate with brown trim.All openings in
shelters will be caulked and weatherproofed.
11. The base shall be capable of being either skidded or crane lifted onto the final
foundation. Lifting points shall be provided on the base of the shelter to allow the lifting
of the shelter using a crane.
12. The generator room shall be part of the concrete shelter with a solid fireproof wall
between it and the communication equipment room, and a separate entrance door as
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-184-9

95-184 Furnish and Deliver Pre-Manufactured Communications Shelter Idaho Power
shown. The generator room shall utilize the same type door as the communication
equipment room.
13. Wall entries shall be provided for generator engine inputs and exhaust, electrical cables
and alarms as specified herein.
b. Concrete:
1. Compressive strength shall be 4500 PSI at 28 days. Mix design of 114-118 lb/cu. ft.
structural lightweight concrete expanded shale or expanded clay aggregate is preferred.
Mix shall be homogeneous. Seeding of aggregate for exposed aggregate finish is not
allowed. Cement used in concrete shall be standard Portland cement conforming to the
requirement of the "Standard Specifications for Portland Cement", ASTM Designation
C 150. Concrete aggregates shall conform to one of the following specifications:
a. Specifications for Concrete Aggregates,ASTM Designation: C33.
b. Specifications for Lightweight Aggregates for Structural Concrete,
ASTM Designation C30.
2. Potable water shall be used in mixing concrete. Water shall be free from injurious
quantities of oil, alkali, vegetable matter and salt.
3. Reinforcement bars shall be deformed steel bars conforming to ASTM A615 Grade 60.
4. Welded smooth wire fabric shall be steel wire fabric conforming to ASTM Designation:
A185.
5. Fiber Reinforcement: Polypropylene fibers engineered and designed for secondary
reinforcement of concrete slabs, complying with ASTM C 1116, Type III,not less than
3/4 inch long.Add at manufacturer's recommended rate but not less than 1.5 lb. /cu. yd.
6. The plywood panels shall be in accordance with stressed-skin panel design of the
Timber Design and Construction Handbook.
c. Base/Floor:
1. The base shall provide a rigid square and level foundation for the shelter. The base shall
be capable of withstanding the stress and loads that result from skidding, rolling, or
crane lifting of the completed shipping section with all equipment installed. Deflection
during lifting shall not exceed 1/360 of the unsupported span between and on either side
of the lifting point.
2. Floor section shall be waffled structural precast steel reinforced concrete section with
transverse and longitudinal ribs.All surfaces shall be smooth. The interior surface shall
be covered with 1/8 inch light colored industrial anti-static floor covering(Armstrong
SDT Static Dissipative Excelon Vinyl Composition Tile,Armor Gray No. 51951),
Internal Use Only
95-184-10 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power 95-184 Furnish and Deliver Pre-Manufactured Communications Shelter
installed per manufacturer's recommendations. The floor shall be supplied with
provisions for customer anchoring of equipment.
d. Walls:
1. The wall panels shall be formed to provide the rigidity and structural support necessary
for the loadings specified.
2. Wall section shall be reinforced concrete with an exterior exposed aggregate finish.
e. Interior framing(if utilized) shall be rectangular steel tubing with appropriate yield strength.
Insulate walls as specified herein. Interior finish shall be 3/4" thick CDX plywood, surfaced
with 3/8" OSB with white FRP laminate. Plastic joint or corner shall be installed at all panel
joints. Floor to wall intersection shall be finished with 4" vinyl baseboard.
f. Roof.
1. The roof shall be capable of supporting the specified roof load. This minimum load
support criteria is in addition to all other equipment that is supported by the roof such as
lights and future waveguide supports.
2. The roof section shall be waffled structural precast steel reinforced concrete section
with transverse and longitudinal ribs with 1/8" per foot drainage slope. The roof shall
provide at least a 2" overhang on all sides. The roof will be a hip type sloping two (2)
directions. It shall be a cap and fit over the walls, leaving no exposed roof to wall joint.
3. Ceiling insulation and finish to be foam board insulation installed on the underside of
the roof panels with two layers of 3/4" OSB plywood followed by 3/8" OSB with white
FRP laminate. OSB layers shall be run at right angles to and offset from each other to
avoid coincident seams. Second layer attachment shall drill through to a strength
member where available. Plastic joint or corner trim shall be installed at all panel joints.
4. The roof structure shall be covered with a 50 mil, white, PVC thermoplastic membrane
roofing material, as manufactured by Duro-Last, Inc., or equal.
g. Doors:
1. Door-The door frame shall be 16 gauge galvanized steel,primed,painted, and fastened
to the wall panel. The door shall be 40"x 84"x 1-3/4" 16 gauge galvanized steel,
insulated,primed,painted and installed flush with door check. Doors shall include pick
plates, v-wedge closures,pull handles, door stop/holds, magnetic weather-stripping,
mortise lockset with deadbolt, threshold, and stainless tamperproof steel ball bearing
hinges. The shelter door(s) shall have an internal lock mechanism to allow rapid exit
from the shelter(no key exit). The door shall be equipped with a device to lock the door
in the open position in order to prevent the door from being damaged by gusting winds.
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-184-11

95-184 Furnish and Deliver Pre-Manufactured Communications Shelter Idaho Power
2. The doors will be oriented such that the doors swing open outward and away from each
other.
3. The doors shall be equipped with Best brand mortise deadbolts with interior thumb
latch. Provide with construction lock cylinders and 3 spare construction keys for Idaho
Power personnel. Idaho Power will supply permanent mortise lock cylinder after
construction.
4. An entry switch, with form'C' contacts rated 0.1 amps at 48 VDC shall be provided.A
switch shall be installed and wired at each door to make a standing door alarm when
switched. This switch shall be on the interior of the shelter near the door and the
lighting switch(es).
h. Snow Entry(if applicable):
1. A steel snow entry shall be provided as shown in Appendix XXX. It shall be 15'-0" in
height and of a 4'-6" square cross section on the upper section. The snow entry shall be
painted brown. The frame shall be 1-1/2" square tubular steel with a wall thickness of
1/8". The outside "skin" shall have a thickness of at least 12 gauge steel.
2. A climbing ladder shall be installed on both the inside and outside of the same wall of
the structure.A padlock-able rain tight cover door shall be installed to allow entry from
the top of the structure. Padlock and hasp shall be secured from tampering or cutting by
a steel cover plate.
3. The bottom section of the snow entry will allow entry to both rooms of the shelter. The
snow entry door is to open outward and hinge away from the ladders.
i. Insulation:
1. Standard wall and ceiling insulation shall be foam board. The minimum insulation
R-values shall be as follows:
a. Walls: R-16.
b. Roof. R-25.
C. Floor: R-13.
3.3. Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning (HVAC)
a. Shelter manufacturer shall supply and install complete air conditioning and heating systems
as required complying with the environmental conditions of these specifications.
b. The heating, ventilation, and air conditioning system shall be sized by the shelter
manufacturer to achieve the performance requirements below given the ambient site
conditions specified(temperatures are to be maintained while the equipment is operating at
Internal Use Only
95-184-12 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power 95-184 Furnish and Deliver Pre-Manufactured Communications Shelter
75% duty cycle), the dimensions and heat retention of the shelter, and 6-kW of heat
dissipated by the electrical equipment within the shelter.
c. The air conditioning equipment shall be capable of maintaining an inside temperature of not
more than 25' C (77' F).
d. The heating equipment shall be capable of maintaining a minimum inside temperature of 20'
C (68' F) with the equipment de-energized.
e. Two Bard Manufacturing Company wall-mount heat pump units (Model WA Series) shall be
installed on the same equipment room wall. The heat pump shall include fresh air damper to
provide 25% outside air. Units are to be mounted as high as practicable due to outside snow
conditions.
f. A lead-lag thermostatic controller(Bard Manufacturing Company Model MC3000-13) shall
be used to control the units, and shall be programmable to cycle both units as the primary
unit. Provide all appropriate cable in conduit between the thermostatic controller and the heat
pump units (e.g. refrigerant lockout alarms, economizer controls, etc.) and to the building
smoke detector(s).
g. An industrial grade 120-volt wall mounted base-board heater(Indeeco BII/BISI Series, or
equal)shall be installed in the generator room,and controlled by a separate wall mounted line
voltage thermostat(Johnson Controls A19BBC-2C). Provide dedicated branch circuit to the
generator room base-board heater.
h. An additional line voltage thermostat(Johnson Controls A19BBC-2C) shall be installed
adjacent to the baseboard heater thermostat in the generator room for alarming purposes.
i. All temperature control equipment shall be installed in strict compliance with manufactures
instructions and guidelines.
3.4. Electrical and Lighting
a. See Appendix B for One-Line Diagram.
b. Service Entrance: The local service will be 120/240 VAC single phase.A 200A Square D
fused main disconnect switch(service entrance rated) shall be installed in the generator room
as shown. Provide meter base on exterior of shelter wall as shown in Appendix A.
Install circuit and raceway between the meter base and the service entrance disconnect switch
utilizing code sized conductor and conduit.
c. AC Panelboard:A Square D Type QO, 125/250V, single-phase, M.L.O., 42 pole, 225 amp,
NEMA 1 enclosure, outfitted with Square D Type QO branch circuit breakers as required by
the load shall be installed on the interior wall on the equipment room side of the shelter.
Branch circuit breaker sizes shall be as required by the shelter loads. Provide 4 spare each of
single pole circuit breakers, and 2 each of double pole circuit breakers matching those
utilized by the shelter load.
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-184-13

95-184 Furnish and Deliver Pre-Manufactured Communications Shelter Idaho Power
d. Transient Surge Suppression:A transient surge suppressor utilizing silicone avalanche diodes
shall be installed in the equipment room. Manufacturer shall provide and install a Joslyn
Model 1265-85, PolyPhaser IS-PM240-BP or Idaho Power approved equivalent,AC surge
arrester for connection to the incoming power lines.
e. Conductor(Power):
I. Conform to applicable requirements of NEMA WC 3,WC 5, and WC 7.
2. Conductor Material: Copper.
3. Stranding: Solid conductor for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded conductor for larger
than No. 10 AWG.
4. Insulation: Type THHN/THWN.
5. Minimum Size: No. 12 AWG.
6. Color Code: In accordance with the NEC.
7. The splicing of conductor wires shall be kept to a minimum.Where splices are required,
wire nuts shall be used and shall be properly sized, insulated type connectors.
8. Conductors shall be continuous from outlet to outlet. Splices shall be made within outlet
boxes or junction boxes only.
9. A minimum of 6 inches of extra conductor wire shall be provided at each outlet to make
splices or joints, except where it is intended to loop through sockets, receptacles and
other fixtures without splices or joints.
f. Conductor(alarming):
I. Cable: Plenum-rated with FEP Teflon insulation and blue FEP jacket; third parry
verified to Category 5e; unshielded with four twisted pairs.
2. Conductors:AWG 24 solid copper.
3. Manufacturers and Products: Belden Type 1585LC.
g. Cable Tray:
1. Cable tray shall be Newton Instrument Company Model#0020033830, ladder-type, 2"
deep, and 18" width. Utilize Newton Instrument Company associated components for
connection, grounding, and supporting as necessary for a complete system.
2. Two 18" gray painted steel cable trays will be installed lengthwise in the equipment
room as shown on the drawings. The cable tray shall be designed and installed with
continuous lengths along the long dimension of the room with their center lines Y-0"
Internal Use Only
95-184-14 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power 95-184 Furnish and Deliver Pre-Manufactured Communications Shelter
out from the lengthwise walls. Three more sections of 18" wide cable tray are to be
installed perpendicular to the lengthwise trays as shown. They are to be spaced apart
5'-0" and centered in the room layout.All cable trays are to be installed at a height 8'-0"
above the finished floor to the bottom of the cable tray.All trays are to be installed with
the tray side supports protruding down toward the floor as to make the cable tie down
surface flat.
3. All trays are to be suspended from the walls (not the ceiling)using framing channel
strength members between the lengthwise walls.Attach cable tray to framing channel
using anti-slip clips.
4. Where cable trays meet a wall they will be attached to the wall using a"wall angle."
(Newton Instrument Company Model#0021210830).All cable tray sections will be
bonded together with ground straps, and the assembly bonded to the halo ground
wherever it meets the wall.
5. Install tray level,plumb, straight, and true to line or grade within a tolerance of 1/8" in
25 feet and within a cumulative maximum of 1/2". Install without exposed raw edges.
6. Cable tray shall not be utilized for installation of any shelter wire or cable.
h. Conduit(Raceways):
1. All interior shelter wiring shall be installed in surface mounted electrical metallic tubing
(EMT). Provide all conduit fittings as required to meet the requirements of the NEC.
2. Connections to equipment where flexible connection is required to minimize vibration
shall be made utilizing flexible metal liquid-tight conduit.
3. Diameter: Minimum 3/4-inch.
4. Follow structural surface contours when installing exposed raceways. Raceways
parallel or perpendicular to walls, structural members, or intersection of vertical plains.
There shall be no horizontally installed raceways on the walls in the equipment room
within the area 12" above the floor to 8'above the floor(i.e.the height of the cable tray).
In addition, no raceways shall be installed in front of HVAC grills or in front of
waveguide entry ports.
5. Junction boxes larger than 4"X 4" shall be located a minimum of 8' above the floor on
the walls in the equipment room.
6. Crushed or deformed raceways are not permitted. Ream, remove burrs, and clear
interior of installed conduit before pulling wires or cables.
7. Support raceways from structural members only, at intervals not exceeding NEC
requirements, and in any case not exceeding 8 feet. Do not support from other raceways
or cable tray.
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-184-15

95-184 Furnish and Deliver Pre-Manufactured Communications Shelter Idaho Power
i. Lighting:
1
1. The shelter interior shall be provided with overhead lighting (Lithonia Type LB)
consisting of 48-inch dual-tube 120 VAC fluorescent(32W T8) fixtures installed with
impact protective shields and interference suppression. The lighting shall be controlled
by a switch located within 12" of the latch side of each entrance door. The lighting shall
provide a minimum illumination level of 70 foot-candles at a height of 3 feet above the
floor. Lighting shall not be installed directly above cable tray.
2. Exterior light shall be 100W HPS Lithonia type TW and operated by single pole switch
located on interior of the shelter adjacent to interior light switches and door alarm
switch.
j. Receptacles:
1. Receptacles shall be rated 20 amp, 120V, 3 wire, grounding type, specification grade
duplex and shall be on separate circuits.
2. Each room in the shelter shall be provided with 120 VAC, 20-amp, double duplex
convenience outlets located every 4 feet. In addition, one weatherproof GFCI duplex
outlet shall be mounted on both the front and back exterior walls of the building (4'
AFG), and each connected to its own circuit. Interior outlets shall be installed at 12"
height above floor level in each room.
3. Number of outlets per branch circuit shall be in accordance with NEC.
3.5. Engine Generator Set
a. Shelter manufacturer shall provide and install as a complete and functional system including
all required louvers/dampers, flexible bellows for radiator cooling air,jacket water heater,
circuits and raceways for control and power wiring, and all other engine generator associated
systems.
b. Cummins Power Generation America Model GGPC 120/240-volt, single phase, 60Hz with
the following options:
1. B267 Alternator
2. PCC2100 Power Command Control with Echelon Lon Works interface, (3) auxiliary
relays, and digital I/O module.
3. 120-VAC jacket water heater suitable to maintain engine water temperature at 120
degrees F with an ambient temperature of 50 degrees F.
4. LP gas fuel
5. Battery charger
Internal Use Only
95-184-16 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power 95-184 Furnish and Deliver Pre-Manufactured Communications Shelter
6. Battery rack
1
7. Coolant drain extension
8. Oil drain extension
9. 5 year comprehensive warranty
c. Automatic starting controls shall be wired for remote interface and control by an automatic
transfer switch (specified herein). Controls shall cause engine generator set to start and run
upon closure of a remote dry contact.
d. Intake air dampers shall be motorized 120-VAC (two-position with spring return) with blade
and side seals. Intake air damper shall open whenever the generator is commanded to run.
Exhaust dampers shall be gravity operated.All intake and exhaust vents are to be a minimum
of 12'-0" above top of concrete shelter foundation.
e. Provide snorkel-type vent hoods (unless specified otherwise) for the intake and exhaust
vents. Vent hoods are to be sturdily constructed and mounted so that maintenance will not be
required to keep them attached to the structure.All vent hoods shall be constructed of a
minimum of 16 GA., G.I. sheet metal.
f. Engine exhaust shall incorporate a sound muffling device. Provide generator exhaust pipe
vertical extension to extend the exhaust a minimum of 12" above the shelter roofline. Provide
with condensation drain, clamp assemblies, and exhaust flapper as required.
g. Two wall penetrations shall be provided for LP gas connection to generator and 3/4" conduit
penetration for tank pressure monitoring (pressure monitoring system to be installed by
others). Penetration size for the LP gas connection shall be as required by the generator.
These two penetrations shall be located within 12 inches of each other and on the same wall.
h. Generator engine heater shall be thermostatically controlled via wall mounted line voltage
thermostat(Johnson Controls A19BBC-2C).
i. Both the generator battery charger and generator engine heater shall have their own dedicated
branch circuit to each from the AC load center(i.e. not sharing the circuit).
j. Furnish, tag, and box for shipment and storage the following spare parts and special tools:
1. Fuel line filter element (3 complete sets).
2. Lubricating oil filter elements with gasket(3 complete sets).
3. Air cleaner filter element(1 complete set).
4. Fuel and jacket water pump packing/seals (1 complete set).
5. Cooling fan drive belt(2 complete sets).
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-184-17

95-184 Furnish and Deliver Pre-Manufactured Communications Shelter Idaho Power
6. Hydrometer(1 each).
7. Two-pronged battery voltmeter(1 each).
8. Special tools required to maintain or dismantle Engine Generator Set(1 complete set).
9. Spare fuses, if used in the control panel(1 complete set).
10. Spare indicating lights (4 each type used).
3.6. Automatic Transfer Switch
a. Automatic transfer switch shall be ASCO 7000 Series Model 7ATSA2200F5XC/18B/18G.
b. The automatic transfer switch shall be physically installed in the generator room, and
electrically installed between the service entrance fused disconnect and the AC panelboard.
3.7. Alarms And Fire Protection
a. Form"C"type contact alarms (rated for 0.1 amps at 48Vdc) shall be provided for the
following functions (associated device listed in parenthesis):
1. Equipment room door entry alarm (Door Entry Switch)
2. Generator room door entry alarm(Door Entry Switch)
3. Auto transfer switch alarms (Automatic Transfer Switch)
4. Equipment room smoke alarm(Smoke Detectors)
5. Generator room smoke alarm(Smoke Detectors)
6. Surge Arrestor alarm(Surge Arrestor)
7. Generator room low temperature alarm (Thermostat)
8. HVAC alarms (Equipment Room Temperature Controller)
9. Generator alarms (Generator Control Panel)
10. Battery charger alarms (Generator Battery Charger)
b. A 4'W X 4'H X 3/4" thick plywood wall mounted Telco board shall be provided in the
equipment room for punch block mounting (by others) at the location shown in Appendix A.
Telco board shall be painted with white epoxy paint.
c. Provide 3/4-inch conduit from each of the above listed alarming equipment to the
Telco board.
Internal Use Only
95-184-18 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power 95-184 Furnish and Deliver Pre-Manufactured Communications Shelter
d. All listed alarms shall be wired out at the alarm equipment and cabled to the Telco board for
connection at the Telco board by others.All alarm cables shall be tagged with the alarm
function as listed above, and shall be coiled(provide 8' of slack) at the Telco board for
termination by others.
1. Install two Cat. 5 cables in conduit from the Telco board to the generator control panel,
and two Cat. 5 cables in conduit from the Telco board to the automatic transfer switch.
Do not terminate the conductors within the generator control panel and the automatic
transfer switch(conductors to be terminated by others).
2. Install one Cat. 5 cable in the conduit from the Telco board to each remaining alarm
device, and terminate the conductors at those devices.Alarm circuits shall not be daisy
chained together.
e. Fire protection for the shelter shall be via 120-VAC smoke detectors/alarms installed in the
equipment room and the generator room. The equipment room smoke detector alarm circuit
shall also be wired to the equipment room temperature controller for proper HVAC control
during a fire. Provide conduit and Cat. 5 conductor between the smoke detector(s) and the
equipment room temperature controller as required.
1. A Class ABC fire extinguisher shall be installed in the equipment room.
3.8. Cable Entry Panel
a. Two Valmont'Microflect' waveguide entry panels (Microflect B576) will be installed in the
wall at the location shown in Appendix A. They are to be installed at 9'-0" center line above
the finished floor. They are to be installed adjacent to one another.All waveguide entry panel
ports are to have sealing caps installed
3.9. Grounding
a. Provide NEC required grounding conductor from the service entrance fused disconnect
switch to the shelter system ground. The grounded circuit conductor(neutral) from the
generator to the load shall not be disconnected by the transfer switch. Because the generator
is grounded by connection to the normal system ground, it is not a separately derived system,
and there are no requirements for grounding the neutral at the generator.
b. Install green ground conductor in conduit containing power conductors. Connect ground
conductors to raceway grounding bushings.Extend and connect ground conductors to ground
bus in all equipment containing a ground bus. Connect enclosure of equipment containing
ground bus to that bus. Utilize bolt connections to equipment ground bus. Bond grounding
conductors to metallic enclosures at each end, and to intermediate metallic enclosures.
c. An internal shelter ground-bar will be installed(by others)below the waveguide entry ports.
The shelter manufacturer shall provide holes (sleeved with 2" PVC sleeves)through the wall
as shown in Appendix C for installation of a through-wall grounding system using the exact
dimensions shown. There will be one set of holes per waveguide entry panel. The centerline
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-184-19

95-184 Furnish and Deliver Pre-Manufactured Communications Shelter Idaho Power
of these holes shall be located exactly 1'-4" below the bottom of the waveguide entry port
wall opening.
d. Install a"halo' ground system consisting of#1/0 AWG bare stranded copper halo located
approximately 6 inches below the ceiling throughout the entire shelter.
1. Install two#1/0 AWG bare stranded copper conductors (one each side of the waveguide
ports) from the halo ground system to the area where the internal shelter ground bar will
be installed. Conductors shall extend a minimum of two feet beyond the location of the
ground bar location. Coil conductor and secure to wall for termination to ground bar by
others.
2. Provide electrical bonding between all concrete-encased steel rebar(roof, walls, and
floor) and interior rectangular steel tube wall framing (if applicable). Provide vertical
#1/0 AWG bare stranded copper drops at each corner of the shelter and one at the center
of each long wall in the equipment room from the halo ground.
a. If steel tube wall framing is utilized, these drops shall be bonded to the interior
rectangular steel tube framing using 2-hole lugs, and shall be accessible for
visual inspection.
b. If no steel tube wall framing is utilized, these drops shall be routed through the
wall via 1" schedule 40 PVC penetration cast at 45 degrees and bonded to the
exterior grounding plate specified below using appropriate lugs. The wall
penetration shall be 18 inches above finished floor.
e. Provide grounding plates for exterior connection to concrete-encased reinforcing steel
(ERICO B 164-2Q or LP-C682). Grounding plates shall be located on the outside of the
shelter at each corner and one at the center of each long wall. Grounding plates shall be
installed no higher than 18-inches above finished grade. The ground plates shall be cast flush
with the concrete and either Cadwelded to the reinforcing steel using 1/0 bare stranded
copper conductor or clamped to the reinforcing steel. The customer will utilize these
grounding plates for connection to the on-site grounding system.
f. Cable trays, ladders, metal doors and all other exposed metal elements shall be bonded to the
internal halo ground with#6 bare stranded copper.
g. Utilize an 8" minimum radius for all bonding jumpers connected to the halo ground.
h. Extend#6 bare stranded copper across every cable tray connection and connect with 2-hole
lugs. Door frames shall be bonded to the door utilizing flexible copper braid and 2-hole lugs.
i. Use of the "antioxidant" at all dissimilar metal connections shall be utilized.
j. Grounding of electrical power and surge suppression equipment shall be performed in strict
compliance to the latest edition of the National Electric Code and manufacturer's data.
Internal Use Only
95-184-20 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power 95-184 Furnish and Deliver Pre-Manufactured Communications Shelter
3.10. Nameplates
a. Nameplates shall be provided for all the equipment to be furnished. Engraved nameplates
shall be made from laminated black with white core plastic with lettering engraved through
the black outside layer so that the letters appear white. Nameplates shall be located and
positioned such that they will be easily accessible and visible, and the information thereon
shall be clearly legible.
b. Nameplates will be secured with screws.
c. All electrical equipment(heaters,panelboards, transfer switch, etc.) that is separately
mounted in the shelter shall be permanently labeled to match the device designations on the
manufacturer's drawings or panelboard schedule. Terminal blocks shall be labeled top to
bottom, left to right.
d. All devices, including those that do not require nameplates on the front panel, such as
terminal blocks and fuse blocks, shall be labeled on the rear panel. Labels shall be self
adhesive white markers with printed device designations corresponding to those used on the
drawings.
e. A Manufacturer's label shall be install inside the front door of each unit and shall contain the
following information:
1. Manufacturer's name, address:
2. Owner's name:
3. Owner's purchase order or contract number:
4. Project Name:
5. Serial Number:
f. Thermostats:
1. Generator room thermostats: The three thermostats shall be labeled as follows:
a. Generator Room Temperature Control
b. Generator Block Heater
C. Generator Room Low Temperature Alarm
2. Equipment room thermostat: Label "Equipment Room Temperature Control".
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-184-21

95-184 Furnish and Deliver Pre-Manufactured Communications Shelter Idaho Power
3.11. Assembly and Transportation
a. The Manufacturer shall completely assemble the shelter and equipment at the factory prior to
shipment to insure that the total assembly will properly fit and function as specified.All
electrical equipment shall be wired and functionally tested for proper operation prior to
shipment.
b. The Manufacturer shall prepare a master bill of materials for all equipment to be supplied
under this contract. This master bill of material, annotated for the material shipped, shall be
provided at the time of each shipment.
c. The Manufacturer will provide complete unloading and assembly instructions and special
tools as may be required as part of the shipment. Rigging (i.e. cables, spreader bar, etc.)
required for crane unloading should not be considered as part of the special tools.
d. It will be the responsibility of Idaho Power Company to provide all equipment and labor
necessary to unload,place, and reassemble the shelter.
e. Shelter:
1. The Manufacturer shall provide adequate lifting points for the shelter as shipped. The
shelter shall be shipped on a designated truck.
2. The shelter/shelter shall be shipped as one completely assembled unit.
3. If necessary, the shelter shall be supported with shipping braces of sufficient strength
and placement to allow lifting by sling(s), or rolling across uneven surfaces while
preventing damage to the shelter. This bracing will not be required if the shelter can be
moved, as described above, without being deformed or causing undue stress to the
equipment. The shelter shall be protected such that during shipment it will not be
damaged resulting from the entrance of dirt or moisture.
4. Idaho Power Company will make provisions for anchoring the shelter on a level and flat
foundation at its final location.
f. Other Equipment:
1. All equipment not bolted to the housing structure and not forming a part thereof in
shipment, shall be packed in separate boxes with individual and itemized packing lists.
If adequately tied down and braced, these boxes may be shipped within the shelter
assembly.
3.12. Supplements
a. Appendix A- Shelter plan showing cable tray, snow entry (if applicable), and locations of
meter base, waveguide port entry, doors, major electrical equipment, and telco/alarm board.
b. Appendix B - Single-Line diagram.
Internal Use Only
95-184-22 Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023)

Idaho Power 95-184 Furnish and Deliver Pre-Manufactured Communications Shelter
c. Appendix C - Ground bar detail and associated hole drilling template.
1
Internal Use Only
Stations Construction Specification (Applicable Through 3/31/2023) 95-184-23